Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 533

206-97040

Sep. 2007

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SYSTEM USER'S GUIDE
UV-1800
SHIMADZU
SPECTROPHOTOMETER

Read the instruction manual thoroughly before you use the


product. Keep this instruction manual for future reference.

1078 OF 4699
Introduction

Read this manual thoroughly before using the instrument.

Thank you for purchasing this instrument. This manual describes installation, operation,
hardware validation, cautions for use, and details on accessories and options. Read the
manual thoroughly before using the instrument. Use the instrument in accordance with
the manual's instructions. Keep this manual for future reference.

IMPORTANT
• If the user or usage location changes, be sure this Instruction Manual is always kept together with the
product.
• If this documentation or the warning labels on the instrument become lost or damaged, promptly obtain
replacements from your Shimadzu representative.
• To ensure safe operation, read the Safety Instructions before using the instrument.
• To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative for installation, adjustment, or re-
installation after moving the instrument to a different site.

COPYRIGHT • © 2007 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.


• Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of the vendor.
• Any errors or omissions which may have occurred in this publication despite the
utmost care taken in its production will be corrected as soon as possible, but not
necessarily immediately upon detection.
• All rights are reserved, including those to reproduce this publication or parts thereof in
any form without permission in writing from Shimadzu Corporation.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries. Other company names and product names
mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies. TM and ® marks are omitted in this manual.

1079 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES i


Safety Instructions

• To ensure safe operation of the instrument, read these Safety Instructions carefully before use.
• Observe all of the WARNINGS and CAUTIONS described in this section. They are extremely important for
safety.
In this manual, warnings and cautions are indicated using the following conventions:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in serious
WARNING injury or possibly death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor to
CAUTION moderate injury or equipment damage.

Emphasizes additional information that is provided to ensure the proper use of this
NOTE product.

The symbol used in this manual is as follows:

^ Indication of location for related information in the instruction manuals

ii UV-1800 SERIES 1080 OF 4699


Installation Site Precautions

WARNING
When using flammable and toxic samples, be sure to install ventilation equipment at an
installation site.

CAUTION
• The weight of this instrument is 15 kg. During installation, consider the entire weight
combined with other instruments.
The lab table on which this instrument is installed should be strong enough to support
the total weight of this instrument. It should be level, stable and have depth of at least
600 mm.
Otherwise, the instrument could tip over or fall off the table.

• Avoid installation sites that are exposed to corrosive gases or excessive dust.
These adverse conditions may be detrimental to maintaining instrument performance
and may shorten its service life.

1081 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES iii


Installation Precautions
To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative for installation, adjustment, or re-installation
after moving the instrument to a different site.

WARNING
• Take Measures to prevent the instrument from falling in the event of earthquake or
other disaster.
Strong vibrations could cause the instrument to fall over, resulting in injury.

• The power supply voltages and power consumptions of this instrument are listed below.
The power supply voltage of the instrument is indicated on the label on the side of the
instrument. Connect the instrument only to a power supply of the voltage indicated;
otherwise, fire or electric shock could result. Check that the power supply voltage is
stable and that its current capacity is sufficient to operate all the components of the
system. If not, the instrument will not operate at its rated performance.

Power Supply Voltage Power


Frequency
(Indicated on the instrument) Consumption

AC100 V-120 V and AC220 V-240 V


140 VA 50-60 Hz
(100-120 V and 220-240 V ~)

• Ground the instrument


Grounding is necessary to prevent electric shock in the event of an accident or
electrical discharge, and important for ensuring stable operation.

• Do not place heavy objects on the power cord, and keep any hot items away.
The cord could be damaged, resulting in fire, electrical shock or malfunction. If the cord
becomes damaged, contact your Shimadzu representative immediately.

• Do not modify the cord in any way. Do not bend it excessively or pull on it.
The cord could be damaged, resulting in fire, electrical shock or malfunction. If the cord
becomes damaged, contact your Shimadzu representative immediately.

iv UV-1800 SERIES 1082 OF 4699


Operation Precautions

WARNING
• Always wear protective gloves when handling any toxic or biologically infectious
samples.
• Do not use flammable sprays (hair sprays, insecticide sprays, etc.) near the instrument.
They could ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION
• Do not use mobile phones near the instrument.
They could damage data.

1083 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES v


Precautions for Instrument Inspection, Maintenance,
Adjustment and Care.

WARNING
• Unplug the instrument before inspection, maintenance, or parts replacement.
Otherwise, electrical shock or short-circuit accidents could occur.

• Never remove the main cover.


This may cause injury or malfunction of the instrument.
The main cover does not need to be removed for routine maintenance, inspection and adjustment.
Have your Shimadzu representative perform any repairs requiring removal of the main cover.

• If the power cord plug gets dusty, remove the plug from the power outlet and wipe away
the dust with a dry cloth.
If dust is allowed to accumulate, fire could result.

• Replacement parts must be of the specifications given in "1.1 UV-1800 Configuration"


and "6.2 Maintenance Parts".
Use of any other parts may result in instrument damage and malfunction.

• If any water gets onto the instrument, wipe it away immediately to prevent rust. Never
use alcohol or thinner solvents for cleaning the instrument.
They could cause discoloration.

• Dispose waste liquid properly and in accordance with the instructions of your
administrative department.

vi UV-1800 SERIES 1084 OF 4699


Emergency Operation
In an emergency situation, press the " " side of the power switch located on the right side bottom of the UV-
1800 to turn OFF the instrument.

Power OFF
(" " side is pressed in.)

Operation at Power Outage


In case of electrical failure, perform the following operations:

1. Press the " " side of the power switch located on the right side bottom of the UV-1800 to turn OFF the
instrument.
2. After the power comes back on, start up the UV-1800 normally by following "Installation Precautions" and
"Operation Precautions".

1085 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES vii


Warning Labels
For safety operation, warning labels are affixed where special attention is required.
Should any of these labels peel off or be damaged, obtain replacements from Shimadzu Corporation.

(Right side)

High Temperature
Light source and light source chamber
are very hot. When replacing the light
source, be sure to turn OFF the power
and check that the light source is
completely cooled.

viii UV-1800 SERIES 1086 OF 4699


Product Warranty

Our company provides a warranty on this product, as stated below.

Details
1. Warranty Period: Please consult your Shimadzu representative for information about the extent of
the warranty.
2. Warranty Description: If failure occurs for reasons attributable to our company during the warranty
period, our company will provide repairs or the replacement of parts without
charge (including USB dongles). However, we may not be able to provide identical
products in the case of products such as PCs, and their peripherals and parts,
which have a short lifespan in the market.
3. Warranty Exceptions: The failures caused by the following events are excluded from the warranty, even
if they occur during the warranty period.
1) The product is handled in an improper way.
2) Repairs or modifications are performed by companies or people
other than our company and our designated companies.
3) This product was used in combination with hardware or software
other than those designated by our company.
4) Device failures and damage to data and software, including the
basic software, that are caused by computer viruses.
5) Device failures and damage to data and software, including the
basic software, that are caused by power failures, including power
outages and sudden drops of voltage.
6) Device failures and damage to data and software, including the
basic software, that are caused by powering off the device without
the proper shutdown procedure.
7) Failures caused by reasons other than the device itself.
8) Failures caused by use in harsh environments, such as in high
temperature or humidity, corrosive gas, or vibration.
9) Failures caused by fires and earthquakes or any other act of
providence, contamination by radio active substances and
hazardous substances, or any other force majeure event including
wars, riots, and crimes.
10) Problems occur because the device is transferred or transported
after installation.
11) Expendable items and parts
Note: Recording media such as floppy disks and CD-ROMs are
considered expendables.

* If these is a document such as a warranty attached to the product, or there is a separate contract agreed
upon that includes warranty conditions, the rules stated in those documents shall be followed.
Warranty periods for products with special specifications and systems are provided separately.

1087 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES ix


After-Sales Service and Replacement Parts Availability

After-Sales Service If any problem occurs with this instrument, inspect it and take appropriate
corrective action as described in the Section "Troubleshooting". If the problem
persists, or symptoms not covered in the Troubleshooting section occur, contact
your Shimadzu representative.

Replacement Parts Replacement parts for this instrument will be available for a period of seven (7)
Availability years after the discontinuation of the product. Thereafter, such parts may cease to
available. Note, however, that the availability of parts not manufactured by
Shimadzu shall be determined by the relevant manufacturers.

Disposal Precautions

„ Disposal of UV-1800
When disposing of the UV-1800, contact your Shimadzu representative.
Otherwise, be sure to dispose of the product separately from general garbage, in compliance with the
applicable laws or regulations in the country or region where it is used.

„ When disposing of deuterium (D2) lamp


If the deuterium (D2) lamp should be broken or its life is finished, dispose of the lamp separately from
general garbage. When disposing of the deuterium (D2) lamp supplied from Shimadzu Corporation, select a
method which will not adversely influence the environment or human body, or ask a special disposal dealer
for advice or assistance.
The materials of deuterium (D2) lamp are as follows.

• Metals (Tungsten)
• Quartz glass
• Ceramic
• Plastic

Action for Environment (WEEE)

To all user of Shimadzu equipment in the European Union:


Equipment marked with this symbol indicates that it was sold on or after 13th August 2005,
which means it should not be disposed of with general household waste. Note that our
equipment is for industrial/professional use only.

Contact Shimadzu service representative when the equipment has reached the end
of its life. They will advise you regarding the equipment take-back.

WEEE Mark

With your co-operation we are aiming to reduce contamination from waste electronic and electrical equipment
and preserve natural resource through and recycling.
Do not hesitate to ask Shimadzu service representative, if you require further information.

x UV-1800 SERIES 1088 OF 4699


Regulatory Information

For Europe:
The product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC.

Product Name: UV-Visible Spectrophotometer

Model Name: UV-1800

Manufacturer: SHIMADZU CORPORATION


ANALYTICAL & MEASURING INSTRUMENTS DIVISION

Address: 1, NISHINOKYO-KUWABARACHO,
NAKAGYO-KU, KYOTO, 604-8511, JAPAN

Authorized Representative in EU: Shimadzu Europa GmbH

Address: Albert-Hahn-Strasse 6-10, 47269 Duisburg, F.R. Germany

1089 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES xi


CONTENTS

Chapter 1 General
1.1 UV-1800 Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Components ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 UV-1800 Main Body, Front and Top Views........................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 UV-1800 Main Body, Left Side View..................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 UV-1800 Main Body, Right Side View .................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.4 Sample Compartment ........................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.5 Keypad.................................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.2.6 Light Source Compartment ................................................................................................... 1-8

Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Installation Site .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 Installation Requirements and Preparation........................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Installation Space.................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2 Connecting Power ............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.1 Verifying Power Supply Voltage............................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.2 Connecting to the Power Outlet ............................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.3 Grounding ............................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.3 Checking the Light Source Lamp (D2)............................................................................................... 2-7
2.4 Operation Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization ............................................................................................ 2-9
2.5.1 Power ON/OFF ..................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Initialization Operation ........................................................................................................ 2-10
2.5.3 Switching System Language............................................................................................... 2-12
2.6 Instrument Baseline Correction ....................................................................................................... 2-13
2.7 Performance Check after Installation............................................................................................... 2-15
2.7.1 Parameter Settings ............................................................................................................. 2-15
2.7.2 Performing Validation.......................................................................................................... 2-16

Chapter 3 Maintenance & Inspection


3.1 Inspection and Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.1 List of Periodic Inspection & Maintenance Items .................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Inspecting the Sample Compartment ................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Checking and Resetting the Lamp Usage Time ................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1 Checking Procedure ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.3.2 Resetting Procedure ............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.4 Replacing the Light Source................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.4.1 Light Source Specifications................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.2 Lamp Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................. 3-8
3.5 Cleaning the Exterior ....................................................................................................................... 3-15

Chapter 4 Replacing the Sample Compartment Parts


4.1 Removing/Installing the Cell Holder................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Removing the Cell Holder ..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Installing the Cell Holder ....................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Unit (Standard) ........................................................ 4-4
4.2.1 Removing the Sample Compartment Unit ............................................................................ 4-4
4.2.2 Installing the Sample Compartment Unit .............................................................................. 4-5
4.3 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Front Cover ............................................................. 4-7
4.3.1 Removing the Sample Compartment Front Cover and Installing the Front Plate ................. 4-7
4.3.2 Installing the Sample Compartment Front Cover.................................................................. 4-8

xii UV-1800 SERIES 1090 OF 4699


Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Errors during Initialization .................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2 Problems: Symptoms and Solutions.................................................................................................. 5-4

Chapter 6 Reference
6.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Hardware Specifications ....................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Software Specifications ........................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2 Maintenance Parts............................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.2.1 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.2.2 Maintenance Parts................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.2.3 Repair Parts.......................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics ................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.3.1 What is Light? ....................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.2 Ultraviolet/Visible Spectrum................................................................................................ 6-11
6.3.3 Bouguer-Beer's Law ........................................................................................................... 6-12
6.3.4 Qualitative Analysis and Quantitative Analysis................................................................... 6-13
6.3.5 Calibration Curve ................................................................................................................ 6-14
6.3.6 Solvent Selection ................................................................................................................ 6-15
6.3.7 Calibration Curve Curvature ............................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.8 Spectrophotometer Types .................................................................................................. 6-18
6.4 Measurement System...................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.4.1 Optical System.................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.4.2 Electrical System ................................................................................................................ 6-24
6.5 List of Cells ...................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.6 Cleaning the Cell ............................................................................................................................. 6-28

1091 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES xiii


1
1 Installation

Chapter 1 General 1

CONTENTS
1
1.1 UV-1800 Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Components ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1

1092 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-1


1.1 1.1 UV-1800 Configuration

This instrument is shipped with the following items. Upon opening the shipping container, confirm that
1
all of the listed parts are accounted for in your shipment.

1
1

1
5

1
Fig. 1.1 Standard Contents
1

Table 1.1 Standard Contents


1
Check Description Part No. Qty.

1 1 Spectrophotometer 206-25201-91 1

2 AC Power Cable 071-60816-12 1

1 3 UV-1800 Instruction Manual-System User's 206-97040 1


Guide (This manual)

1 4 UV-1800 Instruction Manual-Operation 206-97042 1


Guide

5 UVProve Software (Install CD) 206-21439-91 1


1
6 UVProve Tutorial (Instruction Manual) 206-94459 1

7 Shimadzu User Authentication Tool 223-10410 1


1 Instruction Manual

1-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1093 OF 4699


1.2 1.2 Components

1.2.1 UV-1800 Main Body, Front and Top Views 1

6
1

1
3 1
1
2

1
5

1
4

Fig. 1.2 Front and Top Views of UV-1800 1

1
No. Name Description

1 LCD This displays the operation menus and measurement results. 1


2 Keypad This is the input component for giving operation commands and numeric
values to the instrument, etc.
^ "1.2.5 Keypad" 1

3 Sample Compartment Open/close this cover when setting the measured sample.
Cover ^ "1.2.4 Sample Compartment"

4 Sample Compartment These are screws for fastening the sample compartment unit.
Set Screws ^ "4.2 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Unit (Standard)" 1
5 LED This lights when the power to the unit is ON.

6 Light Source This is the cover of the light source compartment. Open/close this cover
Compartment Cover when replacing the light source lamp.
^ "3.4 Replacing the Light Source"

1094 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-3


1.2 Components

1 1.2.2 UV-1800 Main Body, Left Side View

1 



1
1 100-120, 220-240V~


50-60HZ 140VA 

1 AC IN
2

4 3
1 SIPPER
100-120, 220-240V~
50-60HZ 140VA

AC IN

1
SIPPER

Fig. 1.3 Left Side View of UV-1800


1

1 No. Name Description

1 USB Connector You can use these connecters for any of printer, or USB memory stick.
1 You can also connect special accessories described below. In such
cases, however, it is necessary to purchase separately and connect the
designated USB conversion adaptor to each accessory.
1 • 6-cell electronic temperature control cell positioner CPS-240A/B
Ö USB adaptor for CPS (P/N 206-25234-91)
• Auto sample changer ASC-5
1 Ö USB adaptor for ASC (P/N 206-25235-91)
For installation and connection procedures, refer to the instruction
manual of each accessory.

2 USB Connector (for PC) This is the connector for connecting PC during external control
operation.
1 ^ Operation Guide, "17.1 Connecting to a PC"

3 Optional Unit Connector This is the connector to connect the "Sipper 160" or "Syringe sipper"
(special accessories).
For installation and connection procedures, refer to the instruction
manual of each accessory.

4 AC Power Connector Connect the enclosed AC power cable to the supply power from an AC
electrical outlet.
^ "2.2 Connecting Power"

1-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1095 OF 4699


1.2 Components

1.2.3 UV-1800 Main Body, Right Side View 1

1 1

2 1

Fig. 1.4 Right Side View of UV-1800 1

1
No. Name Description

1 USB Connector Plug in the USB memory to this connector.


1
2 Power Switch Use this switch to turn ON/OFF the instrument. Press the "I" side on the
switch to turn ON; press the "O" side to turn OFF.
1

1096 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-5


1.2 Components

1 1.2.4 Sample Compartment

1 4

1
Reference side
1
cell holder

1
2
1 Measurement
side cell holder

1
3

1 Fig. 1.5 Sample Compartment

1 No. Name Description

1 Cell Holder The cell holder for the rectangular 10 mm light path cells has one sample
1 cell holder and one reference cell holder.
^ "6.5 List of Cells"

2 Cell Holder Set Screws The cell holder can be easily removed by loosening the cell holder set
1 screws.
^ "4.1 Removing/Installing the Cell Holder"

3 Sample Compartment When using a flow cell, etc., holes are needed to pass tubing, etc.
Front Cover through. Therefore, this "Sample Compartment" can be removed and
1 exchanged with different types of front panels.
^ "4.3 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Front Cover"

4 Multi-cell Holder Drive This is the connector for connecting the control cables for multi-cell
Connector sample compartment and 8/16-cell micro multi cell holder (MMC-1600)
(special accessories).

1-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1097 OF 4699


1.2 Components

1.2.5 Keypad 1

1
7
5
1
8

1
9

a 1
0

Fig. 1.6 Keypad 1

No. Name Description 1

1 This is the key for starting and stopping measurement once the
parameter setting has been completed. 1
2 When you press this key, the absorbance (transmittance) at the current
wavelength will automatically be set to 0Abs (100 %T). Make sure that
1
prior to sample measurement a blank cuvette is placed in both sample
and reference sides.

3 This is the key that is used to change the current wavelength. 1


4 When you enter a value, press this key after the value to set the entering
value. 1
5 Use these keys to move the cursor on the screen upward/downward, or
left/right. The left cursor key can also be used to enter a negative (–) 1
value when entering numeric values.

6 These are the keys corresponding to the functions that are displayed at
1
the bottom of the screen.

7 Use this key to display to the previous screen.

8 Use this key to adjust the screen contrast. Using cursor keys
while holding down this key changes the contrast.

9 Use this key to output a hard copy of the screen.

0 Use these keys to enter numeric values.


-

a Use this key to clear a numeric value entry error. When you press this
key, the numeric value which has been entered will be cleared and then
you may reenter the appropriate value.

1098 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-7


1.2 Components

1 1.2.6 Light Source Compartment

1
3

1 1

1 2

1
Fig. 1.7 Light Source Compartment

No. Name Description


1
1 Deuterium Lamp (D2 This is the ultraviolet range (190 nm to light source switch wavelength*)
Lamp) light source. For the D2 lamp replacement procedure, refer to "3.4
1 Replacing the Light Source".

2 Tungsten Halogen This is the visible & near infrared range (light source switch wavelength*
Lamp (WI Lamp) to 1100 nm) light source. For the WI lamp replacement procedure, refer
1 to "3.4 Replacing the Light Source".

3 3rd light source (on You can install a light source other than the standard lamps or the
installation site) introduction unit of external light source.

1 * Light source switch wavelength


The light source switch can be set anywhere in the range from 295 nm to 364 nm in 0.1 nm increments.
For details, refer to the Operation Guide, "12.2 Explanation for Setting Instrument Parameters", [4. Light
Source Switching Wavelength].

1-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1099 OF 4699


2
2 Installation

Chapter 2 Installation 2

CONTENTS
2
2.1 Installation Site .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Connecting Power ............................................................................................................................. 2-4 2
2.3 Checking the Light Source Lamp (D2) .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.4 Operation Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization ............................................................................................ 2-9 2
2.6 Instrument Baseline Correction ....................................................................................................... 2-13
2.7 Performance Check after Installation .............................................................................................. 2-15
2

1100 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-1


2.1 2.1 Installation Site

2 2.1.1 Installation Requirements and Preparation


To use the UV-1800 properly and safely, install the instrument in an appropriate location that meets
the following requirements.
2

WARNING
When using flammable and toxic samples, be sure to install ventilation equipment at
2 installation site.

2
CAUTION
2
• DO NOT install the UV-1800 in an environment filled with dust or corrosive gas.
These conditions will adversely affect the durability and performance of the UV-1800.
2
• DO NOT install the UV-1800 near an instrument that produces strong magnetic fields.
2 Magnetic fields may adversely affect the accurate performance of the instrument.
Filters may be added to the power supply lines to reduce any electrical noise.

2 • To ensure instrument performance, the installation site should meet the following
requirements.
2 • The ambient temperature must be between 15 °C and 35 °C with minimal temperature
variations.
• Air currents from air conditioners and heating systems must be avoided.
2 • Exposure to direct sunlight must be avoided.
• The site must be free from vibration.
• Humidity must remain between 35 % and 80 %. No condensation.
2 (Humidity must be maintained at under 70 % at ambient temperatures over 30 °C.)

2-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1101 OF 4699


2.1 Installation Site

2.1.2 Installation Space 2

CAUTION 2

• The weight of the UV-1800 is 15 kg. When selecting the installation location, take into
account the total weight of the UV-1800 and other devices.
Use a desk or stand for installation that can sufficiently support the total instrument
2
weight, having a flat and stable surface with at least 600 mm depth. If these
requirements are not satisfied, the instrument may tip over or fall down, causing an
accident. 2

• Ensure that there is at least 100 mm of clearance between the left side of the UV-1800
and the wall. 2
The power supply unit and the light source unit cooling fan are located on the left side
of the instrument. If location specifications are not met, the air cooling system with fan 2
may work improperly, overheating the instrument and deteriorating its performance.

2
The dimensions of the UV-1800 are as given in the figure below.

2
490 mm

450 mm
2

270 mm

Fig. 2.1

1102 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-3


2.2 2.2 Connecting Power

2 2.2.1 Verifying Power Supply Voltage

2
WARNING
The power supply voltage is indicated on the power supply connector on the side of the
instrument. Be sure to connect the power supply that meets the indicated
2 specifications.
Operating the UV-1800 at supply voltages other than the specified could cause fire,
2 electric shock, and instrument malfunction.

2 Power voltage 100-120, 220-240V~

indication
50-60HZ 140VA

AC IN

2 SIPPER

2
Fig. 2.2

2 The following table shows the power supply voltage, power consumption, and frequency of the UV-1800.

Power Supply Voltage


2 (Indication on product nameplate)
Power Consumption Frequency

100 V - 120 V AC, 220 V - 240 V AC


140 VA 50 - 60 Hz
(100-120, 220-240 V -)

2 Verify that the outlet to be used has a sufficient power capacity. Insufficient power capacity may cause blackouts
and voltage drops, affecting other instruments that use the same power supply.
The range of the allowable voltage fluctuation is within ±10 %. If the fluctuation exceeds 10 %, be sure to use a
voltage stabilizer.

2-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1103 OF 4699


2.2 Connecting Power

2.2.2 Connecting to the Power Outlet 2

WARNING 2

Handle the power supply cable carefully.


Follow the warnings below to avoid cable
damage and the consequent risk of fire,
electric shock, and instrument malfunction. 2
• Do not place heavy objects on the power supply
cable.
• Keep thermal appliances away from the power 2
supply cable.
• Do not modify the power supply cable.
• Do not forcefully bend or stretch the power supply 2
cable.
• Hold the plug when inserting in and removing the
cable from the power outlet. 2

Should the power supply cable become


2
damaged, contact your Shimadzu
representative.
2

CAUTION 2

Verify that the power switch of the UV-1800 is


OFF (i.e., "O" is pressed in) before connecting 2
the electric plug to the outlet.
2

1 Insert the connector of the power supply cable (accessory) into the power supply connector (Fig.
1.3) on the left side of the UV-1800. 2

2 Insert the electric plug of the power supply cable into the power outlet.

1104 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-5


2.2 Connecting Power

2 2.2.3 Grounding

2 WARNING
Ground the instrument to prevent electric shock and provide reliable performance of the
UV-1800.

2
The power supply cable supplied with the UV-1800 consists of three wires including a ground wire. When
installing the instrument, be sure to insert the cable into the three-wire system outlet.
2

2-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1105 OF 4699


2.3 2.3 Checking the Light Source Lamp (D2)

2
WARNING
2
• Before opening the light source compartment cover, turn OFF the instrument power
switch and remove the electric plug from the outlet. Failure to do so may result in fire,
electric shock, and instrument malfunction. DO NOT turn ON the instrument power
while the light source compartment is visually exposed. Ultraviolet light may be
generated, a serious health hazard. 2
• If the UV-1800 has been operating before opening the cover, turn OFF the instrument
and let it stand until the lamp cools down sufficiently. Touching the lamp when it is still
2
hot will burn you.

CAUTION 2
• When removing and installing the light source compartment cover, avoid hitting the
protrusion on the top of the D2 (deuterium) lamp (Fig. 3.8) against the back of the 2
cover. Doing so may cause a vacuum leak in the lamp tube.
• Be sure to wear gloves when handling the light source so as not to leave fingerprints on 2
the glass part. A fingerprint will burn onto the bulb when the light source gets hot, and
light transmission will deteriorate.
2
• Be careful not to break the lamp.

2
According to the procedure described below, check to be sure that the light source D2 (deuterium) lamp did not
become dislodged from the designated position during transportation.
For details on the components on the light source compartment, and the procedure to remove the cover, refer to 2
"3.4 Replacing the Light Source".

2
1 Remove the light source compartment cover.

2
2 Check to be sure that the D2 lamp is seated well in
the socket with no gap.
D2 lamp

Socket
2
If the lamp is mounted at an angle or there is any
gap, reinstall the lamp so that there is no gap in
Mounted to the socket with no gap.
between.

3 Reinstall the light source compartment cover.

Mounted at an angle There is a gap

Fig. 2.3 Checking D2 lamp installation

1106 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-7


2.4 2.4 Operation Precautions

2 „ Precautions Before Operation

2 CAUTION
• Before turning ON the power switch, check to be sure that nothing is placed in the
sample compartment and cell holder.
If the power is turned ON when a sample cell is mounted to the UV-1800, the light
2
source energy check and wavelength check may be judged as "NG" since the light
beam is obstructed.
2 When this occurs, first turn OFF the power switch, remove the cell, and then turn ON
the power switch again.

2 • If "Sipper 160" (special accessory) is mounted, turn ON the power switch with the flow
cell filled with distilled water.
2 If the sample remains halfway within the cell, the light source energy check and
wavelength check may be judged as "NG" since the beam is refracted or scattered on
the remaining sample.
2 If this occurs, turn OFF the power switch and turn it ON again while pressing down the
sipper 160 suction lever. After the pump of the sipper 160 starts rotating, suction the
2 distilled water from the sample suction port. When the distilled water starts being
drained, release the lever and finish the suction operation.

2
„ Precautions During Operation

2
CAUTION
2
• Keep the sample compartment cover closed during measurement or 100 %T (0 Abs)
correction. Any outside light detected on the spectrometer may interfere with accurate
2 measurement and correction.

NOTE
100 %T (0 Abs) is the function to correct the current photometric value to 100 %T for transmittance
measurement, and 0 Abs for absorbance measurement. Performing this correction only for the specified
2 wavelength is called "Auto-zero", and performing within the specified wavelength range is "Baseline
correction".

2-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1107 OF 4699


2.5 2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization

2.5.1 Power ON/OFF 2

Power switch
2
Fig. 2.4 UV-1800 Power Switch

„ Turning ON the Power 2

1 Press "I" on the power switch (Fig. 2.4) to turn ON


the power.
2

2 The items to be initialized appear on the screen, and


start being initialized or checked sequentially. 2
^ "2.5.2 Initialization Operation"

3 When all initialization items are judged "OK", the


Mode Selection screen appears.
2

NOTE
If the security function is ON, the Login screen is
displayed prior to the Mode Selection screen.
^ Operation Guide, "1.3 Login Screen"

1108 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-9


2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization

2 „ Turning OFF the Power

2 1 Press "O" on the power switch to turn OFF the


power.

2.5.2 Initialization Operation


2 When the instrument power is turned ON, the spectrometer executes various initializations and
checks for the items shown in Fig. 2.5. The time required for this initialization is approximately four
minutes.
2
Light Source Lamp Icon
Indicates the illumination status of
the light source lamp.
2 "W" and "D" stand for the halogen
lamp and deuterium lamp,
respectively. This icon is displayed
when the lamp is ON, and not
2 displayed when it is OFF. A blinking
icon indicates that the lamp is OFF
with some errors.

2
Fig. 2.5 Initialization screen

2-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1109 OF 4699


2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization

Table 2.1 Initialization items


2
Initialization items Description

LSI Initialize Initializes each I/O device. 2

ROM Check Checks program ROM.

RAM Check Checks memory elements (RAM).

Filter Initialize Detects the reference position of the stray light filter.
2
Lamp Motor Initialize Detects the reference position of the motor that drives the light source
switching mirror.

WL Motor Initialize Detects the mechanical wavelength origin position. 2

WI Lamp Energy Checks whether or not the WI (halogen) lamp light energy is at a sufficient
level. 2
WI Origin search Checks 0-order light which is the optical origin.

D2 Lamp Energy Checks whether or not the D2 lamp (deuterium) lamp light energy is at a 2
sufficient level.

WL Check Checks wavelength by detecting the emission line at 656.1 nm using the 2
D2 lamp.

Each item is initialized in order, and if the initialization of the item is properly completed, "OK" is displayed next 2
to the item. If any abnormality is detected, however, "NG" is displayed and the initialization process is
terminated. In such a case, note the item for which "NG" is displayed, and turn OFF the instrument. To learn the
check points when an error occurred, refer to "5.1 Errors during Initialization". 2

1110 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-11


2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization

2 2.5.3 Switching System Language


You can arbitrarily change the UV-1800 system language.
If Japanese language instruction manuals are necessary, please contact your Shimadzu
2 representative and purchase them separately.

• UV-1800series System Use's Guide....................... P/N 206-97039


• UV-1800series Operation Guide............................. P/N 206-97041

„ Switching Procedure (English to Japanese)


2

2 1 Turn ON the UV-1800 by pressing the "I" side of the


power switch (Fig. 2.4) while holding down the
key on the keypad.

2
2 The UV-1800 starts up in Japanese mode, and the
initialization operation begins.
2 ^ "2.5 Turning ON the Power and Initialization"

2
Fig. 2.6

NOTE
2
The language mode is switched only when turning ON the power switch with the key
pressed. When not intending to change the language mode, turn ON the power switch as usual
2 without holding down the key.

2-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1111 OF 4699


2.6 2.6 Instrument Baseline Correction

After installing the UV-1800, perform the instrument baseline correction.


2
The UV-1800 has the following two types of baseline correction:

1 Instrument Baseline Correction 2


This corrects the optical balance of the spectrometer itself. The baseline is corrected with a
shorter interval within the entire wavelength range (190 nm - 1100 nm), and the correction data is
stored.

NOTE 2
If the instrument baseline correction is interrupted, the stored data is not overwritten.

2 Baseline Correction
2
This corrects the baseline within the specified wavelength range to 100 %T (0 Abs). This
correction is completed quickly since it is executed within a relatively wide interval. 2
The UV-1800 uses the correction data obtained from 1 when performing 2. Therefore, the steps and
shock noises can be removed in a short time. Usually they can be removed only when corrections are 2
performed with the same interval as that used when the measurement data is obtained.

The procedure to perform "instrument baseline correction" is given below. 2


It takes approximately 17 minutes to complete the correction. Other UV-1800 operations are not
available during that period.
2

1 Verify that nothing is set on the cell holder in the sample compartment, and close the sample
compartment cover.
2

2 Select the
screen (Fig. 2.7).
[Mainte.] key in the Mode menu
2

Fig. 2.7 2
3 Select [Instrument Baseline Correction] in
the Maintenance screen (Fig. 2.8).

Fig. 2.8

1112 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-13


2.6 Instrument Baseline Correction

2 4 Select "Yes" using the


press the key.
keys, and

The instrument baseline correction is started.


2
Fig. 2.9

5 During the correction process, a message will be


displayed at the bottome of the screen.
To terminate the instrument baseline correction,
2 press the key.
Fig. 2.10
2

2-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1113 OF 4699


2.7 2.7 Performance Check after Installation

Once the installation is complete, validate the performance for the following items:
2
• Noise level
• Baseline flatness
• Wavelength accuracy
2
Use the instrument validation function in order to check the performance of the UV-1800. For details
on how to use the function, refer to the Operation Guide, "16. Instrument Validation Function".

2.7.1 Parameter Settings


2
Set validation parameters in the Parameter Input screen for each item as follows:

„ Noise level 2
Perform the validation using the parameters below.
Wavelength : 700 nm
2
Tolerance P-P : 0.30 mAbs or less
RMS : 0.05 mAbs or less
2

Fig. 2.11 Validation parameters for noise level 2

„ Baseline flatness 2
Perform the validation using the parameters below.

Scan range: 1100 - 700 nm 2


Tolerance : 0.6 mAbs or less

Fig. 2.12 Validation parameters for baseline 2


flatness
„ Wavelength accuracy (D2 emission line) 2
Perform the validation using the parameters below.

Wavelength: 656.1 nm, 486.0 nm


Tolerance 656.1 nm: ±0.10 nm
486.0 nm: ±0.30 nm

Fig. 2.13 Validation parameters for


wavelength accuracy (D2 emission line)

1114 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-15


2.7 Performance Check after Installation

2 2.7.2 Performing Validation


Connect the printer to the UV-1800, and start the validation by the following procedure:

1 Press the [Settings] key in the Parameter


Input screen for the instrument validation.

2
Fig. 2.14
2
2 In the Settings screen, set [1.Auto Print] and [Print
Init. status] to [ON].

2
3 Press the key to return to the Parameter
Input screen for the instrument validation.
2

2 Fig. 2.15

2
4 In the screen, press the
validation.
key to start the

2 5 The check result is printed out for each validation


item when the validation is complete.

6 Check the performance of each item by referring to


the printed result.
2

Fig. 2.16

2-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1115 OF 4699


3
3 Maintenance & Inspection

3
Chapter 3 Maintenance &
Inspection
3

CONTENTS
3
3.1 Inspection and Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Inspecting the Sample Compartment ................................................................................................ 3-3 3
3.3 Checking and Resetting the Lamp Usage Time ................................................................................ 3-4
3.4 Replacing the Light Source ............................................................................................................... 3-7
3.5 Cleaning the Exterior ....................................................................................................................... 3-15 3

1116 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-1


3.1 3.1 Inspection and Maintenance

To use the UV-1800 safely, be sure to perform inspection and maintenance on the instrument.

3
WARNING
3
Unless otherwise specified, be sure to turn OFF the UV-1800 and remove the electric
plug from the outlet before performing inspection and maintenance. Failure to do so
3 may result in fire, electric shock, and instrument malfunction.

3
CAUTION
3 • When replacing parts, always use the parts specified in "1.1 UV-1800 Configuration" or
"6.2 Maintenance Parts". Using parts other than those specified may damage the parts,
causing injuries or system malfunction.
3
• DO NOT remove the cover of the UV-1800. Ignoring this may cause injuries or system
malfunction.
3
For internal repair of the UV-1800, contact your Shimadzu representative.

3.1.1 List of Periodic Inspection & Maintenance Items


3
Inspection and maintenance
Everyday 1 year 2 years 3 years Reference
item
3 Sample compartment "3.2 Inspecting the
inspection Sample
Compartment"
3
Lamp usage time check "3.3 Checking and
Resetting the Lamp
3 Usage Time"

WI (halogen) lamp "3.4 Replacing the


replacement Light Source"

D2 (deuterium) lamp "3.4 Replacing the


replacement Light Source"

3-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1117 OF 4699


3.2 3.2 Inspecting the Sample Compartment

CAUTION
3
DO NOT spill water or organic solvent on the UV-1800. Doing so may result in electrical
failure or instrument malfunction.
3

When analyzing liquid sample, check that no solution sample is spilled on the sample compartment 3
before and after measurement. Should you spill any liquid sample, wipe it up immediately.

NOTE
If spilled sample is left in the sample compartment for a while, it evaporates and fills the
compartment, corroding the internal components and interfering with correct measurement results. 3

If solution sample is spilled on the sample compartment bottom, wipe up the spilled solution after
removing the sample compartment unit. For the procedure to remove/install the sample compartment 3
unit, refer to "4.2 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Unit (Standard)".

1118 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-3


3.3 3.3 Checking and Resetting the Lamp Usage Time

The UV-1800 has a function to record and display the accumulated usage time of the WI (halogen)
and D2 (deuterium) lamps used for the light source.
Even though the accumulated usage time is saved to the instrument after the power is turned OFF, the
data will be cleared if any electrical problem occurs. Therefore, if you wish to use the usage time data
3
through this function as a reference for lamp replacement, write down the usage time on the
inspection record periodically. For the service life of each lamp, refer to "3.4.1 Light Source
Specifications".
3

3.3.1 Checking Procedure


3

1 Press the
Selection screen.
[Mainte.] key in the Mode

Fig. 3.1
3
2 The Maintenance screen (Fig. 3.2) appears and the
accumulated usage time of the light source lamps
3 are displayed.

3 3 Press the key to return to the Mode


Selection screen (Fig. 3.1).

3
Fig. 3.2

3-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1119 OF 4699


3.3 Checking and Resetting the Lamp Usage Time

3.3.2 Resetting Procedure 3


After replacing the light source lamp, reset the data of accumulated usage time by the following
procedure.
For the light source replacement, refer to "3.4.2 Lamp Replacement Procedure".
The procedure for resetting the lamp usage time is given below, using the D2 lamp as an example.

3
1 Press the [Maint.] key in the Mode
Selection screen (Fig. 3.3).

3
Fig. 3.3

2 Press the [3. Reset lamp usage time] key


in the Maintenance screen (Fig. 3.4). 3

Fig. 3.4
3
3 The window for selecting the lamp whose usage is to
be reset appears.
Use the keys to move the cursor 3
to [D2 lamp] (Fig. 3.5), and press the key. Cursor
3

Fig. 3.5
3

1120 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-5


3.3 Checking and Resetting the Lamp Usage Time

4 Use the
press the key.
keys to select [Yes], and

The lamp usage time will be reset.


3

Fig. 3.6

5 You will return to the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 3.7).


Verify that [D2 lamp usage time] is reset to "0 hours".
3

3 6 Press the key to return to the Mode


Selection screen (Fig. 3.3).

3
Fig. 3.7

3-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1121 OF 4699


3.4 3.4 Replacing the Light Source

3.4.1 Light Source Specifications


The UV-1800 uses two types of light source lamps: D2 (deuterium) lamp and WI (halogen) lamp. The
D2 lamp and WI lamp are used for ultraviolet region (190 nm - light source switching wavelength*1)
and visible/near-infrared region (light source switching wavelength*1 - 1100 nm), respectively. 3
The closer the lamp service life comes to its end, the smaller the light intensity of each lamp, and the
greater the noise in photometric data.
Replace the light source lamp by referring to the "Rating life*2" described in the table below. 3

*1 The light source switching wavelength can be arbitrarily specified within the range between 295 nm
and 364 nm in increments of 0.1 nm. For details, refer to the Operation Guide, "14.1 Setting 3
Instrument Parameters", [4. Light source].

*2 The rating life below has been determined based on "average life" of a large number of lamps by
the lamp manufacturer. Please note that some lamps may burn out before they reach the end of
their rating lives.
3
Table 3.1

Name Part No. Type Rating Life 3


1 WI (halogen) lamp 062-65005 NA55917 Appox. 2000 hours

2 D2 (deuterium lamp) 062-65055-05 L6380 Appox. 2000 hours 3

Protrusion on top
3

Beam port Beam port 3

3
1 WI (halogen) lamp 2 D2 (deuterium) lamp

3
Fig. 3.8 Light source appearances

1122 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-7


3.4 Replacing the Light Source

3 3.4.2 Lamp Replacement Procedure

WARNING

3 • Before replacing the lamp, turn OFF the instrument power switch and remove the
electric plug from the outlet. Failure to do so may result in fire, electric shock, and
instrument malfunction. DO NOT turn ON the instrument power while the light source
compartment is visually exposed. Ultraviolet light may be generated, a serious health
hazard.
3 • Before replacing the lamp, turn OFF the instrument and let it stand until the lamp cools
down sufficiently. Touching the lamp when it is still hot will burn you.

3
CAUTION
3 • When removing and installing the light source compartment cover, avoid hitting the
protrusion on the top of the D2 (deuterium) lamp (Fig. 3.8) against the back of the
cover. Doing so may cause a vacuum leak in the lamp tube.
3
• Be sure to wear gloves when handling the light source so as not to leave fingerprints on
the glass part. A fingerprint will burn onto the bulb when the light source gets hot, and
3 light transmission will deteriorate.
• Be careful not to break the lamp.
3 • When replacing the WI (halogen) lamp, your hand may contact the D2 lamp. Cover the
D2 lamp with a clean paper or cloth or remove the D2 lamp before the work.
3 • After inserting the WI lamp into the socket, DO NOT forcedly move it to right and left or
up and down. The connection part between the pin and glass may crack, which makes
it impossible for the lamp to illuminate.
3

3-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1123 OF 4699


3.4 Replacing the Light Source

„ Removing the light source compartment cover 3

1 Using a Philips screwdriver, loosen the fixing screw


located on the side of the light source compartment
cover.
3

Fixing 3
screw

3
2 Lift up the side part of the cover to release the notch
from the fixing screw.
3

Notch (on the light


source compartment 3
cover)

Fixing screw 3
3 While sliding the light source compartment cover
and lifting it up at an angled (following the arrow
direction in Fig. 3.9), remove it from the main body. 3

Fig. 3.9 Removing the light source


compartment cover

1124 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-9


3.4 Replacing the Light Source

3
4 2
1
3
3

3
1 WI lamp 4 D2 lamp
2 WI lamp socket 5 Light source switching mechanism
3 3 WI lamp retainer spring

3 Fig. 3.10 Interior of light source compartment

3 „ Replacing the WI (halogen) lamp


When replacing the WI (halogen) lamp, your hand may contact the D2 lamp. Cover the D2 lamp with a clean
paper or cloth or remove the D2 lamp before the work. To remove the D2 lamp, refer to "„ Replacing the D2
3 lamp" in this section.

3 1 Remove the WI lamp retainer spring from the top of


the WI lamp.

Fig. 3.11

3-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1125 OF 4699


3.4 Replacing the Light Source

2 Pull out the WI lamp from the socket.

3
Fig. 3.12

3 Wear gloves. Hold the new WI lamp at the top and


bottom so as not to taint its beam port.

4 Insert the new WI lamp into the socket. Push it


forward until the two pins of the WI lamp contact the
3

back of the socket and stop.


3
NOTE
The two pins of the WI lamp do not have polarity. 3
Either pin can be the upper side. Fig. 3.13

3
5 Return the WI lamp retainer spring, removed in
procedure 1, to the original position.
3

Fig. 3.14 3

6 Reinstall the D2 lamp to the original position. Make


sure that no paper or cloth used for the work is left in
3
the light source compartment.

7
Fig. 3.15
Install the light source compartment cover by the
reverse procedure of that described in "„ Removing
the light source compartment cover" in this section.

8 Insert the electric plug into the outlet, and switch ON


the UV-1800. (Press the "|" side on the switch.)

1126 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-11


3.4 Replacing the Light Source

9 The initialization process starts. Verify that the


initialization for all items is successfully completed.
(i.e., "OK" is displayed for all items.)
3

10 When the Mode Selection screen is displayed, follow


the procedure in "3.3.2 Resetting Procedure" to
3
reset the WI lamp usage time.

Fig. 3.16

3-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1127 OF 4699


3.4 Replacing the Light Source

„ Replacing the D2 lamp


1 Wear gloves. Hold the resin part of the D2 lamp, and
slowly pull it straight up.
3

2 Slowly extract the D2 lamp upward to remove it from


the socket. 3

Fig. 3.17 3

3 Insert the new D2 lamp into the socket. Fit the


locating lug at the bottom of the D2 lamp to the 3
socket notch.
Make sure that the lamp is inserted all the way.
3

4 Install the light source compartment cover by the


reverse procedure of that described in "„ Removing 3
the light source compartment cover" in this section.

Notch (on the socket)


3

Locating lug
3

Fig. 3.18 3

5 Insert the electric plug into the outlet, and switch ON


the UV-1800. (Press the "|" side on the switch.)
3

3
Fig. 3.19

1128 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-13


3.4 Replacing the Light Source

6 The initialization process starts. Verify that the


initialization for all items is successfully completed.
(i.e., "OK" is displayed for all items.)
3

7 When the Mode Selection screen is displayed, follow


the procedure in "3.3.2 Resetting Procedure" to
3
reset the D2 lamp usage time.

Fig. 3.20

3-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1129 OF 4699


3.5 3.5 Cleaning the Exterior

When the instrument case, sample compartment cover, and operation keypad get dirty or stained,
wipe them with a dry, soft cloth or tissue.
Remove more stubborn stains by the following procedure:
3
1 Dip a cloth into watered-down mild detergent and wring it well. Wipe the instrument with it.

2 Dip a cloth into water and wring it well. Wipe off any detergent residue on the instrument completely.
Then, wipe the moisture off with a dry cloth. 3

NOTE
DO NOT leave any spilled water on the UV-1800. DO NOT use alcohol or paint thinner solvents for
cleaning. Doing so may cause the instrument surface to rust or discolor.

1130 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-15


4
4 Replacing the Sample Compartment Parts

Chapter 4 Replacing the 4

Sample Compartment
Parts 4

CONTENTS
4
4.1 Removing/Installing the Cell Holder................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Unit (Standard) ........................................................ 4-4 4
4.3 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Front Cover ............................................................. 4-7

1131 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-1


4.1 4.1 Removing/Installing the Cell Holder

To install some special accessories, such as Ultra-micro cell holder (P/N 206-14334), it is necessary
to replace the standard cell holder in the sample compartment.
In such a case, remove/install the cell holder by the following procedure:
4 Sample compartment
cover

Standard cell holder

Knurled screw
4

4
Fig. 4.1 Sample compartment (standard)

4
4.1.1 Removing the Cell Holder
4
1 Open the sample compartment cover.

4
2 Loosen the knurled screw fixing the cell holder.
Remove the cell holder. Knurled screw

4
Cell holder

Fig. 4.2

4-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1132 OF 4699


4.1 Removing/Installing the Cell Holder

4.1.2 Installing the Cell Holder

1 While aligning the locating hole on the cell holder


with the locating pin on the sample compartment
Arrow mark
4
unit, place the cell holder on the sample Knurled screw

compartment unit.

NOTE 4
Install the cell holder so that the beam passes
through it as directed by the arrow mark.
Cell holder

2 Fix the cell holder with the knurled screw.


4

4
Locating pin

4
Locating hole

Fig. 4.3
4

1133 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-3


Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment
4.2 4.2

Unit (Standard)
To install some special accessories, such as Sipper 160 series (P/N 206-23790-91, etc.), it is
necessary to replace the standard sample compartment unit in the sample compartment. In such a
case, remove/install the standard sample compartment unit by the procedure described below. For
installing/removing those special accessories, refer to the instruction manual of each special
4
accessory.

Sample compartment
cover

4 Sample compartment
unit fixing screws

4 Fig. 4.4 Main body front view

4.2.1 Removing the Sample Compartment Unit


4

4 1 Loosen two of the sample compartment unit fixing


screws located at the bottom of the sample Notch (on the sample
Fixing pin (on the UV-1800)

compartment. compartment unit)

4
2 Open the sample compartment cover to remove
the sample compartment unit.
4
1) Pull out the sample compartment in the
direction that releases the notch from the
4 fixing pin.

4 NOTE
DO NOT loosen the fixing pin. You can Fig. 4.5
release the notch without loosening the
4 fixing pin.

2) While slightly lifting up the sample


compartment unit, pull the unit out from the
fixing pin at an angle.

Fig. 4.6

4-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1134 OF 4699


4.2 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Unit (Standard)

4.2.2 Installing the Sample Compartment Unit

CAUTION 4

Fix the sample compartment unit securely to the instrument main body using the fixing
screws (knurled screws). If the sample compartment unit is not seated properly, outside
light from the gap makes it impossible to obtain accurate measurement data.
4

1 Open the sample compartment cover and install the sample compartment unit.

1) At an angle from above, insert the notch on Notch (on the sample
Locating pin
4
(on the UV-1800)
the sample compartment unit to the locating compartment unit)
pin at the far side of the sample
compartment. 4

4
Fig. 4.7

2) Push the sample compartment unit forward 4


so that the notch is pressed into the locating
pin.
4

Fig. 4.8
4

1135 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-5


4.2 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Unit (Standard)

3) Make sure that the sample compartment


unit front cover and the UV-1800 main body
fit together snugly.
4 If they don't, press the sample compartment
unit down to the sample compartment
bottom.

4 Fig. 4.9

4 2 Tighten two of the sample compartment fixing


screws (Fig. 4.4) to fix the sample compartment
unit.

4
NOTE
Align the screw holes on the sample
4 compartment unit with the knurled screws
by moving the unit back and forth.

4
3 Close the sample compartment cover (Fig. 4.4).

Fig. 4.10
4

4-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1136 OF 4699


Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment
4.3 4.3

Front Cover
To install some special accessories, such as syringe sipper (P/N 206-23890-91), it is necessary to
install the designated front plate on the sample compartment.
In such a case, remove/install the sample compartment front cover by the procedure described below.
For installing/removing those special accessories, refer to the instruction manual of each special
4
accessory.

Fig. 4.11 Front plate for syringe sipper (switching unit)

4
4.3.1 Removing the Sample Compartment Front Cover and Installing the
Front Plate
4

1 Remove the sample compartment unit from the UV-1800 by the procedure described in "4.2.1
Removing the Sample Compartment Unit". 4

2 Turn the sample compartment unit upside down. Press the tabs (2 places) on the cover in the arrow
direction as shown in Fig. 4.12 to release them from the unit. (Fig. 4.13)
4

4
Tabs

Fig. 4.12 Tabs on the sample compartment front cover 4

Sample compartment unit


(without cover)

Sample compartment front


cover

Fig. 4.13 Sample compartment unit

1137 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-7


4.3 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Front Cover

3 Install the sample compartment unit (without cover) to the UV-1800 main body by the procedure
described in "4.2.2 Installing the Sample Compartment Unit".

4
4 Install the designated front plate (special accessory) to the sample compartment unit.

4 Fig. 4.14 Installing the front plate

4 5 Close the sample compartment cover (Fig. 4.4).

4 4.3.2 Installing the Sample Compartment Front Cover

4 1 Open the sample compartment cover and remove


the designated front plate (special accessory).
Sample compartment front plate

4
2 Remove the sample compartment unit from the UV-
1800 main body by the procedure described in "4.2.1
4 Removing the Sample Compartment Unit".

Fig. 4.15 Sample compartment front


plate

4-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1138 OF 4699


4.3 Removing/Installing the Sample Compartment Front Cover

3 Fit the protruded parts on the sample compartment unit


to the corresponding protruded parts on the front cover Protruded part on the front
(2 places). cover
Protruded part on the
sample compartment unit
4

Fig. 4.16 Fitting the sample


compartment front cover 4

4
4 Snap the sample compartment front cover into the
sample compartment unit. Push the cover in the
arrow direction in Fig. 4.17 until it snaps. 4

5 Install the sample compartment unit to the UV-1800


main body by the procedure described in "4.2.2
4

Installing the Sample Compartment Unit".


4
Fig. 4.17 Snapping the sample
6 Close the sample compartment cover (Fig. 4.4).
compartment front cover
4

1139 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-9


5
5 Troubleshooting

Chapter 5 5

Troubleshooting
5

CONTENTS
5
5.1 Errors during Initialization .................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2 Problems: Symptoms and Solutions.................................................................................................. 5-4 5

1140 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-1


5.1 5.1 Errors during Initialization

After the power is turned ON, the UV-1800 initializes and checks the following items listed in the table
5
below.

1
2
3
4
5
6
5 7
8
9
0

5
Fig. 5.1 Initialization screen

5
Table 5.1 Initialization items

5 Item No. Initialization items Description

1 LSI Initialize Initializes each I/O device.


5
2 ROM Check Checks program ROM.

3 RAM Check Checks memory elements (RAM).


5
4 Filter Initialize Detects the reference position of the stray light filter.

5 Lamp Motor Initialize Detects the reference position of the motor that drives the light
5 source switching mirror.

6 WL Motor Initialize Detects the mechanical wavelength origin position.


5 7 WI Lamp Energy Checks whether or not the WI (halogen) lamp light energy is at a
sufficient level.

5 8 WI Origin search Checks 0-order light which is the optical origin.

9 D2 Lamp Energy Checks whether or not the D2 (deuterium) lamp light energy is at a
5 sufficient level.

0 WL Check Checks wavelength by detecting the emission line at 656.1 nm


using the D2 lamp.

5-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1141 OF 4699


5.1 Errors during Initialization

When [NG] is displayed during initialization, perform the appropriate remedial actions by referring to
5
the table below. If the problem is not resolved by these actions, contact your Shimadzu representative.

Reference
Item No. Check Point Remedial Action
Page

1~6 Turn OFF the UV-1800 power switch, and turn P2-9
it ON to initialize the instrument again.

7, 8 Is there anything Turn OFF the UV-1800 power switch. P2-9


obstructing the beam Remove the obstruction and turn ON the power
in the sample switch again.
compartment cell
holder? 5
Is the light source If the icon is not displayed (i.e., only frame is P2-9
lamp icon [W] displayed), it means that the WI lamp is P3-7
displayed on the upper currently OFF.
right of the screen?
5

5
Fig. 5.2

Turn OFF the UV-1800 power switch, and turn 5


it ON again. If the lamp still does not illuminate,
replace the WI lamp by the procedure
described in "3.4 Replacing the Light Source". 5
9, 0 Is there anything Turn OFF the UV-1800 power switch. Remove P2-9
obstructing the beam the obstruction and turn ON the power switch
in the sample again. 5
compartment cell
holder?
5
Is the light source If the icon is not displayed (i.e., only frame is P2-9
lamp icon [D] displayed), it means that the WI lamp is OFF. P3-7
displayed on the upper 5
right of the screen?

Fig. 5.3
5
Turn OFF the UV-1800 power switch, and turn
it ON again. If the lamp still does not illuminate,
replace the WI lamp by the procedure
described in "3.4 Replacing the Light Source".

1142 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-3


5.2 5.2 Problems: Symptoms and Solutions

Check whether the problem exhibits the following symptoms before requesting a repair.
5
Contact your Shimadzu representative if the error cannot be resolved through the remedial action
described below, or if the symptom is not covered in the table.

Reference
Symptom Typical Cause Remedial Action
Page

Turning ON the power Is the AC power cable Connect the AC power cable plug
switch does not supply plug connected correctly. P2-5
the power. properly?

Is the AC power cable Replace the AC power cable with the


P1-2
trapped underneath or cable of the same type if it is
P2-5
5 twisted? damaged.

Does the supplied Use the power supply that satisfies


power satisfy the the instrument power supply
power supply specification of the UV-1800. P2-4
specification of the
UV-1800?
5
[NG] is displayed next Perform an appropriate action by
to initialization items. —————— following the instruction in "5.1 Errors P5-2
5 during Initialization".

Nothing appears on Is the display contrast Adjust the display contrast by using
5 the screen. properly adjusted? the keys while
P1-7
holding down the key on

5 the keypad.

Numbers cannot be Is an incorrect value Enter the correct value?


entered from the being entered?
5 ——
keypad. Example:
, 1150 (nm)

5 Photometry values are Is the light source Check if the light source lamp icon
odd. lamp lit? ([W] or [D]) is displayed.

Fig. 5.4
5
„ When the icon is not displayed
5 (Only frame is displayed) P2-9
[Action] P3-7
The lamp is currently OFF.
1)Turn OFF the UV-1800 power
switch, and turn it ON again.
2)When the result of the energy
check during initialization is [NG]
(^ Fig. 4.1), replace the lamp by
the procedure in "3.4 Replacing the
Light Source".

5-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1143 OF 4699


5.2 Problems: Symptoms and Solutions

Symptom Typical Cause Remedial Action


Reference 5
Page

Photometry values are Is the light source „ When the icon is blinking
odd. lamp lit? [Action]
The lamp is currently OFF with some
errors.
The fan is not working or the thermo
——
censor on the circuit board has
detected overheating.
Turn OFF the UV-1800 power switch
and contact your Shimadzu
representative. 5
Did you mistakenly Return to the blank condition
press the (reference condition) and press the
P1-7
key during key again.
measurement?

Is the cell being used Do not use a glass cell in the


——
5
an appropriate one? ultraviolet range.

Is a cell phone being The measured value may be


5
used near the influenced depending on the types of
instrument? cell phones and the radio waves
——
conditions. Avoid using a cell phone
5
near the instrument during
measurement.

Baseline curve does When correcting the Place cells with the same solvent in 5
not meet normal baseline, did you put a both the sample side and the
specifications. solvent with high reference side and perform baseline
—— 5
(^ "6.1.1 Hardware absorbance in the cell correction again.
Specifications") holder on only one
side?
5
Is the beam on only Set the beam conditions so that they
one side restricted? are identical on both the sample side ——
and the reference side. 5
Are you using an Some of the unit specifications may
optional accessory? not be met when certain optional ——
5
accessories are installed.

If none of the above Correct the instrument baseline


three scenarios according to "2.6 Instrument Baseline P2-13 5
applies. Correction".

1144 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-5


5.2 Problems: Symptoms and Solutions

5 Symptom Typical Cause Remedial Action


Reference
Page

Neither light source Is the Cooling fan Check if air is expelled from the
lamp lights. working? exhaust port located on the left side
rear of the instrument.
——
If the fan has stopped, turn OFF the
UV-1800 power switch and contact
your Shimadzu representative.

"It failed in the access Is the USB memory or Use a normal USB memory.
——
to the file." its file system intact?

5 Did you unplug the Reconnect the USB memory and


USB memory during retry accessing the file. ——
file access?

Is the USB memory Turn OFF the USB memory write


——
write-protected? protection function.
5 Is the USB memory Cancel the encryption of the USB
drive encrypted by its memory. ——
security function?
5
"Cannot load this file." Has the file been The files once saved in the UVProbe
saved in the cannot be loaded on the UV-1800. ——
5 UVProbe?

Has the file been The selected file may be corrupted.


properly saved? In that case, the file cannot be ——
5 loaded.

5-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1145 OF 4699


6
6 Reference

Chapter 6 Reference
6

CONTENTS
6
6.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Maintenance Parts............................................................................................................................. 6-8 6
6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics ................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.4 Measurement System...................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.5 List of Cells ...................................................................................................................................... 6-25 6
6.6 Cleaning the Cell ............................................................................................................................. 6-28

1146 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-1


6.1 6.1 Specifications

6 6.1.1 Hardware Specifications

Measurement Wavelength Range 190~1100 nm

Spectral Band Width (Resolution) 1 nm

Wavelength Accuracy ±0.1 nm (656.1 nm D2), ±0.3 nm (All region)

Wavelength Repeatability ±0.1 nm

Wavelength Scanning Speeds When shifting wavelength: approx. 6000 nm/min


When scanning wavelength:approx. 3000 nm/min ~ 2 nm/min

Light Source Switching Automatic switching with wavelength range. Can be set anywhere in
range from 295 nm to 364 nm (0.1 nm units)

Stray Light 0.02 % or less (220 nm, NaI)


0.02 % or less (340 nm, NaNO2)
6 1 % or less (198 nm, KCl)

Photometric System Double beam optics

Photometric Range Absorbance: -4~4 Abs, Transmittance: 0~400 %

Photometric Accuracy ±0.002 Abs (at 0.5 Abs), ±0.004 Abs (at 1 Abs), ±0.006 Abs (at
6 2 Abs); Tested by using NIST930D or NIST1930, or other appropriate
standard filter.

6 Photometric Repeatability 0.001 Abs or less (at 0.5 Abs), 0.001 Abs or less (at 1 Abs),
0.003 Abs or less (at 2 Abs)

Noise Level Within 0.00005 Abs (700 nm)


6
Baseline Flatness ±0.0006 Abs (190 nm ~ 1100 nm)
1 hour after the light source is ON.
6
Baseline Stability Within 0.0003 Abs/h (700 nm)
1 hour after the light source is ON.
6 Light Source 20 W halogen lamp, Deuterium lamp
Built-in light source position automatic adjustment mechanism

6 Monochromator Czerny-Turner spectrometer


Uses blazed holographic grating

Detector Silicon photodiode


6
Sample Compartment Interior dimensions: 110 × 250 × 115 (mm) (W × D × H)

Dimensions 450 × 490 × 270 (mm) (W × D × H)


6
Weight 15 kg

Operating Temperature 15 °C ~ 35 °C

Operating Humidity 30 % ~ 80 % (No condensation, 70 % or less at 30 °C or higher)

Power Supply AC 100 V/120 V/220 V/230 V/240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption 140 VA

6-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1147 OF 4699


6.1 Specifications

6.1.2 Software Specifications 6


Photometric One-wavelength measurement
(1) Photometric modes: Absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T)

(2) Simple quantification by K-factor method

(3) Save/Load table data function

Multi-wavelength measurement
(1) Photometric modes: Absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T)

(2) Max. 8 wavelengths (Wavelength setting is possible by the unit of


0.1 nm.)

(3) Wavelength calculation function:


6
Calculation using data at up to 4 wavelengths is possible.
• Ratio and difference between the photometric values of
two wavelengths, three wavelength calculation
• 4 data calculation: (K1 × A1 + K2 × A2 + K3 × A3 + K4 ×
A4) × K5
• 4 data calculation: K5 × (K1 × A1 + K2 × A2)/(K3 × A3 6
+K4 × A4)
* An (n = 1 to 4) indicates absorbance at the measurement
wavelength of λn (n = 1 to 4) 6
Spectrum (1) Measurement mode: Absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T), and
energy (E)
6
(2) Scan range: 190 nm to 1100 nm

(3) Scan speeds: Fast, Medium, Fast, Medium, Slow, Very slow
6
(4) Vertical axis recording range: Abs; -4.000 to 4.000 (Min. range;
- 0.001 to 0.001)
%T, E; -400.0 to 400.0 (Min. range; 6
- 0.1 to 0.1)
(5) Scan repetitions: 1 to 99 6
(6) Recording method: Overlay/ Sequential selectable

(7) Reduce/Expand [zoom], Display data with cursor 6


(8) Save/Load data function
6

1148 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-3


6.1 Specifications

6 Quantitation (1) Measurement method:


One-wavelength/Two-wavelength/Three-wavelength quantitation,
Quantitation by derivative (1 to 4 order) calculation

(2) Functions regarding calibration curve


Automatically calculate concentration by K-factor method
Automatically calculate concentration by one-point calibration
curve method
Multi-point calibration curve
1 to 3 order regression calibration curve
Number of standard samples (1 to 10)
Select pass-through-origin conditions
Display of calibration curve formula
Display of relative coefficient of calibration curve
(3) Measurement parameter
6
Quantitation by repeat measurement (1 to 10 times) and taking
the average measurement value
(4) Save/Load table data function

(5) Automatic data print function: Results are automatically output on


6 hard-copy printer for every
measurement.

(6) Special accessories


6
• Linked measurement with multi-cell, 8/16 micro-multicell
and CPS-240 is possible.
6 • Sipper: linked measurement with the ASC-5 is possible

Kinetics Kinetics

6 (1) Measure Abs time change and calculate activity values.

(2) Measurement time: 1 to 9999 sec/min

6 (3) Measurement using Abs difference between two wavelengths is


possible.

6 Rate-measurement
(1) Measure Abs time change and calculate the change in
6 absorbance quautity.

(2) Measurement time: 1 to 9999 sec/min

6 (3) Determine whether the measured reaction result is progressing in


linear fashion.

6-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1149 OF 4699


6.1 Specifications

Time Scan (1) Measure time course change in photometric values. 6


(2) Measurement mode: A Absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T),
energy (E)

(3) Measurement time: 1 to 9999 sec/min

(4) Linked measurement with multi-cell, 8/16 micro-multicell and


CPS-240 is possible.

(5) Reduce/Expand [zoom], Display data with cursor

(6) Save/Load data function

Multi-Component Analysis (1) Up to 8 components

(2) Pure and mixed samples of each constituent component can be


used as standard samples
6
(3) Besides measurement wavelengths, standard sample data can
be filed.

(4) Quantitation can be done by calling up spectra

Bio-method DNA quantitation


6
(1) Calculate DNA/Protein concentrations and Abs ratio.
DNA concentration =K1×A1-K2×A2
Protein concentration = K3×A2-K4×A1 6
(2) Factor/measurement wavelength can be set arbitrarily.

(3) Background correction can be applied. 6

Protein quantitation
6
(1) Quantitation method: Lowry method, BCA method, Biuret
method, CBB method (Bradford method),
UV absorption method 6

1150 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-5


6.1 Specifications

6 Maintenance and Inspection (1) Instrument baseline correction function


Function
(2) Display/Reset of lamp lighting time

(3) Security setting


Faculty limitation can be set for each user account.
(4) Unit validation function
1) Correspond to 9 items
Wavelength accuracy, wavelength repeatability, spectral
band width, stray light, photometric accuracy,
photometric repeatability, baseline flatness, baseline
stability, noise level, initialization result record
2) Semi-automatic test:
For items requiring test jigs, test can be progressed in
6 the form of dialog.
3) Full automatic test:
Test is automatically performed from measurement to
pass/fail judgment/result printing.
4) Setting test conditions/pass fail judgment criteria
6 5) Detailed printing of the test results
6) Printing of all test result

6 File Management Function (1) Convert spectrum and time course curve to CSV format.

(2) Copy and delete files.

6 Data Processing Function Following processings can be performed on curve data such as
spectrum and time course curve.
• Peak/Valley detection (both possible up to 20 pcs.)
6 • The four rules of arithmetic
• Derivative processing
• Smoothing processing
6 • Area calculation
• Point-pick processing
• Print processing (printing waveform data in text format)
6

6-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1151 OF 4699


6.1 Specifications

Common Function (1) Selection function of the setting conditions after power is 6
supplied, Standby at the condition setting menu of each
measurement mode, Specifying a condition file is possible

(2) Selection function of data display digits below decimal point


Abs (3 digits) %T (1 digit) or Abs (4 digits) %T (2 digits)
(3) Number of files that can be stored (built-in memory)
Measurement conditions: Max. 24 files
Curve data : Max. 8 files
Table data : Max. 8 files
(4) Accumulation time set function (for fixed wavelength
measurement)

(5) External control function


UV-1800 can be controlled from PC. 6
This function is applied for the control with bundled UVProve
software.
* USB cable (that supports USB 1.1) separately required

1152 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-7


6.2 Maintenance Parts
6.2

6 6.2.1 Consumable Parts

Part Name Part No. Remarks Replacement Cycle

Tungsten iodine lamp 062-65005 Light source 2 years

Deuterium lamp 062-65055-05 Light source 2 years

* Replacement cycle above is a recommended value.

6.2.2 Maintenance Parts

Part Name Part No. Remarks Replacement Cycle

Mirror, R(30.60)-FR 205-83651 Light source 3 years


switching mirror
6
Quartz plate 206-90232 3 years

Lens 205-80358 3 years

* Replacement cycle above is a recommended value.

6
6.2.3 Repair Parts
6 Part Name Part No. Remarks

AC power cable 071-60816-12


6 Fuse, 218 004 072-02004-22 For 100-120 V, 220-240 V

Battery, CR2032H 38 074-73306-08


6
O-ring 036-15501-21 Used for fixing the quartz plate.

Alternate Sample Compartment 206-60184-07


6
Standard cell holder 206-82009-91

Sample compartment front cover 206-25269


6 ASSY

Sample compartment cover 206-25269


6

6-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1153 OF 4699


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics
6.3

6.3.1 What is Light? 6


Light is a type of electromagnetic radiation with a speed of 3.0 x 10 8 m/sec in a vacuum.
Electromagnetic radiation includes X-ray, ultraviolet ray, visible ray, infrared ray, and radio waves.

(Wavelength)

20,000 m
Long wave

2,000 m
Intermediate wave
200 m
Radio waves
50 m 6
Short wave

10 m
Ultra-short wave
1 m
Microwave 6
1 mm
Far-infrared
6
25 µm Thermal rays

Mid-infrared Infrared rays


3 µm
6
Near-infrared

700 nm 6
Visible Visible rays Measured range by
spectrophotometer
400 nm
6
Near-ultraviolet
200 nm
Far-ultraviolet Ultraviolet rays
(vacuum ultraviolet) 6
50 nm
X-rays
6
5 pm
γ-ray
(0.05 Å)
(Note) 1 mm = 10-3 m, 1 mm = 10-6 m, 1 nm = 10-9 m, 1 pm = 10-12 m 6
Fig. 6.1 Types of electromagnetic waves

1154 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-9


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

Wavelength is defined as the length of a single cycle and is usually indicated by a sign called lambda,
6
λ.
For the range of ultraviolet ray and visible lights, a unit called nm (nanometer) is used.

Wavelength (λ)

Wavelength (λ)

Fig. 6.2 Wavelength


6
Generally, rays of various wavelengths are mixed in the light emitted from a light source (although
some emit rays of specific wavelength such as laser light source, or others emit light of several
specific wavelengths such as mercury lamps). The light of a certain wavelength extracted selectively
by the use of a monochromator is called monochromatic light. Light that includes all the rays in the
wavelength range of visible rays is called white light.
6 The relation between wavelength and color is as follows:

6
Greenish blue

Near-infrared
Bluish green

Purplish red
Red
Ultraviolet

Orange
Yellow
Green
Violet

6
Blue

Wavelength 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 (nm)


6

Fig. 6.3 Wavelength and color of light


6
When white light is irradiated on some substance and the substance absorbs the blue light, it appears
yellow, which is the (additive) complementary color of blue. If blue monochromatic light is irradiated on
6 this substance, the light is absorbed and the substance appears black, indicating that no color exists.

Wavelength Complementary Wavelength Complementary


6 Color Color
(nm) color (nm) color

400 - 435 Violet Yellow green 560 - 580 Yellow green Violet
6
435 - 480 Blue Yellow 580 - 595 Yellow Blue

480 - 490 Greenish blue Orange 595 - 610 Orange Greenish blue

490 - 500 Bluish green Red 610 - 680 Red Bluish green

500 - 560 Green Purplish red 680 - 700 Purplish red Green

6-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1155 OF 4699


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6.3.2 Ultraviolet/Visible Spectrum 6


The energy (E) of light can be expressed as follows.
E = ch/ λ
c is the velocity of light, h is Planck's constant, and λ is wavelength.
When light is irradiated on a substance, the light of certain wavelengths is absorbed according to the
molecule structure of that substance. This happens as the result of the fact that the electrons existing
at the ground state of the molecule absorb light energy and a transition to excitation state occurs. The
amount of absorption differs depending on wavelength, and so the absorption spectrum (the curve
measuring absorption when monochromatic light is irradiated to a substance with varying
wavelengths) becomes unique to that substance. The analysis of substances based on this principle
is called absorptiometry and this method allows (1) Identification, (2) Quantitative analysis, and (3)
Analysis of electron state. Also, the excited molecule loses energy due to heat and collision with other
molecules and returns to its original ground state. This process is called "radiationless transition".
In addition, the molecule may emit the absorbed light energy as light when returning to the ground
state. Fluorescent light and phosphorescence exhibit the behavior and analysis utilizing these
phenomena is called fluorometry. 6

Excited state 1
Radiationless transition

Excited state 2
Light
6
Fluorescence

Phosphorescence
Absorbance

Ground state
6
Fig. 6.4 Molecule energy
6

1156 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-11


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6 6.3.3 Bouguer-Beer's Law


This law, which is the basic principle of quantitative analysis, is also called Lambert-Beer's law.

Sample -kcl
Incident light Io concentration Transmission light I = Iox 10
c

Optical pass length I

6 Fig. 6.5 Bouguer-Beer's law

When light with the intensity of Io is irradiated on a certain substance and the light with the
intensity of I has transmitted, the following relational formula is established, where K stands for
proportional constant.
At this time, I/Io is called transmittance (T), I/Io × 100 is percent transmittance (T%) and (1/T) = log (Io/
6 I) is called absorbance (Abs).
T = I/Io = 10 -k•c•l
Abs = log (1/T)= log (Io/I) = k • c • l
6 As known from the above formula, transmittance is not proportional to the concentration of the
sample, but absorbance is proportional to the concentration of the sample (Beer's law) and is
proportional to light path length (Bouguer's law). Also, the proportional constant at the time when the
6 light path length is 1 cm and the concentration of object component is 1 mol/l is called molar
absorptivity and is represented by the sign of ε. This molar absorptivity becomes a value unique to the
substance under specific conditions.
6
To fulfil Bouguer-Beer's law, it is necessary to satisfy conditions such as being free from stray light,
emission, scattering, and reflection.
6

6-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1157 OF 4699


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6.3.4 Qualitative Analysis and Quantitative Analysis 6


To analyze what a substance is and what substances it consists of is called qualitative analysis, while
analysis of the amount of these substances is called quantitative analysis.

„ Spectrum and Chemical Structure (Qualitative Analysis)


The absorbance of ultraviolet/visible light is determined by chromophore (functional group that
absorbs light such as C = C, C = O, N = N, and N = O, having multiplet bonding) and auxochrome
(functional group that bonds with chromophore and changes its absorbance position and intensity
such as - OH, -NH2, and -SH, having non-bonding electron pair), and so is related to the chemical
structure. In this case, absorbance may change depending on introduction of substitution group and
types of solvent. Movement of the absorbance wavelength to a longer wavelength is called
"bathochromic movement", and its movement to a shorter wavelength is called "hypsochromic
movement". Also, an increase of absorbance is called the "hyperchromic effect" and a decrease is
called the "hypochromic effect".
6
„ Colorimetric Analysis (Quantitative Analysis)
Analysis to perform quantitative analysis by comparing the color darkness of a substance is called
colorimetric analysis. When the substance is transparent, if absorbance exists in the invisible
ultraviolet/near infrared area, it is measured. The latter is broadly included in colorimetric analysis.
6

1158 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-13


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6 6.3.5 Calibration Curve


The quantitative method to measure the concentration of a sample with unknown concentration from
the absorption of a sample with known concentration is provided in two methods: (1) Calibration curve
method and (2) Standard additive method.

1 Calibration curve method 2 Standard additive method

Absorbance of unknown

Absorbance
sample
Absorbance

Concentration of
unknown sample
6
Concentration of
unknown sample

Standard sample concentration Standard sample concentration

6
Fig. 6.6 Calibration curve

In the calibration curve method, standard samples are operated according to an established method
6 and then measured for absorbance. A calibration curve is prepared by using the absorbance obtained
here in the vertical axis and the standard sample in the horizontal axis. There are times when the
calibration curve does not make a straight line such as when the solution to be measured is a
6 suspension. Although the calibration curve is sure to pass the origin when a blank solution is used, if it
is not used, the curve may not pass the origin. Next, the concentration of the object components in the
unknown sample is obtained using this calibration curve.
6
In the standard additive method, standard sample is added by stages to four or more samples of
measurement sample solution of the same concentration. Similarly to the calibration curve method, a
relation curve between added value and absorbance is prepared. The concentration of the object
6
component in the unknown sample is obtained from the point where the related curve crosses the
vertical axis. This method is applied only when the related curve is straight as far as to the low
concentration range.
6
Generally, extra-large absorbance wavelength is used as measurement wavelength for quantitative
analysis.
6

6-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1159 OF 4699


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6.3.6 Solvent Selection 6


Generally when a sample is analyzed, it is measured as a solution. Accordingly, the type and the
concentration of the solvent must be adequate. A solvent that dissolves the sample well and that is
free from mutual action, has small absorbance in measurement wavelength range and has small
volatility is desired. A cell with a lid is necessary for volatile solvent.
As a solvent, water is excellent for measuring absorbance in visible/ultraviolet range, as it has no
absorbance itself. On the other hand, many of the normally used organic solvents are transparent to
the human eye, so it can be mistakenly believed that absorbance does not exist in ultra-violet range
either. The solvents and their available operating wavelength ranges are as follows:

200 250 300 350 400 450 (nm)

Water
6
Methanol

Ethanol

Isopropanol

Methylcyclohexan

Cyclohexan 6
Acetnitrile

Hexane 6
Dioxane

Glycerin
6
n-pentane

Dichloromethane
6
Chloroform

Metylacetate
6
Metyl formic acid

Carbon tetrachloride

Dimethyl sulfoxide
6
Benzene

Xylene 6
Toluene

Ethylene tetrachloride 6
Acetone

Bromoform

Nitro methane

Carbon disulfide

200 250 300 350 400 450 (nm)

Fig. 6.7 Wavelength range for solvent to be used (using a 10 mm cell)

1160 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-15


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6 6.3.7 Calibration Curve Curvature


A calibration curve is generally straight. However, it may bend due to various reasons. The probable
causes are 1 drift of measurement circuit, 2 fluorescent sample, 3 stray light, 4 broad band width,
and 5 measurement at the spectrum shoulder.

1 As a spectrophotometer has some drift immediately after power is supplied to it, it should be
allowed to warm up for 30 min. to one hour. Also, drift may be observed over a long period of
time, so it is important to check the wavelength accuracy and measurement accuracy periodically
using a filter etc.

2 When a sample emits fluorescent light and if that light enters the detector, the absorbance may
appear low and the amount of fluorescent light increases as sample concentration becomes
higher. As a result, the calibration curve may be bent toward the lower side. If this occurs, it is
necessary to reduce the influence of fluorescent light as much as possible by increasing the
6 distance between the sample and the detector or by inserting a mask between the sample and
the detector.

3 Stray light is the total of the light of the wavelength deviated from a certain spectrum width having
the set wavelength of the monochromator placed in the center and the light emitted from
monochromator, but does not transmit the sample and pass the side of the sample. For example,
6 with 0.1% of stray light included in the monochromatic light, when a sample with the wavelength
of λ o and absorbance of 2 (transmittance 1%) is measured, because 0.1% stray light is added in
addition to 1% of the light with the wavelength of λ o, the transmitted light will have 1.1% of
6 transmittance (absorbance 1.959), causing 2% error. As known from this, the higher the sample
absorbance is, the larger the error due to stray light becomes. To reduce stray light, it is generally
effective to form a double-monochromator by connecting two monochromators. Although it is
6
expensive due to the complex mechanism, the amount of stray light is reduced from one-fiftieth
(1/50) to one-one thousandth (1/1000) of that of normal single monochromator.
6
Table 6.1 Absorbance error due to stray light

Stray Absorbance
6 light
(%) 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0

6 1 0.0222 0.0370 0.0595 0.1150 0.2081 0.2967 0.6150 1.0370 2.0000

0.5 0.0133 0.0190 0.0309 0.0615 0.1169 0.1739 0.4096 0.7759 1.7059
6 0.2 0.0045 0.0077 0.0126 0.0257 0.0507 0.0783 0.2119 0.4762 1.3213

0.1 0.0022 0.0038 0.0063 0.0130 0.0261 0.0409 0.1188 0.3005 1.0409
6 0.05 0.0011 0.0019 0.0032 0.0065 0.0132 0.0209 0.0635 0.1758 0.7799

0.02 0.0004 0.0007 0.0012 0.0026 0.0053 0.0085 0.0365 0.0790 0.4770

0.01 0.0002 0.0003 0.0006 0.0013 0.0026 0.0042 0.0134 0.0413 0.3009

0.005 0.0001 0.0001 0.0003 0.0006 0.0013 0.0021 0.0067 0.0211 0.1791

0.002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0003 0.0005 0.0008 0.0027 0.0085 0.0791

0.001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0002 0.0004 0.0013 0.0043 0.0413

0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0004 0.0043

(Test and Engineering Vol.9 No.9,702,1981)

6-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1161 OF 4699


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

4 A halogen lamp or deuterium lamp are used as the light source of a spectrophotometer.
6
Because these lamps emit a continuous spectrum, taking out 500 nm monochromatic light from
the monochromator does not mean that only the light of 500 nm is taken out, but the light in a
wavelength range having a certain width is taken out.

Energy of light

1/2 Band width

Wavelength width to be taken out

Band width 1 1/2 1/4


Area 1 1/4 1/16
Total amount of energy of light 1 1/4 1/16
6

Fig. 6.8 Band width and energy of light


6
Because the absorption coefficient of a substance differs depending on wavelength, even if the
central wavelength is the same, with different bandwidth, the wavelength width of the light to be taken
out varies. This causes the absorption coefficient to be changed in appearance and this results in 6
absorbance change. It is sufficient to set the bandwidth of a spectrophotometer from one-eighth (1/8)
to one-tenth (1/10) of the half width of a sample's absorbance spectrum. The half-width of the
absorbance spectrum means the width at the half of the peak of the absorbance spectrum. Because 6
the absorbance spectrum often has a broad half-width in colorimetric analysis, a bandwidth of 10 nm
is sufficient. Making the bandwidth extremely narrow generates large noise due to energy shortage
and may result in poor measurement accuracy. If the bandwidth is made large, the peak height 6
becomes low in appearance and this may cause the calibration curve to be bent.

6
Peak height actually measured
Real peak height

Spectrum band width


Real spectrum half-width

Fig. 6.9 Band width and peak height

1162 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-17


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6 6.3.8 Spectrophotometer Types


Spectrophotometers can be categorized broadly by optical systems as follows:

Single beam configuration


Measurement optical system
Double beam configuration Single detector configuration

Double detector configuration

„ Single and Double Beam Configurations


• Single beam configuration
This configuration allows only one beam to pass through the sample compartment. First, set the
6 transmittance to 100 % or the absorbance to 0 using the cell filled with solvent. Then replace it with
the cell containing sample and perform measurement.

Cell
6
LIght source
Monochromator Detector Amplifier Display
6 Sample compartment

Fig. 6.10 Single beam configuration


6
• Double beam configuration
This configuration divides the monochromatic light into two beams using mirrors, such as a rotating
6 mirror and a semi-transparent mirror, so as to make two beams, the sample beam and reference
beam. When the sample cell with sample in it is placed for the sample beam and the reference cell
with solvent in it is placed for reference beam in the sample compartment, each transmitted light
6 enters the detector. The feature of this configuration then is that transmittance and absorbance can
be measured once from the sample sign I and the reference sign Io simultaneously.

6
Reference
side
6
Cell
LIght source
6 Monochromator Detector Amplifier Display
Sample
side
(Rotating mirror, semi- Sample compartment
transparent mirror)

Fig. 6.11 Double beam configuration

6-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1163 OF 4699


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

„ Single and Double Detector Configuration 6


• Double beam - single detector configuration
In this configuration, a sample beam and reference beam alternately enter one detector.
So unlike the double-detector configuration, the result is less likely to be influenced by the difference
in characteristics of the two detectors.

WI: Halogen lamp


D2: Deuterium lamp
W: Window plate
S1-2: Slit
M1-10: Mirror
G: Grating
F: Filter
CH: Chopper mirror
PM: Photomultiplier 6

Fig. 6.12 Double beam - single detector configuration (UV-2400 series) 6

• Double beam - double detector configuration


In this configuration, the sample beam and the reference beam enter different detectors 6
respectively. Thus, it is necessary to use two detectors with similar characteristics. The advantage
of this configuration is that it is not necessary to always pass two beams to the same detector as in
the case of the single detector configuration, and so a larger space is possible in the sample 6
compartment, convenient for measuring unclear samples by keeping them in close contact with the
light receiving surface. However, in the case of the photomultiplier, this configuration is not used
6
because matching the detector is difficult.

WI: Halogen lamp


D2: Deuterium lamp 6
W: Window plate
S1-2: Slit
L.M.: Light-source switching mirror
M1-5: Mirror 6
GR: Grating
F: Filter
B.S.: Beam splitter
Sam: Sample side cell
Ref: Reference side cell
L: Lens
P.D.: Photodiode

Fig. 6.13 Double beam - double detector configuration (UV-1800)

1164 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-19


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6 „ Single Monochromator and Double Monochromator


A single monochromator system has one monochromator and a double monochromator system has
two monochromators aligned in a series. Accordingly,when two monochromators are aligned in
parallel as in the case of a two-wavelength spectrophotometer, the system is not called a double-
monochromator even though it has two monochromators.
The double monochromator disperses the monochromatic light emerging from the first
monochromator again by means of the second monochromator. So stray light is greatly reduced and a
calibration curve of good linearity is obtained even though absorbance becomes high, allowing
analysis of samples with a broad concentration range.

6 WI: Halogen lamp


D2: Deuterium lamp
W: Window plate
S1-3: Slit
M1-12: Mirror
G1-2: Grating
F: Filter
CH: Chopper mirror
6 PM: Photomultiplier

Fig. 6.14 Double monochromator configuration (UV-2500 series)


6

6-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1165 OF 4699


6.3 Spectrophotometer Basics

6
M3

S2

M4
G3,G4 G1,G2
M2
S1 WI

W1

M15 S3
D2 M1
F
InGaAs.PbS M5
M7
M14 M13 Reference
Ref Beam M9

M11 W2,W3 M6
W4,W5
C.H.
M12

M10 Smp Sample 6


Beam M8
PMT

D2: Deuterium lamp WI: Halogen lamp


S1: Entrance Slit M1-15: Mirror
S2: Intermediate slit PbS: PbS cell
S3: Exit Slit InGaAs: InGaAs cell
F: Filter PM: Photomultiplier
G1, G2: Diffraction grating Reference: Reference side cell 6
(First monochromator) Sample: Sample side cell
G3, G4: Diffraction grating W1 ~ W3: Window plate (ø 30 mm)
(Second monochromator) W4 ~ W5: Window plate (ø 40 mm)
C.H.: Chopper mirror 6
Fig. 6.15 Double monochromator configuration (UV-3600 series)
6

1166 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-21


6.4 6.4 Measurement System

6 6.4.1 Optical System


A schematic of the optical system for the UV-1800 is shown in Fig. 6.16

6
D2: Deuterium lamp L.M.: Light-source switching mirror
WI: Halogen lamp M1~M5: Mirrors
F: Filter B.S.: Beam splitter
6 GR: Grating L: Lens
S1: Entrance slit Sam: Sample cell
S2: Exit slit Ref: Reference cell
W: Window Plate P.D.: Photodiodes
6
Fig. 6.16 Schematic of optical system

6 The light coming from the light source (deuterium lamp D2 or halogen lamp WI) is reflected by mirror
L.M. and then enters the monochromator. Light source switching is entirely automatic, with the
instrument selecting the next light source by rotating the mirror L.M. according to the wavelength.
6
Deuterium lamp: 190 nm to light source switch wavelength
Halogen lamp: Light source switch wavelength to 1100 nm
6
The light source switch wavelength can be set anywhere in the range from 295.0 to 364.0 nm
(default setting: 340.8 nm).

6-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1167 OF 4699


6.4 Measurement System

With the exception of the light sources and light source mirrors, the optical system is constructed so
6
as to prevent exposure to dust and contaminants.
The monochromator slit aperture is fixed at 1 nm.
The Shimadzu blazed holographic grading is used for the diffraction grading.
The light coming out of the monochromator passes through a stray light cutting filter F and strikes the
mirror M3 and is then split by the beam splitter B.S. into the sample-side beam and the reference-side
beam, which then pass through their respective cells and strike the detectors (photodiodes).
The relationship between the positions of the cell holders and the beams is as shown in Fig. 6.17.
The image of the exit slit S2 appears near the cell position in the sample compartment. The
dimensions of the cross section of the beam on the image plane are
Width approx. 0.8 mm Height approx. 9 mm
Whenever possible, please use black cells for the microcells when using them, as they are minimally
affected by scattered light. (^ "6.5 List of Cells")

Cell 6

Cell Holder

6
Light beam

Fig. 6.17 Positional relationship of cell holder (cell) and light beam
6

1168 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-23


6.4 Measurement System

6 6.4.2 Electrical System


A schematic of the electrical system for the UV-1800 is shown in Fig. 6.18.
The center of control is the microcomputer (CPU), which performs all controls of light sources,
switching of light sources, filter switching, wavelength scanning pulse motor, LCD monitor display,
keyboard and printer, USB interface etc.
After the sample-side beam and reference-side beam are picked up by detectors (photodiodes) and
converted into the voltage by the pre-amplifier, the signal is then fed into an A/D converter and finally
read by the CPU.
On energy-measurement mode (of spectrum mode) only the signal from the sample-side beam is
read. In this case, S/R switching status is "Normal". If the status "Reverse", only the signal from the
reference-side beam is read.

WI Reference Pre
PD
Cell Amp
A/D Converter
6 Monochromator
A/D Converter
Sample Cell
D2 Filter Wavelength
Control Control

Lamp
6 Control
CPU

6 LightSource
Switch Control

6 LCD Key
USB I/F

6
Personal
Computer
6

Fig. 6.18 Schematic of electrical system


6

6-24 UV-1800 SERIES 1169 OF 4699


6.5 6.5 List of Cells

Table 6.1 List of Optional Cells


6
Name shape Quartz (S cell) Glass (G cell) Q'ty Special holder
Square cell, optical length 10 mm A 200-3442 200-34565 1 Not required
Square cell, matching type A 201-98716 200-98746 2/sets Not required
Sealed-type square cell, optical length 10 mm B 200-34444 200-34444-01 1 Not required
Semi microcell, optical length 10 mm required
C 200-66501 200-66501-01 1 Not required
sample volume 1.0mL or more
Semi microcell, optical length 10 mm required
D 200-66551 1 Not required
sample volume 1.0 mL or more
Ultra micro cell
Ultra-micro black cell, optical path length: 5 mm holder (206-
K 208-92116 1
Required sample volume: 25 µl or more 55050-91) is
req'd
Super-micro
Super-micro black cell, with 10 mm optical path
L 200-66578-11 1 cell holder (206- 6
and required sample volume of 50 µl more
55050-91) req'd
Super-micro
Micro black cell, with 10 mm optical path and
M 200-66578-12 1 cell holder (206-
required sample volume of 50 µl more
55050-91) req'd
L (Optical.length) 200-34448 200-34448-01
= 10 mm (quartz window) (glass window)
1 6
E
200-34472 200-34472-01
Cylindrical cell L = 20 mm 1 Cylindrical cell
(quartz window) (glass window)
(OD 25µ") holder (204- 6
(ID 22µ") 200-34447-01 200-34473-03 06216) req'd
L = 50 mm 1
(quartz window) (glass window)
F
200-34473-02 200-34473-04 6
L = 100 mm 1
(quartz window) (glass window)
L = 20 mm 200-34446 200-34446-01 1 Long-path
rectangular cell 6
Square long absorption cell L = 50 mm G 200-34944 200-34944-01 1
holder (204-
L = 100 mm 200-34676 200-34676-01 1 23118-01) req'd
L = 1 mm 200-34660-01 200-34662-01 1 6
Short optical
Short optical length cell L = 2 mm H 200-34655 200-34662-11 1 length cell
spacer req'd
L = 5 mm 200-34449 200-34449-01 1
for 1 mm 204-21473-03
6
Spacer for short optical length
for 2 mm J 204-21473-01 1 Not required
cell K
for 5 mm 204-21473-02 6
Micro multi-cell
Micro multi-cell (8 cells) optical length 10 mm and holder req'd
N 208-92089 1
required sample volume of 100 µl more (206-23680-91 6
206-23690-91)
Micro multi-cell
Micro multi-cell (16 cells) optical length 10 mm holder req'd
P 208-92088 1
and required sample volume of 100 µl more (206-23680-91
206-23690-91)

1170 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-25


6.5 List of Cells

6
Quartz cell Optical width
Name Shape Capacity Special holder Remarks
(S cell) of cell
Unnecessary,
For general
Flow cell, optical path length: but front plate
I 200-34670 1.5mL 4×36 use Without
10 mm with holes is
tube
necessary
Square flow cell (ultra-micro)
for syringe sipper, optical path
length: 10 mm Q 208-92114 30µl ø2 Unnecessary With tube
Standard required sample
volume: 0.9 ml or more
Square flow cell (micro) for
syringe sipper, light path
length: 10 mm R 208-92113 80µl ø3 Unnecessary With tube
Standard required sample
volume: 1.0 ml or more
6
Square flow cell (semi-micro)
for syringe sipper, light path
length: 10 mm S 208-92005 390µl 3.5 × 11 Unnecessary With tube
Standard required sample
volume: 5.0 ml or more

6-26 UV-1800 SERIES 1171 OF 4699


6.5 List of Cells

A B C D E F

6
12.5

12

12.5 2

G H I J K L
6

6
35

6
12.5
12.5
9 mm pitch 4.5 mm pitch
M N P Q
6

35 35
6
12.5 12.5
12.5 12.5
R
6
unit : mm

Fig. 6.19 Optional Cell Shapes


6

1172 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-27


6.6 6.6 Cleaning the Cell

Remove the sample from the cell immediately after the completion of measurement.
6
After measurement of water solution samples, wash the cell with water thoroughly, then wash it with ethanol
lightly, and let it dry well.

Wash with distilled water

Wash with ethanol

Dry

If the cell is stained, remove the stain by dipping the cell into cleaning agent or acid.

Dip into cleaning agent (30 °C - 50 °C) - Approx.10 minutes


6

Wash with distilled water

6 Dip into diluted nitric acid + small amount of hydrogen peroxide - Approx. 30 minutes

6
Wash with distilled water

6
Dry

6 If the cell gets stained with organic matter, first dip it into an organic solvent such as acetone and then wash it
with distilled water.
However, when washing the flow cell for the sipper 160 series (special accessory), it is required to replace the
6 "PVC tube for peristaltic pump" since the tube corrodes and hardens from the solvent.
Be sure to fill the flow cell with distilled water after washing. If the flow cell is left empty, the cell may get stained
and it becomes hard to clean afterwards.
6

6-28 UV-1800 SERIES 1173 OF 4699


206-97042
Sep. 2007

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Operation Guide
UV-1800
SHIMADZU RECORDING
SPECTROPHOTOMETER

Read the instruction manual thoroughly before you use the


product. Keep this instruction manual for future reference.

1174 OF 4699
Introduction

Read this manual thoroughly before using the instrument.

Thank you for purchasing this instrument. This manual describes installation, operation,
hardware validation, cautions for use, and details on accessories and options. Read the
manual thoroughly before using the instrument. Use the instrument in accordance with
the manual's instructions. Keep this manual for future reference.

IMPORTANT
• If the user or usage location changes, be sure this Instruction Manual is always kept together with the
product.
• If this documentation or the warning labels on the instrument become lost or damaged, promptly obtain
replacements from your Shimadzu representative.
• To ensure safe operation, read the Safety Instructions before using the instrument.
• To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative for installation, adjustment, or re-
installation after moving the instrument to a different site.

COPYRIGHT • © 2007 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.


• Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of the vendor.
• Any errors or omissions which may have occurred in this publication despite the
utmost care taken in its production will be corrected as soon as possible, but not
necessarily immediately upon detection.
• All rights are reserved, including those to reproduce this publication or parts thereof in
any form without permission in writing from Shimadzu Corporation.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries. Other company names and product names
mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies. TM and ® marks are omitted in this manual.

1175 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES i


Safety Instructions

• To ensure safe operation of the instrument, read these Safety Instructions carefully before use.
• Observe all of the WARNINGS and CAUTIONS described in this section. They are extremely important for
safety.
In this manual, warnings and cautions are indicated using the following conventions:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in serious
WARNING injury or possibly death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor to
CAUTION moderate injury or equipment damage.

Emphasizes additional information that is provided to ensure the proper use of this
NOTE product.

The symbol used in this manual is as follows:

^ Indication of location for related information in the instruction manuals

ii UV-1800 SERIES 1176 OF 4699


Installation Site Precautions

WARNING
When using flammable and toxic samples, be sure to install ventilation equipment at
the installation site.

CAUTION
• The weight of this instrument is 15 kg. During installation, consider the entire weight
combined with other instruments.
The lab table on which this instrument is installed should be strong enough to support
the total weight of this instrument. It should be level, stable, and have depth of at least
600 mm.
Otherwise, the instrument could tip over or fall off the table.

• Avoid installation sites that are exposed to corrosive gases or excessive dust.
These adverse conditions may be detrimental to maintaining instrument performance
and may shorten its service life.

1177 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES iii


Installation Precautions
To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative for installation, adjustment, or re-installation
after moving the instrument to a different site.

WARNING
• Take measures to prevent the instrument from falling in the event of earthquake or
other disaster.
Strong vibrations could cause the instrument to fall over, resulting in injury.

• The power supply voltages and power consumptions of this instrument are listed below.
The power supply voltage of the instrument is indicated on the label on the side of the
instrument. Connect the instrument only to a power supply of the voltage indicated;
otherwise, fire or electric shock could result. Check that the power supply voltage is
stable and that its current capacity is sufficient to operate all the components of the
system. If not, the instrument will not operate at its rated performance.

Power Supply Voltage Power


Frequency
(Indicated on the instrument) Consumption

AC100 V-120 V and AC220 V-240 V


140 VA 50-60 Hz
(100-120 V and 220-240 V ~)

• Ground the instrument


Grounding is necessary to prevent electric shock in the event of an accident or
electrical discharge, and important for ensuring stable operation.

• Do not place heavy objects on the power cord, and keep any hot items away.
The cord could be damaged, resulting in fire, electrical shock or malfunction. If the cord
becomes damaged, contact your Shimadzu representative immediately.

• Do not modify the cord in any way. Do not bend it excessively or pull on it.
The cord could be damaged, resulting in fire, electrical shock or malfunction. If the cord
becomes damaged, contact your Shimadzu representative immediately.

iv UV-1800 SERIES 1178 OF 4699


Operation Precautions

WARNING
• Always wear protective gloves when handling any toxic or biologically infectious
samples.
• Do not use flammable sprays (hair sprays, insecticide sprays, etc.) near the instrument.
They could ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION
• Do not use mobile phones near the instrument.
They could damage data.

Precautions for Instrument Inspection, Maintenance,


Adjustment and Care.

WARNING
• Unplug the instrument before inspection, maintenance, or parts replacement.
Otherwise, electrical shock or short-circuit accidents could occur.

• Never remove the main cover.


This may cause injury or malfunction of the instrument.
The main cover does not need to be removed for routine maintenance, inspection and adjustment.
Have your Shimadzu representative perform any repairs requiring removal of the main cover.

• If the power cord plug gets dusty, remove the plug from the power outlet and wipe away
the dust with a dry cloth.
If dust is allowed to accumulate, fire could result.

• Replacement parts must be of the specifications given in "1.1 UV-1800 Configuration"


and "6.2 Maintenance Parts" in the System User's Guide.
Use of any other parts may result in instrument damage and malfunction.

• If any water gets onto the instrument, wipe it away immediately to prevent rust. Never
use alcohol or thinner solvents for cleaning the instrument.
They could cause discoloration.

• Dispose waste liquid properly and in accordance with the instructions of your
administrative department.

1179 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES v


Emergency Operation
In an emergency situation, press the " " side of the power switch located on the right side bottom of the UV-
1800 to turn OFF the instrument.

Power OFF
(" " side is pressed in.)

Operation at Power Outage


In case of electrical failure, perform the following operations:

1. Press the " " side of the power switch located on the right side bottom of the UV-1800 to turn OFF the
instrument.
2. After the power comes back on, start up the UV-1800 normally by following "Installation Precautions" and
"Operation Precautions".

vi UV-1800 SERIES 1180 OF 4699


Warning Labels
For safety operation, warning labels are affixed where special attention is required.
Should any of these labels peel off or be damaged, obtain replacements from Shimadzu Corporation.

(Right side)
High Temperature
Light source and light source chamber
are very hot. When replacing the light
source, be sure to turn OFF the power
and check that the light source is
completely cooled.

1181 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES vii


Product Warranty

Our company provides a warranty on this product, as stated below.

Details
1. Warranty Period: Please consult your Shimadzu representative for information about the extent of
the warranty.
2. Warranty Description: If failure occurs for reasons attributable to our company during the warranty
period, our company will provide repairs or the replacement of parts without
charge (including USB dongles). However, we may not be able to provide identical
products in the case of products such as PCs, and their peripherals and parts,
which have a short lifespan in the market.
3. Warranty Exceptions: The failures caused by the following events are excluded from the warranty, even
if they occur during the warranty period.
1) The product is handled in an improper way.
2) Repairs or modifications are performed by companies or people
other than our company and our designated companies.
3) This product was used in combination with hardware or software
other than those designated by our company.
4) Device failures and damage to data and software, including the
basic software, that are caused by computer viruses.
5) Device failures and damage to data and software, including the
basic software, that are caused by power failures, including power
outages and sudden drops of voltage.
6) Device failures and damage to data and software, including the
basic software, that are caused by powering off the device without
the proper shutdown procedure.
7) Failures caused by reasons other than the device itself.
8) Failures caused by use in harsh environments, such as in high
temperature or humidity, corrosive gas, or vibration.
9) Failures caused by fires and earthquakes or any other act of
providence, contamination by radio active substances and
hazardous substances, or any other force majeure event including
wars, riots, and crimes.
10) Problems occurring because the device is transferred or
transported after installation.
11) Expendable items and parts
Note: Recording media such as floppy disks and CD-ROMs are
considered expendables.

* If there is a document such as a warranty attached to the product, or there is a separate contract agreed upon
that includes warranty conditions, the rules stated in those documents shall be followed.
Warranty periods for products with special specifications and systems are provided separately.

viii UV-1800 SERIES 1182 OF 4699


After-Sales Service and Replacement Parts Availability

After-Sales Service If any problem occurs with this instrument, inspect it and take appropriate
corrective action as described in the Section "Troubleshooting". If the problem
persists, or symptoms not covered in the Troubleshooting section occur, contact
your Shimadzu representative.

Replacement Parts Replacement parts for this instrument will be available for a period of seven (7)
Availability years after the discontinuation of the product. Thereafter, such parts may cease to
available. Note, however, that the availability of parts not manufactured by
Shimadzu shall be determined by the relevant manufacturers.

Disposal Precautions

„ Disposal of UV-1800
When disposing of the UV-1800, contact your Shimadzu representative.
Otherwise, be sure to dispose of the product separately from general garbage, in compliance with the
applicable laws or regulations in the country or region where it is used.

„ When disposing of deuterium (D2) lamp


If the deuterium (D2) lamp should be broken or its life is finished, dispose of the lamp separately from
general garbage. When disposing of the deuterium (D2) lamp supplied from Shimadzu Corporation, select a
method which will not adversely influence the environment or human body, or ask a special disposal dealer
for advice or assistance.
The materials of deuterium (D2) lamp are as follows.

• Metals (Tungsten)
• Quartz glass
• Ceramic
• Plastic

Action for Environment (WEEE)

To all user of Shimadzu equipment in the European Union:


Equipment marked with this symbol indicates that it was sold on or after 13th August 2005,
which means it should not be disposed of with general household waste. Note that
ourequipment is for industrial/professional use only.

Contact Shimadzu service representative when the equipment has reached the end
of its life. They will advise you regarding the equipment take-back.

WEEE Mark

With your cooperation we are aiming to reduce contamination from waste electronic and electrical equipment
and preserve natural resource through reuse and recycling.
Do not hesitate to ask Shimadzu service representative, if you require further information.

1183 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES ix


Regulatory Information

For Europe:
The product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC.

Product Name: UV-Visible Spectrophotometer

Model Name: UV-1800

Manufacturer: SHIMADZU CORPORATION


ANALYTICAL & MEASURING INSTRUMENTS DIVISION

Address: 1, NISHINOKYO-KUWABARACHO,
NAKAGYO-KU, KYOTO, 604-8511, JAPAN

Authorized Representative in EU: Shimadzu Europa GmbH

Address: Albert-Hahn-Strasse 6-10, 47269 Duisburg, F.R. Germany

x UV-1800 SERIES 1184 OF 4699


CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Before Operating...


1.1 Application of Power .......................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Operation Precautions .......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Turning ON Power and Initialization ..................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Screen Display and Keypad .............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 Login Screen
(Only When Security Function is On) ................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.1 User Selection and Password............................................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Using the USB Memory Device ......................................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Handling Internal Data ....................................................................................................................... 1-9

Chapter 2 Mode Selection


2.1 Mode Menu Screen ........................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Overview of Various Modes............................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3 Load Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4 File Management ............................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.4.1 Narrowing Down Files......................................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.2 File Manager Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-13
2.4.3 Saving in CSV Format ........................................................................................................ 2-15

Chapter 3 Shared Operations


3.1 Save Files .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Save Single File.................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.2 Save Multiple Files................................................................................................................ 3-6
3.1.3 Delete Files in Built-in Memory ............................................................................................. 3-7
3.2 Load Files .......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.2.1 Load Single File .................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.2.2 Load Multiple Files.............................................................................................................. 3-11
3.3 Printout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-15
3.3.1 Available Printer.................................................................................................................. 3-15
3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe) ................................................................................................................ 3-16
3.4.1 Precautions When Reading Files ....................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.2 Loading and Saving Procedure .......................................................................................... 3-21

Chapter 4 Photometric (One-Wavelength)


4.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1 Measurement Screen ........................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Quantitation by K-factor Method ........................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 Data Print for Each Measurement ........................................................................................ 4-7
4.3 Data Display ...................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.1 Data Display Screen ............................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.2 Data Printout......................................................................................................................... 4-9

1185 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES xi


Chapter 5 Photometric 8λ (Multi-Wavelength)
5.1 Photometric 8λ................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 Equation................................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2.2 Changing Sample ................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.3 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.1 Measurement Screen............................................................................................................ 5-9
5.3.2 Data Print for Each Measurement....................................................................................... 5-11
5.4 Data Display .................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.4.1 Data Display Screen ........................................................................................................... 5-12
5.4.2 Data Printout ....................................................................................................................... 5-13

Chapter 6 Spectrum
6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.1 Measurement Screen............................................................................................................ 6-8
6.2.2 Auto-file Function .................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3 Displaying Spectrum........................................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.1 Curve Display Screen ......................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.2 Reading with Cursor ........................................................................................................... 6-12
6.3.3 Zoom Screen ...................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.4 Print Out........................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.1 Print Mode........................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.2 Waveform Format ............................................................................................................... 6-17

Chapter 7 Quantitation
7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.1 Select Measurement Method ................................................................................................ 7-5
7.1.2 Select Calibration Method..................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.3 Select Concentration Unit ..................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.4 Save Calibration Curve ......................................................................................................... 7-9
7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve ........................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.1 Entering Concentrations ..................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.2 Entering Absorbance .......................................................................................................... 7-11
7.2.3 Concentration Table............................................................................................................ 7-13
7.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve............................................................................................ 7-14
7.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation) .................................................................................... 7-16
7.3.1 Measurement Screen.......................................................................................................... 7-16
7.3.2 Data Print for Each Measurement....................................................................................... 7-17
7.4 List Display ...................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.4.1 List Display Screen ............................................................................................................. 7-18
7.4.2 Data Printout ....................................................................................................................... 7-19
7.5 Two/Three-wavelength Quantitation Method................................................................................... 7-20
7.5.1 Two-wavelength Quantitation ............................................................................................. 7-20
7.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation........................................................................................... 7-21
7.6 Derivative Quantitation Method ....................................................................................................... 7-22

xii UV-1800 SERIES 1186 OF 4699


Chapter 8 Kinetics
8.1 Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle (Measurement Cycle), and Lag/Rate............................. 8-6
8.3 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve ............................................................................................................. 8-9
8.4.1 Curve Display Screen ........................................................................................................... 8-9
8.4.2 Reading with Cursor ........................................................................................................... 8-11
8.4.3 Zoom Screen ...................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.4.4 Print Mode .......................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.5 Data List .......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.5.1 Data List Screen ................................................................................................................. 8-15
8.5.2 List Display ......................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.5.3 Data Print Format ............................................................................................................... 8-18
8.6 Print (Output) Format....................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.6.1 Waveform Format ............................................................................................................... 8-19
8.6.2 Table Data Format.............................................................................................................. 8-21
8.6.3 Curve Data Format ............................................................................................................. 8-22

Chapter 9 Kinetics Rate


9.1 Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 9-3
9.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle, and Interval................................................................... 9-5
9.3 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.1 Data Display during Measurement ....................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.2 Curve Display Screen during Measurement ......................................................................... 9-8
9.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve ............................................................................................................. 9-9
9.4.1 Curve Display Screen ........................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.2 Reading with Cursor ........................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.3 Zoom Screen ...................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.4.4 Print Mode .......................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.5 Data List .......................................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.5.1 Data List Display Screen .................................................................................................... 9-15
9.5.2 List Display ......................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.3 Data Print Format ............................................................................................................... 9-17
9.6 Print (Output) Format....................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.6.1 Waveform Format ............................................................................................................... 9-18
9.6.2 Table Data Format.............................................................................................................. 9-20
9.6.3 Curve Data Format ............................................................................................................. 9-21

Chapter 10 Time Scan


10.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 10-2
10.1.1 Setting Measurement Time and Cycle................................................................................ 10-5
10.2 Measurement................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3 Displaying Time Course Curve ........................................................................................................ 10-7
10.3.1 Curve Display Screen ......................................................................................................... 10-7
10.3.2 Reading with Cursor ......................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.3 Zoom Screen .................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4 Print Format ................................................................................................................................... 10-13
10.4.1 Print Mode ........................................................................................................................ 10-13
10.4.2 Waveform Format ............................................................................................................. 10-14

1187 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES xiii


Chapter 11 Multi-component Quantitation
11.1 Multi-component Quantitation.......................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 11-3
11.2.1 Input Measurement Wavelength ......................................................................................... 11-6
11.3 Standard Sample Data .................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.3.1 Entering Concentration ..................................................................................................... 11-11
11.3.2 Loading Absorbance ......................................................................................................... 11-12
11.3.3 Loading from Spectrum (Curve) Data File ........................................................................ 11-13
11.4 Measurement of Unknown Sample................................................................................................ 11-16
11.4.1 Measurement Screen........................................................................................................ 11-16
11.4.2 Data Print for Each Measurement..................................................................................... 11-18
11.5 Data Display .................................................................................................................................. 11-19
11.5.1 Data Display Screen ......................................................................................................... 11-19
11.5.2 Data Printout ..................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.6 Spectrum Display screen............................................................................................................... 11-21
11.6.1 Reading with Cursor ......................................................................................................... 11-23
11.6.2 Zoom Screen .................................................................................................................... 11-24

Chapter 12 Bio-method
12.1 Bio-method Selection....................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 DNA Quantitation............................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.2.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................. 12-4
12.2.2 λ (Wavelength).................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.3 Measurement .................................................................................................................... 12-10
12.2.4 List Display........................................................................................................................ 12-12
12.2.5 Printout (Output) ............................................................................................................... 12-13
12.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB Method, and Biuret Method .................................................... 12-14
12.3.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ............................................................... 12-14
12.3.2 Measurement Parameters (Defined Values)..................................................................... 12-15
12.4 UV Absorption Method................................................................................................................... 12-16
12.4.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ............................................................... 12-16
12.4.2 Select Concentration Unit ................................................................................................. 12-18
12.4.3 Measurement .................................................................................................................... 12-19
12.4.4 List Display........................................................................................................................ 12-21
12.4.5 Printout (Output) ............................................................................................................... 12-22

Chapter 13 Data Processing


13.1 Processing Options Screen ............................................................................................................. 13-2
13.1.1 Reading with Cursor ........................................................................................................... 13-4
13.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing............................................................................................................. 13-5
13.1.3 Example of Data Printout .................................................................................................... 13-7
13.2 Arithmetic Operations ...................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.2.1 Selecting Data..................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.2.2 Arithmetic Operations with Factor....................................................................................... 13-8
13.2.3 Arithmetic Operations with Curve Data............................................................................... 13-9
13.2.4 Operation Result Screen................................................................................................... 13-11
13.3 Derivative Operations .................................................................................................................... 13-12
13.3.1 Derivative Processing ....................................................................................................... 13-13
13.3.2 Operation Result Screen................................................................................................... 13-14
13.4 Peak Detection .............................................................................................................................. 13-17
13.5 Area Calculation ............................................................................................................................ 13-21
13.5.1 Area Calculation Processing............................................................................................. 13-23
13.5.2 Operation Result Screen................................................................................................... 13-25

xiv UV-1800 SERIES 1188 OF 4699


13.6 Point Pick....................................................................................................................................... 13-26
13.6.1 Point Pick at Even Intervals .............................................................................................. 13-26
13.6.2 Point Pick with Manual Input............................................................................................. 13-27
13.6.3 List Display Screen ........................................................................................................... 13-29
13.7 Print Processing ............................................................................................................................ 13-31

Chapter 14 Utilities
14.1 Utilities Menu Screen....................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1.1 Start Program ..................................................................................................................... 14-4
14.1.2 Decimal Display .................................................................................................................. 14-5
14.1.3 Light Source Selection........................................................................................................ 14-6
14.1.4 Printer Setting ..................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.1.5 Setting Data Accumulation Time ........................................................................................ 14-9
14.1.6 Turning OFF LCD Backlight Automatically ......................................................................... 14-9

Chapter 15 Maintenance
15.1 Maintenance Screen........................................................................................................................ 15-2
15.2 Security Functions ........................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.2.1 Security Function Operations ............................................................................................. 15-6
15.2.2 Setting Security Functions .................................................................................................. 15-9
15.2.3 Authority Setting for Security Parameters......................................................................... 15-11
15.2.4 Changing Password.......................................................................................................... 15-13

Chapter 16 Instrument Validation


16.1 Parameter Configuration Screen for Instrument Validation ............................................................. 16-2
16.2 Overview of Validation Items ........................................................................................................... 16-3
16.2.1 Semi-Auto Items ................................................................................................................. 16-3
16.2.2 Auto Items........................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen ..................................................................................................... 16-7
16.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing the Parameters ................................................ 16-8
16.3.2 Printing Results................................................................................................................. 16-12
16.3.3 Validation Options............................................................................................................. 16-13
16.4 Executing Validation ...................................................................................................................... 16-15
16.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products ........................................................................ 16-17
16.4.2 Example of Executing Validation ...................................................................................... 16-18
16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details ................................................................................................. 16-21
16.5.1 Photometric Accuracy....................................................................................................... 16-21
16.5.2 Photometric Repeatability................................................................................................. 16-27
16.5.3 Stray Light......................................................................................................................... 16-33
16.5.4 Resolution......................................................................................................................... 16-38
16.5.5 WL Accuracy..................................................................................................................... 16-43
16.6 Auto Validation Item Details .......................................................................................................... 16-49
16.6.1 Noise Level ....................................................................................................................... 16-49
16.6.2 Baseline Flatness ............................................................................................................. 16-53
16.6.3 Baseline Stability .............................................................................................................. 16-56
16.6.4 Resolution D2 .................................................................................................................... 16-60
16.6.5 Wavelength Accuracy D2 .................................................................................................. 16-63
16.6.6 Wavelength Repeatability D2 ............................................................................................ 16-67
16.6.7 Initialization Record .......................................................................................................... 16-69

1189 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES xv


Chapter 17 PC Control
17.1 Connecting to a PC.......................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.2 Controlling with UVProbe Software ................................................................................................. 17-6
17.2.1 UVProbe Installation and Instrument Addition .................................................................... 17-6
17.2.2 UVProbe Startup and Communication Establishment ........................................................ 17-8
17.2.3 Precautions When Controlling the UV-1800 from UVProbe ............................................. 17-11
17.3 Controlling with External Commands............................................................................................. 17-12
17.3.1 Receiving Commands and Protocol.................................................................................. 17-12
17.3.2 Example of Programming ................................................................................................. 17-14
17.3.3 Explanation of Commands and Data ................................................................................ 17-18
17.3.4 Programming with Visual Basic ........................................................................................ 17-18
17.3.5 Command List................................................................................................................... 17-23

Chapter 18 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation)


18.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation) .................................................................... 18-2
18.2 Multi-cell Holder ............................................................................................................................... 18-4
18.3 Sipper 160 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.4 Syringe Sipper ............................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.5 Blank Correction Function ............................................................................................................. 18-12

Appendix A UVProbe Basic Operation


A-1 UVProbe Overview ............................................................................................................................A-2
A.1.1 Module Configuration........................................................................................................... A-2
A.1.2 Common Screen Frame....................................................................................................... A-3
A.1.3 Data File Structure ............................................................................................................... A-4
A.1.4 Help Functions ..................................................................................................................... A-5
A-2 Basic Operation .................................................................................................................................A-9
A.2.1 UVProbe Startup/Shutdown................................................................................................. A-9
A.2.2 Open/Close Data Files....................................................................................................... A-11
A.2.3 Change Graph Scales........................................................................................................ A-13
A.2.4 Change Graph Display Settings......................................................................................... A-14
A-3 Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................A-17
A-4 Peak Pick.........................................................................................................................................A-27
A.4.1 Show/Hide Peak (Valley) Marks on Graph ........................................................................ A-28
A.4.2 Show/Hide Peaks (Valleys) on Peak Pick Table................................................................ A-28
A.4.3 Specify Peak Pick Threshold (Changing Parameters)....................................................... A-29
A-5 Print Out...........................................................................................................................................A-32
A.5.1 UVProbe Printing Function ................................................................................................ A-32
A.5.2 Printing Procedure ............................................................................................................. A-34

Index

xvi UV-1800 SERIES 1190 OF 4699


1
1 Before Operating...

Chapter 1 Before 1

Operating... 1

CONTENTS
1
1.1 Application of Power .......................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Screen Display and Keypad .............................................................................................................. 1-3 1
1.3 Login Screen (Only When Security Function is On) .......................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Using the USB Memory Device ......................................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Handling Internal Data ....................................................................................................................... 1-9 1

1191 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-1


1.1 1.1 Application of Power

1 1.1.1 Operation Precautions


„ Precautions Before Operation

CAUTION
• Before turning ON the power switch, check to be sure that nothing is placed in the sample
1 compartment and cell holder.

1 If the power is turned ON when a sample cell is mounted to the UV-1800, the light source energy
check and wavelength check may be judged as "NG" since the light beam is obstructed.
When this occurs, first turn OFF the power switch, remove the cell, and then turn ON the power
1
switch again.

1 • If "Sipper 160" (special accessory) is mounted, turn ON the power switch with the flow cell filled
with distilled water.

1 If the sample remains halfway within the cell, the light source energy check and wavelength
check may be judged as "NG" since the beam is refracted or scattered on the remaining sample.
If this occurs, turn OFF the power switch and turn it ON again while pressing down the sipper 160
1 suction lever. After the pump of the sipper 160 starts rotating, suction the distilled water from the
sample suction port. When the distilled water starts being drained, release the lever and finish the
suction operation.
1
„ Precautions During Operation
1
CAUTION
1 • Keep the sample compartment cover closed during measurement or 100 %T (0 Abs) correction.

Any outside light detected on the spectrometer may interfere with accurate measurement and
1 correction.

NOTE
1
100 %T (0 Abs) correction is the function to correct the current photometric value to 100 %T
for transmittance measurement, and 0 Abs for absorbance measurement. Performing this
correction only for the specified wavelength is called "Auto-zero", and performing within the
specified wavelength range is "Baseline correction".
1

1.1.2 Turning ON Power and Initialization


When the instrument power is turned ON, the UV-1800 starts executing various checks and
initializations.
For details on this procedure, refer to the System User's Guide, "2.5 Turning ON the Power and
Initialization".

1-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1192 OF 4699


1.2 1.2 Screen Display and Keypad

1
CAUTION
DO NOT press the keys on the operation keypad using a sharp-tipped instrument such as ballpoint
pen.
The film on the keys may be torn off or the keys may be damaged.

Fig. 1.1 illustrates the relation between the screen of the UV-1800 and the keypad. The modes and
1
settings in the various screens can be selected using the number keys through or
the function keys through . When selecting modes or settings, it is not necessary to 1
press the key after you have pressed the number keys or function key. On the other hand,
when entering numeric values, such as wavelength settings or display mode, etc., you must press the 1
key to set that value.

1
Indicates the current wavelength
Screen title and measured value

1
Light Source Lamp Icon
Indicates the illumination
status of the light source
Corresponds to the lamp. 1
numeric key "W" and "D" stand for the
halogen lamp and
deuterium lamp,
respectively. This icon is 1
displayed when the lamp
is ON, and not displayed
when it is OFF. A blinking
icon indicates that the 1
lamp is OFF with some
errors.
^ System's User's
Guide, Chapter 5
"Troubleshooting"
1

Fig. 1.1 Screen display and keypad

1193 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-3


1.2 Screen Display and Keypad

The basic function of each key is described below. Some keys may be assigned to special functions
1
depending on the screen.

Key Description

This is the key for starting and stopping measurement once


1 parameter setting has been completed.

When you press this key, the absorbance (transmittance) at the

1 current wavelength will automatically be set to 0 Abs (100 %T).

This is the key that is used to change the current wavelength.

1 When you enter a value, press this key after the value to set the
entering value.

1 Use these keys to move the cursor in the LCD screen upward/
downward, or left/right. The left cursor key can also be used to
enter a negative (–) value when entering numeric values.
1
These are the keys corresponding to the functions that are
displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen.
1
Use this key to display to the previous screen.

Use this key to adjust the screen contrast. Using cursor keys
1
( ) while holding down this key changes the
contrast.
1
Use this key to output a hard copy of the monitor screen.

Use these keys to enter numeric values.


1
~

Use this key to clear a numeric value entry error. When you
1 press this key, the numeric value which has been entered will be
cleared and then you may reenter the appropriate value.
1

1-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1194 OF 4699


Login Screen
1.3 1.3

(Only When Security Function is On)


The UV-1800 has a security function that allows limiting function availability according to user level.
1
(^ "15.2.2 Setting Security Functions")
3 types of users can be specified for the UV-1800: Administrator, Developer, and Operator. If the
security function is ON, you need to login to the UV-1800 as one of those users.
The Login screen (Fig. 1.2) appears when the power is turned ON and the following initialization is
complete, or when the current user is logged out (Note). 1

1
NOTE
Press the key on the [Mode menu] screen (^ "2.1 Mode Menu Screen") to log out
1
from the current user.

In the initial state of the screen, the last logged-in user is displayed. If you enter a correct password 1
the display will switch to the [Mode menu] screen.
Set or change the password for each user in the Security Settings screen (^ "15.2.2 Setting 1
Security Functions"). No password has been assigned to any user in the initial settings.

NOTE
1
• Be extremely careful not to lose your password.
Note especially that if the password for Administrator is lost, the status cannot be recovered
even by attempting to set a new password, since the security function settings become 1
defunct.
In such cases, the service personnel must work at your installation site for function recovery.
1
Contact your Shimadzu representative.

Fig. 1.2 [Login] Screen

1195 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-5


1.3 Login Screen (Only When Security Function is On)

1 1.3.1 User Selection and Password

1 Press [Chg.User] key in the [Login] screen.

2 The [Target User] Selection screen is displayed.


Use the keys to select a user.
1
(Here, [Administrator] is selected.)
Press the key to confirm the selection.
1

1 3 Enter the password for the selected user. For


example, to enter a password "1234", press the
, , , keys in order.
1
After the entry, press the key to confirm the
password.
1

4 The [Mode menu] screen is displayed.

NOTE
Available functions vary according to the rights
assigned to each user.

1-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1196 OF 4699


1.4 1.4 Using the USB Memory Device

NOTE 1
For details on the procedure for using the USB memory device, refer to the instruction manual
of the USB memory device.

You can connect a commercially available USB memory device (a flash memory that supports USB
1
1.1) to the UV-1800. The USB connector for connecting the USB memory is located on the side of the
operation keypad (^ System User's Guide, "1.2.3 UV-1800 Main Body, Right Side View").
1

NOTE 1
The USB memory can also be connected to the USB connector located on the left side of the
instrument (^ System User's Guide, "1.2.2 UV-1800 Main Body, Left Side View"). However,
1
the UV-1800 can simultaneously recognize only a USB memory device.

1
Fig. 1.3 Connecting the USB memory device

Using the USB memory device, the following operations become available:

1
• Storing measurement parameters and data acquired during measurements:
You can store these data in your PC hard disk via the USB memory device.
For the procedure for saving measurement parameters and acquired data, refer to "3.1 Save Files".

• Reading measurement data on a commercially available PC software:


The UV-1800 can convert the measurement data to the CSV format, which can be read on any
software supporting the format.
For the procedure for converting/saving measurement data in the CSV format, refer to "2.4 File
Management".

1197 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-7


1.4 Using the USB Memory Device

• Reading measurement data on the UVProbe software


1
The data files obtained/saved in the UV-1800 can be read on the PC control/analysis software
UVProbe (Standard accessory).
For details on the type of data files that can be read on the UVProbe, refer to "3.4 Read Files (on
UVProbe)".

1
NOTE
1 Data files once saved in the UVProbe software cannot be read on the UV-1800.

„ Precautions for connecting the USB memory


1
When you connect the USB memory device, the "USB memory icon" is displayed on the right bottom
of the screen.
1 The USB memory can be connected or removed regardless of the power ON/OFF status of the UV-
1800. However, if the USB memory is unplugged during the data transfer, the data within the memory
1 device may be corrupted. DO NOT remove the USB memory device while the message indicating that
the UV-1800 is currently accessing the memory device is displayed.

(USB memory icon)


1

Fig. 1.4
1

1-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1198 OF 4699


1.5 1.5 Handling Internal Data

When performing measurement, the UV-1800 usually obtains data values containing more decimal
1
places than are displayed on the screen.
For curve data, the UV-1800 saves obtained values as they are. For table data, the UV-1800 rounds
obtained photometric values as given below before calculating concentrations, etc, displaying and
saving the results.
• Abs (Absorbance): Rounded to four decimal places (i.e. the fifth decimal place is rounded off). 1
• %T (Transmittance): Rounded to two decimal places (i.e. the third decimal place is rounded off).

NOTE
The number of digits of the data displayed on the screen is in accordance with the set value of 1
[Decimal Display] in the Utilities Menu screen.
^ "14.1 Utilities Menu Screen"
1

1199 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 1-9


2
2 Mode Selection

Chapter 2 Mode Selection 2

2
The [Mode menu] screen which is displayed after initialization is completed, and the operations which are
shared by the various modes are explained in this chapter. 2
CONTENTS
2
2.1 Mode Menu Screen ........................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Overview of Various Modes............................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3 Load Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 2-9 2
2.4 File Management ............................................................................................................................. 2-11

1200 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-1


2.1 2.1 Mode Menu Screen

The screen to select a measurement mode to be carried out (the [Mode menu] screen : Fig. 2.1) is
2
displayed.

2
NOTE
If the security function ("15.2.2 Setting Security Functions") is ON, the login screen is displayed.
For the login procedure, refer to "1.3 Login Screen (Only When Security Function is On)".

2 1

2 3 4 5
2
Fig. 2.1 [Mode menu] screen
2

2-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1201 OF 4699


2.1 Mode Menu Screen

No. Key Operation Display Description 2


1 [Photometric] Displays the screen for selecting the
Photometric mode measurement method. 2
• One-wavelength measurement
^ Chapter 4 "Photometric (One-
Wavelength)"
• Multi-wavelength measurement
^ Chapter 5 "Photometric 8λ (Multi- 2
Wavelength)"

[Spectrum] Displays the Measurement Parameter 2


Configuration screen for Spectrum mode.
^ Chapter 6 "Spectrum"
2
[Quantitation] Displays the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen for Quantitation mode.
2
^ Chapter 7 "Quantitation"

[Kinetics] Displays the screen for selecting the Kinetics


mode measurement method. 2
• Kinetics Measurement
^ Chapter 8 "Kinetics" 2
• Rate Measurement
^ Chapter 9 "Kinetics Rate"
2
[Time Scan] Displays the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen for Time Scan mode.
^ Chapter 10 "Time Scan" 2
[Multi- Displays the Measurement Parameter
Component] Configuration screen for Multi-component 2
Quantitation mode.
^ Chapter 11 "Multi-component Quantitation" 2
[Bio-Method] Displays the screen for selecting the Bio-
method mode measurement method.
2
^ Chapter 12 "Bio-method"

[Utilities] Displays the screen for performing the 2


instrument utility settings.
^ Chapter 14 "Utilities"

2 [LoadParm] Calls the conditions stored in the built-in


memory or USB memory.
^ "2.3 Load Parameters"

3 [FileMng.] Used to perform various operations (file loading,


CSV conversion, etc.) on stored files in the built-
in memory or USB memory.
^ "2.4 File Management"

1202 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-3


2.1 Mode Menu Screen

2 No. Key Operation Display Description

4 [Mainte.] Displays the screen for performing inspection


2 and maintenance of the UV-1800 (e.g.
instrument validation and usage time check for
the light source lamp), as well as security
function settings.
^ Chapter 15 "Maintenance"
2
5 [PC Ctrl] Allows controlling the UV-1800 via an external
computer.
2 ^ Chapter 17 "PC Control"

– – Logs out the current user when the security


2 function (^ "15.2.2 Setting Security
Functions") is ON.

2-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1203 OF 4699


2.2 2.2 Overview of Various Modes

You can move from the [Mode menu] screen to one of the 8 measurement modes and 2 functions
2
described below. For details on each mode, refer to the listed reference.

2
„ [Photometric] mode
Measures absorbance or % transmittance of a sample at
arbitrary wavelengths.
The following 2 measurement methods are available.
* One-wavelength measurement
^ Chapter 4 "Photometric (One-Wavelength)"
2
* Multi-wavelength measurement
^ Chapter 5 "Photometric 8λ (Multi-Wavelength)" 2

In multi-wavelength measurement, it is possible to select


one of the following five equations based on the data 2
obtained at up to four wavelengths and then output the
calculation results:
2
• A1-A2
• A1/A2
• dA(A1 to A3) 2
• (K1A1 + K2A2 + K3A3 + K4A4)x K5
• K5x(K1A1 + K2A2)/(K3A3 + K4A4)
2

„ [Spectrum] mode 2
Scans a wavelength range to measure the absorbance
and % transmittance of a sample as a function of
wavelength. 2
Single beam energy measurement can also be
performed.
2
Data processing such as peak detection, smoothing, and
mathematical calculation may be applied to the
2
measured spectrum.

^ Chapter 6 "Spectrum"

1204 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-5


2.2 Overview of Various Modes

2 „ [Quantitation] mode
Creates a calibration curve from a standard sample and
quantitates an unknown sample.
2 The following 4 measurement methods are available.
* 1-wavelength measurement
* 2-wavelength measurement
* 3-wavelength measurement
* Derivative quantitation
2
In addition, the following 3 methods are available for
calibration curve generation.
2 * K-factor
* Single point calibration curve
2 * Multi-point calibration curve

^ Chapter 7 "Quantitation"
2
„ [Kinetics] mode
Calculates enzyme activity from the time dependent
2 change in absorbance.
Up to 16 samples can be measured at once using a
multi-cell holder (optional).
2
The following 2 measurement methods are available.
2 * Kinetics measurement
* Rate measurement

2 ^ Chapter 8 "Kinetics"
^ Chapter 9 "Kinetics Rate"
2

2-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1205 OF 4699


2.2 Overview of Various Modes

„ [Time Scan] mode 2


This function is used to measure the change in the rate
of absorbance, transmittance, or energy in the fixed
wavelength. Up to 16 samples can be measured using 2
the multi-cell holder (option).
Data processing such as mathematical calculation may
be applied to the measurement data.

^ Chapter 10 "Time Scan" 2

„ [Multi-component] mode 2
Enables samples with up to 8 constituent components to
be measured and quantitated.
2
^ Chapter 11 "Multi-component Quantitation"

2
„ [Bio-method] mode
In the Bio-method Mode, the following 2 measurement 2
methods are available.
* DNA quantitation
* Protein measurement 2

The [DNA Quantitation] obtains the DNA and protein 2


concentrations based on the measured absorbances.

The [Protein measurement] performs protein 2


quantitation. The following 5 methods are available.
• Lowry method 2
• BCA method
• CBB method
• Biuret method
• UV absorption method

^ Chapter 12 "Bio-method"

1206 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-7


2.2 Overview of Various Modes

2 „ [Utilities] mode
This is the mode for setting and changing the basic
operating parameters of the instrument.
2
^ Chapter 14 "Utilities"

2 „ [Maintenance]
This mode provides the following functions for
maintenance purposes.
2
<Instrument performance/status check>
2 • Instrument Validation function
• Lamp illumination time management

2 <Instrument calibration/correction>
• Baseline correction
• Wavelength recalibration
2
<User authority management>
• Security settings
2
^ Chapter 15 "Maintenance"
2
„ [PC control]
This mode allows the UV-1800 to be controlled by an
2 external computer.
Also select this mode when using the UVProbe software
attached to this instrument.
2
^ Chapter 17 "PC Control"
2

2-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1207 OF 4699


2.3 2.3 Load Parameters

You can load the measurement parameters stored in the built-in memory or USB memory device. (For
2
details on saving parameters, refer to 3.1 Save Files.)

Measurement type
Indicates the measurement
mode of the parameter file at the
Cursor (highlighted) cursor position.

2
Asterisk File list
Indicates the file is Displays the list of files stored
saved in the built-in in the built-in memory or USB
memory. memory in alphabetical order. 2

2
1 Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
pages" of the file list.
2
1 2 3 4

Fig. 2.2 [Load Files] screen


2

2
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 or [Load] Loads the file at the current cursor position


(highlighted). 2

2 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor


position (highlighted). Press the key to 2
return to the [Load files] screen (Fig. 2.2).
2

Header sample

3 [PrevPage] Displays the previous page of the file list.

4 [NextPage] Displays the next page of the file list.

– – Moves a cursor in the file list.

1208 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-9


2.3 Load Parameters

2
NOTE
When using a USB memory device, the file list can only display 2000 files. If more than 2000
2
files exist in the USB memory, a notification message appears and only 2000 files are
displayed. Files are displayed in an alphabetized order.

„ "Load Parameters" Procedure


2
1 Press
menu] screen.
[LoadParm] key in the [Mode
2

2
2 The [Load files] screen is displayed.
By pressing the
keys, move the cursor to the desired parameter file.
Press the key, or the [Load] key.
2

2
3 The Parameter Configuration screen for the selected
measurement mode appears, and the parameter
settings in the selected file will be loaded on the
2
screen.

2-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1209 OF 4699


2.4 2.4 File Management

The UV-1800 creates the following 3 types of measurement files.


2
1. Parameter file
2. Curve data file
3. Table data file 2

When you select [FileMng.] key and narrow down the files to be operated, the File
Management will appear, where you can perform file operations on these 3 types of files, such as
copying, deleting, saving in CSV format (^ "2.4.3 Saving in CSV Format"), and displaying the file
2
contents.

2
NOTE
When using a USB memory device, only 2000 files are displayed in the file list for each
2
measurement file type listed above. Files are displayed in an alphabetized order.

1210 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-11


2.4 File Management

2 2.4.1 Narrowing Down Files


To display the [File Manager] screen, you need to first narrow down the file selection with regard to
memory storage type, file type, and method type.
2

2
[FileMng] key

key key
2

* When [Built-in memory] is selected.


2
key

2 Go to the File Manegement screen


(Fig. 2.4)

2 key * When [USB memory] is selected.

key

Go to the [File Manager] screen (Fig. 2.4)

Fig. 2.3 Operational/Screen flow to [File Manager] screen

2-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1211 OF 4699


2.4 File Management

2.4.2 File Manager Screen 2


In the file list, only the files that have been narrowed down in the previous section 2.4.1 are displayed.

2
File type
Memory type Measurement/data type
Indicates the type of the Indicates the measurement
memory where the listed files mode of the data/parameter file
are stored (the built-in memory at the (highlighted) cursor
or USB memory). position.
2
Selected file
The file name is
displayed in a box.
File list
2

Cursor
2
5 Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
pages" of the file list.
2
1 2 3 4

Fig. 2.4 [File Manager] screen 2

No. Key Operation Display Description


2
1 [Copy] Saves the selected file under the same name to a
separate memory.
2 [Delete] Deletes the selected file from the memory storage. 2
3 [CSV Conv] Converts the selected file to CSV format and saves it
to the USB memory.
2
^ "2.4.3 Saving in CSV Format"
NOTE
The parameter files cannot be converted to CSV
2
file format.
4 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor 2
position (highlighted). Press the key to
return to the [File Manager] screen (Fig. 2.4).
2

Header sample
5 – Selects a file or cancels the selected file.
– – Moves a cursor in the file list.

1212 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-13


2.4 File Management

2 „ "File Selection" Procedure

2 1 By pressing the
keys, move the cursor (highlighted) and highlight the
desired file.
Press the key to confirm the file selection.

2
2 In the list, the name of the file selected and confirmed
in procedure 1 is displayed in a box.
2 Repeat procedure 1 if you wish to select multiple files
at one time.
2

NOTE
2
A maximum of 32 files can be processed in one
operation simultaneously.
2
„ Canceling of "File Selection" Procedure
2
1 Using the
move the cursor (highlighted) and highlight an
keys,

2
already-selected file that is displayed in a box.

2 Press the key to cancel the already-made


selection. (The box will disappear.)

2-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1213 OF 4699


2.4 File Management

2.4.3 Saving in CSV Format 2


This function is used for converting the curve data or table data acquired in the UV-1800 to the text
data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format, and saving this data.
2
The converted data are saved as the decimal place values specified in [2. Decimal Display] in the
Utilities Menu screen.
You can use the converted data on any commercially available software that supports the CSV format.

2
NOTE
The parameter files cannot be converted to the CSV format.
2

The data file newly created in CSV format is saved under the same name as that of the original file.
2
Note that data files in CSV format can only be saved in the USB memory device.
The data files converted to the CSV format are saved in the folder location described below within the
USB memory. If the folder does not exist, the UV-1800 automatically creates it when saving the data 2
files.
2

File Type Folder Configuration


2
Curve data file converted to the CSV format (*.csv) \UV1800\CData

Table data file converted to the CSV format (*.csv) \UV1800\TData


2

"0610TOL2.SPC" 2
Header part
WL/nm,Abs File name and column title
280.00,0.0068 2
279.95,0.0069
279.90,0.0070
279.85,0.0071 2
Data display
279.80,0.0072
Wavelength values and
279.75,0.0073 photometric values (all data) are
2
listed and delimited with commas.
279.30,0.0083
279.25,0.0085
2
·
·
·

(Conversion example of spectrum curve data)

1214 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 2-15


2.4 File Management

2
"0613PH81.PHO"
No.,550.0,520.0,500.0,480.0,460.0,Result Header part
2 File name and column title
1,0.524,0.544,0.550,0.542,0.544,0.9768
2,0.502,0.504,0.515,0.491,0.481,0.9997
3,0.451,0.439,0.454,0.408,0.382,1.0326 Data display
· Sample No., wavelength values,
photometric values (all data), and
· calculation results are listed and
2 · delimited with commas.

2 (Conversion example of photometric 8λ table data)

2-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1215 OF 4699


3
3 Shared Operations

Chapter 3 Shared 3

Operations 3

3
This chapter describes the operations common to several modes of the UV-1800. The operations which are
specific to each mode will be described in the chapter explaining the mode. 3
CONTENTS
3
3.1 Save Files .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Load Files .......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3 Printout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-15 3
3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe) ................................................................................................................ 3-16

1216 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-1


3.1 3.1 Save Files

The files created in each mode of UV-1800 are saved by the following key operations.
3
For details on the save file screen and the operation procedure, refer to "3.1.1 Save Single File".
Meanwhile, for saving multiple files simultaneously, refer to "3.1.2 Save Multiple Files".
3

3 Table 3.1 List of the UV-1800 file type

Number of
Key
File Type Operation Screen Display storable files
Operation
(Built-in Memory)

Parameters file*1) Measurement [SavParam] 24 files


3
Parameter
Configuration Screen
3
Curve data file Measurement Screen [SavCurve] 8 files

Table data file Measurement Screen [SaveData] 8 files


3
*1) Note that the measurement parameters for optional accessories (multi-cell holder, sipper, etc.)
connected to the sample compartment are not saved.
3
When the USB memory is connected, files of each type are saved in the folder under the location
3 described below. If the destination folder does not exist, the UV-1800 creates it automatically when
saving the files.
3

File Type Folder Configuration


3
Parameters file \UV1800\Method

Curve data file \UV1800\CData


3
Table data file \UV1800\TData

3 NOTE
The maximum number of the files that can be saved in USB memory depends on the memory
storage size. However, only 2000 files can be displayed in the file list for each measurement
3
file type listed above. Files are displayed in an alphabetized order.

3-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1217 OF 4699


3.1 Save Files

When browsing the files in USB memory on the computer, they will have the file extensions described
3
in the following.

3
Table 3.2 List of the UV-1800 measurement data files

File 3
Parameters File Table Data File Curve Data File
Measurement Type
Photometric *.mp0 *.pho

Photometric 8λ *.mp1 *.pho

Spectrum *.ms0 *.spc 3

Quantitation *.mq0 *.pho


3
Kinetics *.mk0 *.kin *.tmc

Kinetics Rate *.mk1 *.rat *.tmc


3
Time scan *.mt0 *.tmc

Multi-component *.mm0 *.mcq *.spc


3
Bio-method (DNA Quantitation) *.md0 *.dna

Bio-method (Lowry) *.mq1 *.pho 3


Bio-method (BCA) *.mq2 *.pho

Bio-method (CBB) *.mq3 *.pho 3


Bio-method (Biuret) *.mq4 *.pho

Bio-method (UV method) *.mq5 *.pho 3

* The files framed with " " can be read on the UVProbe software (standard accessory).
3

1218 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-3


3.1 Save Files

3 3.1.1 Save Single File


When you select [SavParam], [SavCurve], or [SaveData] in each measurement mode, the [Save files]
screen (Fig. 3.1) is displayed.
3
The file list of the [Save files] screen displays the files that have been saved to the built-in memory or
USB memory in the current measurement mode. The name of the file stored in the built-in memory is
3
marked with an asterisk to differentiate the file location.

Asterisk
Indicates the file is saved in the
built-in memory.
Input file name
3

Cursor
File list
3

Character list
Indicates numerals and
3 characters available for
file names.
5
3 Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
pages" of the file list.

3
1 2 3 4

Fig. 3.1 [Save files] screen (For single file)


3

3 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Save] Saves a file under the input file name.

3 2 [ON/OFF] Toggles ON/OFF of the filename memory function.


ON: The [Save files] screen opens with the last-
entered filename displayed in the Input file name
3
column.
OFF: The [Save files] screen opens with blank in the
3 Input file name column.

3 [PrevPage] Displays the file list on the previous page.


3
4 [NextPage] Displays the file list on the next page.

5 – Moves a cursor in the character list.

– – Inputs the character at the current cursor position.

– – Deletes the last letter in the input file name field.

– – Inputs numbers for a part of the file name.


~

3-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1219 OF 4699


3.1 Save Files

„ "Save files" Procedure 3

1 Use the
move the cursor to the desired character on the
keys to
3
character list.
Press the key to enter the character in the 3
input file name column.

2 Repeat the procedure 1 until you finish entering the


desired filename. A maximum of 8 characters can be 3
entered.
3
NOTE
For saving multiple files, a maximum of 6 files can
3
be entered.

3
Press [Save] key.
3

3 Use the keys to move the cursor to


the desired destination memory.
3

Press the key to save the file.


3
NOTE
If the save is not allowed due to a lack of free 3
space on the built-in memory, you can move to
the screen for deleting unnecessary files in the
3
built-in memory. (^ "3.1.3 Delete Files in Built-
in Memory")
3

1220 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-5


3.1 Save Files

3 3.1.2 Save Multiple Files


When the following measurements are performed, multiple curve data are obtained at one
measurement. Therefore, all data files are saved simultaneously.
3
• Repeated measurement in the Spectrum mode*
• Measurement using multiple cells in the Kinetics/Time Scan mode
3 * Only when executing the auto-file function with a USB memory device connected. (^ "6.2.2
Auto-file Function")

A maximum of 6 characters can be used as a filename since cell numbers or measurement numbers
are automatically attached to the filename.
3
Example) When entering the filename "KIN" for a measurement with 3 cells
3 File Name Description
KIN01 Time course data at cell position 1
3 KIN02 Time course data at cell position 2
KIN03 Time course data at cell position 3

3 The file list on the [Save files] screen displays only the data files that have been saved to the built-in
memory or USB memory in the currently selected measurement mode. The name of the file stored in
3 the built-in memory is marked with an asterisk to differentiate the file location.

3 Except for the difference of maximum input characters, the function and operation procedure are
identical to those for saving a single file (See 3.1.1).

3
Asterisk
Indicates the file is saved in the
built-in memory.
Input file name
3

3 Cursor
File list

Character list
3 Indicates numerals and
characters available for
file names.
3
Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
pages" of the file list.

Fig. 3.2 [Save files] screen (For multiple files)

3-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1221 OF 4699


3.1 Save Files

3.1.3 Delete Files in Built-in Memory 3


When saving files to the built-in memory when enough space does not exist in the memory, a
message (Fig. 3.4) appears asking you whether to delete unnecessary files.
3
When the deletion is selected, the [Delete files] screen (Fig. 3.3) appears.
For the maximum number of files that can be saved in built-in memory, refer to section 3.1, "Table 3.1
3
List of the UV-1800 file type".

File type
Measurement/data type
Indicates the type of the files
Selected file
(data) that are currently listed. 3
The file name is displayed
in a box.

3
File list
Cursor

3
1 2

Fig. 3.3 [Delete files] screen in Built-in Memory


3

No. Key Operation Display Description 3


1 [Delete] Calls the selected file.

2 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor 3


position (highlighted). Press the key to
return to the [Delete files] screen (Fig. 3.3). 3

Header sample

– – Moves a cursor in the file list.

– – Selects a file or cancels the selected file.

1222 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-7


3.1 Save Files

3 „ "Delete files" Procedure

3 1 Use the
[Yes], and press the
keys to move the cursor to
key.

3
Fig. 3.4

3
2 The [Delete files] screen is displayed.
Using the keys, move the cursor to
the data file you wish to delete.

3 Press the key to confirm the selection.

Fig. 3.5
3
3 The name of the file selected and confirmed in
procedure 2 is displayed in a box.
3
Repeat procedure 2 when you wish to delete multiple
files.
3
NOTE
3 A maximum of 32 files can be processed in one
operation simultaneously.

3
After having marked all data files to be deleted, press
Fig. 3.6
the [Delete] key.
3

3
4 A confirmation message for the deletion appears.
Use the keys to move the cursor to
[Yes], and press the key.

Fig. 3.7

5 The selected files are deleted, and you will return to


the [Delete files] screen (Fig. 3.5). Then, press the
key to save the new file and return to the
previous screen.

3-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1223 OF 4699


3.2 3.2 Load Files

The files created and saved in each measurement mode of the UV-1800 can be loaded by the
3
following key operations.

File Type Operation Screen Key Operation Reference


3

Parameters file [Mode menu] screen [LoadPam] Section 2.1


3
Curve data file Measurement screen [LoadCurv]
Spectrum (Fig. 6.3)
Time scan (Fig. 10.4)
Kinetics (Fig. 8.8)
Kinetics rate (Fig. 9.7)
3
Curve Display screen [LoadCurv]
Multi-component (Fig. 11.19)
3
Table data file Data Display screen [LoadData]
Photometric (Fig. 4.7)
Photometric 8λ (Fig. 5.9) 3
Quantitation (Fig. 7.15)
Kinetics (Fig. 8.14)
Kinetics rate (Fig. 9.14) 3
Multi-component (Fig. 11.17)
DNA Quantitation (Fig. 12.7)
Lowry method (Fig. 7.15) 3
BCA method (Fig. 7.15)
CBB method (Fig. 7.15)
Biuret method (Fig. 7.15) 3
UV method (Fig. 12.15)

NOTE
When using a USB memory device, only 2000 files can be displayed in the file list for each 3
measurement file type listed above. Files are displayed in an alphabetized order.
3

1224 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-9


3.2 Load Files

3 3.2.1 Load Single File


When loading the parameter files and table data files, the screen for loading a single file is displayed.
For details on loading the parameter files, refer to "2.3 Load Parameters".
3
The file list of the [Load files] screen displays only the files that have been saved to the built-in
memory or USB memory in the current measurement mode. The name of the file stored in the built-in
3
memory is marked with an asterisk to differentiate the file location.

File type
Measurement/data type
Indicates the type of the files
3 Asterisk
(data) that are currently listed.
Indicates the file is saved
in the built-in memory.

3
File list

Cursor
3

3 1 Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
pages" of the file list.

3
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3.8 [Load files] screen
3
No. Key Operation Display Description

3 1 or [Load] Loads the file at the current cursor position


(highlighted).

3 2 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor


position (highlighted). Press the key to
return to the [Load Files] screen (Fig. 3.8).
3

Header sample

3 [PrevPage] Displays the file list on the previous page.

4 [NextPage] Displays the file list on the next page.

– – Moves a cursor in the file list.

3-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1225 OF 4699


3.2 Load Files

„ "Load files" Procedure 3

1 Press
screen.
[LoadData] key in the Data Display
3

Fig. 3.9
3

2 The [Load files] screen is displayed.


Using the keys, 3
move the cursor to the desired table data file.
Press or [Load] key.
3

3
Fig. 3.10
3
3 The selected table data file is loaded.

3
Fig. 3.11

3.2.2 Load Multiple Files


When loading the curve data files, the screen for loading multiple files is displayed.
A maximum of 32 files can be loaded simultaneously.

NOTE
Even though multiple files are loaded, all files are read-only (only displayed) except the latest-
loaded file.

1226 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-11


3.2 Load Files

The file list on the [Load files] screen displays only the data files that have been saved to the built-in
3
memory or USB memory in the currently selected measurement mode. The name of the file stored in
the built-in memory is marked with an asterisk to differentiate the file location.
3

File type
3 Measurement/data type
Asterisk Indicates the type of the files
Indicates the file is saved in (data) that are currently listed.
the built-in memory.

3 Selected file File list


The file name is displayed in a
box.

3
Cursor

5 Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
3 pages" of the file list.

1 2 3 4
3
Fig. 3.12 [Load Files] screen

No. Key Operation Display Description


3
1 [Load] Calls the selected file.

2 [Header] Displays the contents of the file at the current cursor


3 position (highlighted). Press the key to
return to the [Load Files] screen (Fig. 3.12).
3

Header sample

3 [PrevPage] Displays the file list on the previous page.

4 [NextPage] Displays the file list on the next page.

5 – Selects a file or cancels the selected file.

– – Moves a cursor in the file list.

3-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1227 OF 4699


3.2 Load Files

„ Load (multiple) files Procedure 3

1 Press
screen.
[LoadCurv] key in the [Mode menu]
3

Fig. 3.13
3

2 The [Load files] screen is displayed.


By pressing the 3
keys, move the cursor to the desired curve data file.
Press key to select the file.
3

3
Fig. 3.14
3
3 The name of the file selected and confirmed in
procedure 2 is displayed in a box.
Repeat procedure 2 if you wish to load multiple files. 3

3
NOTE
A maximum of 32 files can be processed in one
3
operation simultaneously.

3
Fig. 3.15

4 After selecting the file, press [Load] key.

1228 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-13


3.2 Load Files

3 5 The selected curve data files are loaded.

3 NOTE
The data processing can be applied only to the
3 latest-loaded file.

3 Fig. 3.16

3-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1229 OF 4699


3.3 3.3 Printout

The UV-1800 can provide the following printout forms. For the detailed printout methods and printout
3
formats (layout sample), refer to the chapter for each measurement mode.

„ Hard copy of screen 3


Press the key to print a hard copy of the screen.

„ Print using function keys


When a function key has a [PrntData] function, as in a mode such as Photometrics in which the
3
measurement results are recorded in table form, all of the tabular data will be printed out. (See
"4.3.2 Data Printout".)

„ Data Print for each Measurement


In modes (such as Photometric mode) in which the measurement results are obtained as numeric
values, if a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1800 (and communication is established),
3
the measurement results will be printed on the printer for every measurement.

„ Print waveform 3
The waveforms and parameters in a curve data file are printed.

„ Print waveform data 3


Execute [DataPrnt] on the Data Processing screen to print out all numeric value data within the
selected curve data file. (See "13.7 Print Processing".)
3

3.3.1 Available Printer


Besides the exclusive screen copy printer, the following commercially available printers which support 3
the following control codes are available for the UV-1800.
3
EPSON: ESC/P-9, ESC/P-24, and ESC/P Raster
HP: PCL 3

Data Print for Print 3


Hard copy of Print using Print
each waveform
screen function keys waveform
Measurement data
3
Printer for Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
screen copy
3
Commercially Yes Yes × No Yes Yes
available
printer 3

CAUTION
When using the ESC/P Raster printer, DO NOT unplug the USB cable before the printer head
returns to its home position. If you do, the printer will fall into an abnormal status in which no
printing commands are accepted.
To plug the USB printer cable to another port or computer after (or while) using with the UV-1800,
be sure to turn OFF the printer power beforehand.

1230 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-15


3.4 3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe)

Using a USB memory device, the measurement data (with the extensions of [*.spc], [*.pho], and [*.tmc])
3
obtained/saved in the UV-1800 can be read on the PC control/analysis software UVProbe (standard accessory).
(^ See Table 3.1)
3

NOTE
3 • The data files once saved on the UVProbe software cannot be read on the UV-1800.
• The UV-1800 data files can be read on the UVProbe software Ver. 2.30, or later versions.

The UVProbe software consists of 3 measurement modules: Spectrum, Photometric, and Kinetics.
Select a module on which to read the data according to the type of the measurement data (differentiated with
3 extensions).

Waveform data files with extension [*.spc] → Spectrum module


3 Data files with extension [*.pho] → Photometric module
Curve data files with extension [*.tmc] → Kinetics module

3 You can select the measurement module from the [Window] menu on the UVProbe.

3 Fig. 3.17

For the UVProbe overview and the basic operation including startup, refer to "Appendix A UVProbe Basic
Operation".

3-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1231 OF 4699


3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe)

3.4.1 Precautions When Reading Files 3


„ Preparation
It is required to install an instrument driver after installing the UVProbe software to the computer. Follow the
procedure described in "17.2.1 UVProbe Installation and Instrument Addition".
3

3
NOTE
The UV-1800 data files can be read on the UVProbe software Ver. 2.30, or later versions.

„ When loading PHO files (with extension [*.pho])


(1) Changed Sample No. 3
Since the UVProbe cannot use the same sample No. within the data, the numbers from 001 to 400 are
attached to the sample No. when loading data files.
3
Example) Sample No. (UV-1800) Sample ID (UVProbe)

1-3 → 003_0001_03 3
Ascending numbers assigned from the first row
3
Since the files of photometric (one- "Imported from UV-1800" is
wavelength) measurement are loaded as automatically entered in the
quantitation files using K-factor method, the comment column. (The 3
"K*Abs" values are displayed in "Conc." comment can be edited.)
column.

(UV-1800) (UVProbe)
3
(2) Difference of results in multi-wavelength calculation and quantitation
When loading PHO files, the UVProbe loads only measurement data within the files and performs data
calculation separately on the software. Errors may therefore occasionally be found in multi-wavelength
calculation results (2 wavelength difference/ratio, and 3 wavelength calculations) as well as in
quantitation results, due to differences in data accuracy and rounding methods.

1232 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-17


3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe)

(3) Loading Photometric 8λ data


3
When loading the data obtained in the photometric (multi-wavelength) measurement, the UVProbe loads
only the results of 2 wavelength difference/ratio, and 3 wavelength calculations.
3

3
(UV-1800) (UVProbe)

3 * If you need the results of the same calculation formulas as those used in the original file, create and
register appropriate formulas using the calculation function on the measurement method after the data file
is loaded.
3

3-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1233 OF 4699


3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe)

(4) Correlation coefficient of calibration curve


3
The value "correlation coefficient: r2" used in the UV-1800 applies to a linear, quadratic, and cubic
calibration curve. However, the value used in the UVProbe software only applies to a linear calibration
curve. The correlation coefficient value that applies to a quadratic and cubic calibration curve is called
3
the "Multiple Correlation Coefficient: r2" in the UVProbe software.

(UV-1800) (UVProbe) 3

(5) Abs. coefficient in the UV absorption method


The "Abs. coefficient" in the UV absorption method is set as the factor K1 (1/Abs. coefficient) for the K- 3
factor method.

(UV-1800) (UVProbe) 3

1234 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-19


3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe)

3 „ File Saving Format


When the UV-1800 data file is loaded and saved on the UVProbe software, it is converted to a file format
available only for the UVProbe software. The extensions of some types of files may be changed during the
3 saving process.

3
File Extension
Measurement Type File Type
Original File After Conversion
(UV-1800) with UVProbe

Photometric Table data file *.pho *.unk


3
Photometric 8λ Table data file *.pho *.unk

3 Spectrum Curve data file *.spc *.spc


*.pho (Single point
Quantitation Table data file *.pho
calibration curve method)
3 *.pho (Multi-point calibration
*.pho
curve method)
*.pho (K-factor method) *.unk
3
Kinetics Curve data file *.tmc *.kin

Kinetics Rate Curve data file *.tmc *.kin


3
Multi-component Curve data file *.spc *.spc

Lowry method Table data file *.pho *.pho


3
BCA method Table data file *.pho *.pho

3 CBB method Table data file *.pho *.pho

Biuret method Table data file *.pho *.pho

3 UV method Table data file *.pho *.unk

3-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1235 OF 4699


3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe)

3.4.2 Loading and Saving Procedure 3


The following are the procedures for loading and saving UV-1800 data files on the UVProbe software,
using a spectrum data file as an example:
3
„ Loading a data file

3
1 Click [Spectrum] from the [Window] menu.

2 Click [Open] from the [File] menu.

2 3

Fig. 3.18 3
3 The [Open Spectrum File] is displayed. Select (click)
the desired file, and click the [Open] button.
3

3 3
Fig. 3.19

4 The spectrum data file obtained in the UV-1800 is


automatically converted to the UVProbe format, and 3
the message that the file name is changed is
displayed. 3

Fig. 3.20 3
NOTE
During the automatic file conversion, a new file name (the original file name with the time of 3
loading the file) is assigned to the converted file.
Example) If the file "SPC-002.spc" is loaded at 17:31:44, the following file name is assigned:
New file name: SPC-002_173144.spc

5 Click [OK] to close the message. The spectrum data is loaded to the UVProbe software.

NOTE
When the converted file is loaded on the UVProbe software, it is not yet saved to the storage
disk. To save the converted file to the disk, execute the command [Save as] from the [File]
menu.

1236 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-21


3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe)

3 „ Saving the data file

3 1 Click [Save as] from the [File] menu.

3
1

Fig. 3.21
3
2 Click the [Select] button in the [Save Spectum File]
window.

3
2
3 Fig. 3.22

3 The [Data Set Selection] window lists the data files


currently loaded on the UVProbe software. Select
3
(click) the files to be saved, and click the [OK] button.

3
3

3
* mark
Indicates that the file has not been saved to the
3 storage disk. This is also indicated of those files
changed in the data processing, etc. after being
loaded, but not yet saved.

3
Fig. 3.23

3-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1237 OF 4699


3.4 Read Files (on UVProbe)

4 Verify that the selected file is displayed in the [Data


File] column in the [Save Spectrum File] window.
3

3
5 Enter the name of the file to be saved.

5
6 Click the [Save] button. 3

4 6 3
Fig. 3.24

3
NOTE
The data files automatically converted and saved on the UVProbe software cannot be read on 3
the UV-1800.

1238 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 3-23


4
4 Photometric (One-Wavelength)

Chapter 4 Photometric
(One-Wavelength) 4

4
The photometric measurement is used to measure absorbance (Abs) or transmittance (%T) at an arbitrary
(one-)wavelength. 4
To repeat the measurement, the measurement results may be displayed as a list. A single list allows including a
maximum of 400 measurement results, which may be stored as a single file in the memory of the main unit.
This is a simple quantitation method. A sample concentration C is expressed as C=K × Abs, and when the value 4
for K (K = Conc. of Std / absorbance of Std) is already known, you can enter the value for K and measure the
concentration of unknown samples.
4
CONTENTS

4.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 4-2 4


4.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Data Display ...................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4

1239 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-1


4.1 4.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

When you select [1. Photometric] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the
4
Method Selection screen (Fig. 4.1) will be displayed.

4
Fig. 4.1 Method Selection screen

4 When you select [1. Photometric] (press the key) in the Method Selection screen, the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for the one-wavelength measurement (Fig. 4.2) will be

4 displayed.

To set the measurement wavelength, use the key.


4

Set wavelength
4 Indicates the wavelength that is
currently set.
Photometric value
Indicates Abs or %T
4 measured at the
Calculated value currently set
Indicates the photometric wavelength.
value multiplied by a
4 specified K-factor. Indicates
also the concentration in 5
absorbance measurement.
6
^ "4.2.2 Quantitation
4 by K-factor Method"

1 2 3 4

Fig. 4.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

4-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1240 OF 4699


4.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

No. Key Operation Display Description 4


1 [%T/Abs] Toggles between %T (transmittance) and Abs
(absorbance).
4
2 [SmplCmpt] Used to set the sample module. The setting
items include the sample module type, the
4
number of cells, and the operating conditions
for the sipper.
^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control 4
(Multi-cell, Sipper Operation)"
3 [MeasScrn] Changes over to the Measurement screen. (Fig.
4.3)
4 [SavParam] Stores the current measurement conditions in 4
the built-in memory or USB memory device.
^ "3.1 Save Files"
4
5 – Specifies the factor to be multiplied to
photometric values.
4
6 – Starts the measurement under the set
parameters and displays the Measurement
screen (Fig. 4.3) 4
– – Specifies the wavelengths for measurement.
The setting range is from 190 nm to 1100 nm in 4
units of 0.1 nm.
– – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen. (Fig. 2.1) 4
If blank correction is required, set the blank sample prior to the measurement and then press the
key. The measured value will be set to 0 Abs (100 %). 4

1241 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-3


4.2 4.2 Measurement

4 4.2.1 Measurement Screen


In the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 4.2), press the [MeasScrn] key or
the key. The Measurement screen will appear.
4
(If the key is pressed, the first measurement run will be carried out with the Measurement
screen displayed.)
4
Set wavelength/
Photometric value
4 The current status is
displayed.

Sample No. Calculated value


The assignment rule for the (K x photometric value)
numbers varies according to For absorbance measurement,
the cell holder used. * the concentration can also be
4 displayed.
^ "4.2.2 Quantitation by
K-factor Method"
Cursor
4 Indicates the sample No. for
the next measurement.
Photometric value
The number of display digits
4 4 follows the setting.
^ "14.1.2 Decimal
Display"

4 5
1 2 3

* When using a single cell or when No. of drive cells is 1, the sample numbers are assigned in sequence, starting from 1. When using multiple
4 cells by attaching a multi-cell or micro multi-cell, a dash (-) and the cell number are attached to the sample number.

Single cells: [Sample No.]


Multiple cells: [Sample No.] - [Cell No.]
4

Fig. 4.3 Photometric Measurement screen


4
(for one-wavelength measurement)

4-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1242 OF 4699


4.2 Measurement

No. Key Operation Display Description 4


1 [Smpl No.] Used to change the sample number for the next
measurement. 4
The sample number can be selected from 0 to
9999.
4
2 [DataDisp] Displays a data table. ^ "4.3 Data Display"

3 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data 4


file to the built-in memory storage or USB
memory device.
^ "3.1 Save Files"

4 – Starts the measurement under the set


parameters and displays the Measurement
4
screen (Fig. 4.3).

NOTE 4
A maximum of 400 measurements can be
entered in a single table data file. 4
5 – Deletes all the data displayed on the screen.

– – Specifies the wavelengths used for the 4


measurement. The setting range is from
190 nm to 1100 nm in units of 0.1 nm. 4
– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 4.2).
4

1243 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-5


4.2 Measurement

4 4.2.2 Quantitation by K-factor Method


This is a simple quantitation method (K-factor method) used when the absorbance and concentration
are directly proportional (Concentration = K × Absorbance), and a conversion factor K is given.
4
The following is a measurement procedure.

4
1 Press [1. Fac. K] key in the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 4.2).
4

2 The input column for [1. Fac. K] is highlighted (Fig.


4.4). Enter a factor with numeric keys.

4
NOTE
You cannot recalculate measured results by
4 changing the K-factor after the measurement is
completed.
4
Fig. 4.4 Factor Input screen
4
3 Press the key to confirm the input value and
move back to the Measurement Parameter
4 Confirmation screen (Fig. 4.2).
The factor entered in procedure 2 is displayed in the
[1. Fac. K] column.
4

4 4 Press the key while nothing or a blank


sample is placed in the sample compartment.

4
5 Place the unknown sample in the sample
compartment, and press the key to execute

4 the measurement.

Fig. 4.5 Measurement screen

6 The Measurement screen appears (Fig. 4.5), and


absorbance values (Abs) and quantitation results
(K*Abs) are displayed.

4-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1244 OF 4699


4.2 Measurement

4.2.3 Data Print for Each Measurement 4


If a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed
on the printer for every measurement.
4
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
parameters are printed.
4

Data and time when the first


measurement was 4
completed
Header Part

First measurement
4

Fig. 4.6 Sample printout 4

1245 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-7


4.3 4.3 Data Display

4 4.3.1 Data Display Screen


As the measurement is repeated on the Measurement screen, the data will be scrolled with only the
latest seven measurement results displayed on the screen. The Data Display screen is used to list the
4
measurement results including those which have disappeared from the screen. It also allows for the
printing out of the data table or loading data.
4

4
Data display list
Displays measurement
results or all data contained
in a table data file. (The data
are displayed from Sample
No. 1.)
4

4
3 Page number
Indicates "current page/
4 total pages" of the file list.

1 2
4
Fig. 4.7 Data Display screen

4
No. Key Operation Display Description
4 1 [PrntData] Prints all data displayed in the list.
^ "4.3.2 Data Printout"
4 2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "3.2.1 Load Single File"
4 3 – Allows scrolling the data table to review the hidden
measurement data.

4 Each pressing of the key scrolls the table by 8 data


lines.

– – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 4.3).


4

4-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1246 OF 4699


4.3 Data Display

4.3.2 Data Printout 4


The entire data can be printed out as a numeric data table on the printer (optional).
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
4
parameters are printed.

4
NOTE
Pressing the key on the keyboard in the Measurement screen (Fig. 4.3) or Data 4
Display screen (Fig. 4.7) will produce a hard copy of the displayed screen.

Data and time when the


first measurement was
4
completed
Header Part
4

First measurement 4

Fig. 4.8 Sample printout 4

1247 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 4-9


5
5 Photometric 8 λ
(Multi-Wavelength)
5

Chapter 5 Photometric 8λ 5

(Multi-Wavelength)
5

CONTENTS
5
5.1 Photometric 8λ................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 5-3 5
5.3 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.4 Data Display .................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5

1248 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-1


5.1 5.1 Photometric 8λ

The [Photometric 8λ] (multi-wavelength measurement) allows you to specify a maximum of 8 arbitrary
5
wavelengths and then measure the absorbance or transmittance at those wavelengths. It is also
possible to select one of the following 5 equations based on the data obtained at up to 4 wavelengths
5
and then output the calculation results.

5 • Two-wavelength calculation
The ratio and difference between the photometric values at two wavelengths are calculated. This
process is applicable for eliminating the effect of any interfering component (difference), scattering
5 due to turbidity, and floating of the baseline due to the production of small bubbles, and also for
evaluating the purity (ratio) (^ "7.5.1 Two-wavelength Quantitation").

5 • Three-wavelength calculation
This process is performed as follows (^ "7.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation"):
A2 – Ad (where Ad = (λ1 – λ2) × A3 + (λ2 – λ3) × A1)/(λ1 – λ3)
where λ1~λ3 are measurement wavelengths (arbitrary numbers are to be entered) and A1~A3
are absorbance (or transmittance) values at the measurement wavelengths.
5 The three-wavelength calculation is also applicable for eliminating the effect of any interfering
component, and floating of the baseline that has slanted due to turbidity or any other reason.

5 • Equation calculation with four-wavelength data


This process is performed as follows:
((K1 × A1 + K2 × A2 + K3 × A3 + K4 × A4) × K5); or
5 (K5 × (K1 × A1 + K2 × A2)/(K3 × A3 + K4 × A4))
where K1~K5 are coefficients (arbitrary numbers are to be entered) and A1~A4 are absorbance
(or transmittance) values at measurement wavelengths λ1~ λ4.
5
For the calculation of this equation, the measurement wavelengths and coefficients are specified
freely. In addition, A1~A4 can be measured while selecting different samples. This provides high
5 versatility.

5
NOTE
The measurement data at each wavelength is rounded to four decimal places.
5

5-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1249 OF 4699


5.2 5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

When you select [1. Photometric] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the
5
Method Selection screen (Fig. 5.1) will be displayed.

5
Fig. 5.1 Method Selection screen

When you select [2. Photometric 8λ] (press the key) in the Method Selection screen, the 5
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for photometric 8λ (multi-wavelength measurement)
(Fig. 5.2) will be displayed. 5

Set wavelength/ 5
Photometric value
1 Indicates Abs or %T measured
2 at the currently set
wavelength. 5

5
3

5
4
9
5

5 6 7 8
5
Fig. 5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

1250 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-3


5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

5 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Meas. mode] Selects the photometric mode.


5 Pressing the key toggles the mode between
Abs (absorbance) and %T (transmittance).

5 2 [No. of λ] Specifies the number of wavelengths and each


wavelength values.
The specifiable number of wavelengths for one
5
measurement is from 1 to 8, with an input range
is of 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm. (The same
5 wavelength values are not acceptable.)
The measurement will be carried out in the
order of λ1, λ2,…λn.
When all the data have been entered, the UV-
1800 automatically goes to λ1.
5
3 [Equation] Selects an equation used for the arithmetic
operation.
5
^ "5.2.1 Equation"

4 [Change sample Specify whether or not to change the sample


5
each λ] whenever the measurement is performed at
each wavelength.
5 ^ "5.2.2 Changing Sample"

5 [BaseCorr] Allows setting the blank sample prior to the


5 measurement of an unknown sample and then
correcting the baseline under the specified

5 conditions.

6 [SmplCmpt] Used to set the sample module. The setting


items include the sample module type and the
5
operating conditions of the sipper.
^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control
5 (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation)"

7 [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen.


5
8 [SavParam] Used to save the current measurement
conditions to the memory.
^ "3.1 Save Files"

9 – Starts the measurement under the set


parameters and displays the Measurement
screen (Fig. 5.7)

– – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1).

5-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1251 OF 4699


5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

5.2.1 Equation 5
When you select [Equation] from the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the Equation
Selection screen appears (Fig. 5.3). If you select the desired equation from the list, the measured data
5
will be operated upon with the selected equation after the measurement, and the calculation result will
be displayed with photometric values. Select [None] if no arithmetic operation is required.
5

Cursor
5

(Photometric mode: Transmittance) (Photometric mode: Absorbance)

Fig. 5.3 Equation Selection Screen 5

5
Key Operation Description

Moves the cursor position. 5


Confirms the equation or process at the cursor position.

Returns to the Parameter Configuration screen. 5

* When "dA(A1~A3) (dA(T1~T3))" is selected, the following calculation is performed.


5
(λ1–λ2)×A3 + (λ2–λ3)×A1
Absorbance: A2–
λ1–λ3
5
(λ1–λ2)×T3 + (λ2–λ3)×T1
Transmittance: T2–
λ1–λ3
5

1252 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-5


5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

* The symbols in the equations stand for the following:


5
An (n=1~4): Absorbance at measurement wavelength λn (n=1 to 4)
Tn (n=1~4): Transmittance at measurement wavelength λn (n=1 to 4)
5
Kn (n=1~4): Factor that is specifiable between -9999.9 and 9999.9. The Factor Input screen
(Fig. 5.4) is displayed when an equation has been selected. After entering a factor
5 with numeric keys and confirming with the key, the screen will prompt you
for the next factor entry.
5

Fig. 5.4 Factor Input Screen


5

5
NOTE
If the number of measurement wavelengths does not meet the number of wavelengths in the
5 equation for the multi-wavelength measurement, the measurement cannot be carried out.

5-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1253 OF 4699


5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

5.2.2 Changing Sample 5


You can specify whether or not to change sample for each wavelength by selecting the [Change
sample each λ] on the Parameter Configuration screen.
5
The available options are described below:
[OFF]
The sample is not changed at each wavelength. The same sample is measured at all the 5
wavelengths specified in "Number of measurement wavelengths". If the sample module
selected in "Sample control" is Multi-cell, the sample in each cell is measured at all the
5
wavelengths by automatically changing the sample to the specified number of cells.
Shown below as an example is the measurement flow chart of the case in which "6-cell" is
selected, the number of measurement wavelengths is set to 3, and the number of cells used 5
is set to 3:

Cell No. 1 Cell No. 2 Cell No. 3

The cell moves The cell moves


5

Fig. 5.5 Measuring operation 5

[Single cell]
This mode is used to change the sample at each measurement wavelength. Change the 5
sample after the measurement at one wavelength, press the key according to the
message displayed on the screen, and then proceed to the next measurement.
5

NOTE 5
The key cannot be used to abort the measurement; instead the key
must be used for this purpose.
5

1254 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-7


5.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

[Multi-cell]
5
After the measurement at one wavelength, the multi-cell holder is automatically moved to
change the sample. The maximum number of selectable cells is eight. The number of cells
5 used is automatically set to the number of measurement wavelengths. The sample module
must be set to Multi-cell. This mode is not available for the sipper unit.
Shown below as an example is the measurement flow chart of the case in which 6-cell is
5 selected and the number of measurement wavelengths is set to 3:

Cell No. 1 Cell No. 2 Cell No. 3


5

The cell moves The cell moves

Fig. 5.6 Measuring operation


5

5
NOTE
1. If [Multi-cell] is selected, the sipper unit cannot be used.
5 2. To abort the measurement, press the key. In this case, the measurement will be
resumed starting at measurement wavelength λ1 when the key is pressed again.

5-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1255 OF 4699


5.3 5.3 Measurement

5.3.1 Measurement Screen 5


Pressing the [MeasScrn] key or the key in the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 5.2), the Measurement screen appears as shown in Fig. 5.7. (When the
5
key is pressed the first measurement will be performed.) If the specified number of
wavelengths does not meet the required number for the calculation, the measurement cannot be
5
carried out.
To abort the measurement, press the key. The aborting operation occurs after the
wavelength has been changed. In this case, the result is not displayed and no data is printed out. 5

Sample No. 5
Indicates the current Set wavelength/Photometric
sample number.* value
The current status is displayed.

Measured value
Indicates the measured 5
value at each measurement
wavelength.
Equation/Result
Indicates the selected equation and 5
the calculation result.

4 5 5

1 2 3 5

* When using a single cell or when No. of drive cells is 1, the sample numbers are assigned in sequence, starting from 1. When using multiple
cells by attaching a multi-cell or micro multi-cell, a dash (-) and the cell number are attached to the sample number. 5
Single cells: [Sample No.]
Multiple cells: [Sample No.] - [Cell No.]
5

Fig. 5.7 Photometric Multi-wavelength Measurement Screen


5

1256 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-9


5.3 Measurement

5 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Smpl No.] Used to change the sample number for the next
5 measurement.
The sample number can be selected from 0 to
9999.
5
2 [DataDisp] Function for displaying a data table.
^ "5.4 Data Display"
5
3 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data
file to the built-in memory storage or USB
5
memory device.
^ "3.1 Save Files"

4 – Starts the measurement under the set


parameters and displays the Measurement
5 screen (Fig. 5.7).

NOTE
5 A maximum of 200 measurements can be
performed as a single table data file.

5 5 – Deletes all measured data or data in the loaded


data file.

5 – – Returns to the Measurement Parameter


Configuration screen (Fig. 5.2).

5-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1257 OF 4699


5.3 Measurement

5.3.2 Data Print for Each Measurement 5


If a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed
on the printer for every measurement.
5
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
parameters are printed.
5

Date and time when


the first measurement 5
was completed
Header part
5

First measurement
5

5
Fig. 5.8 Example of data printout for each measurement
5

NOTE 5
A hard copy printer can print data and calculation results for up to only seven lines. Therefore,
measured data and calculation results are printed in one line for each measurement 5
wavelength in the following measurement conditions:

1258 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-11


5.4 5.4 Data Display

5 5.4.1 Data Display Screen


This screen allows you to review all measured data or data contained in a loaded file.
It is also possible to print all data on the screen, or load another data file from the memory storage.
5

5 Data Display
Displays the
measurement data and
the calculation result
5 for each sample.

3 Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
5 pages" of the file list.

1 2
5
Fig. 5.9 Data Display screen

5
No. Key Operation Display Description
5 1 [PrntData] Prints all data displayed in the list.
^ "5.4.2 Data Printout"
5 2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "3.2.1 Load Single File"
5 3 – Switches the data list displayed on the screen.
Each pressing of the key switches to the previous or

5 next sample data.

– – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 5.7).

5-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1259 OF 4699


5.4 Data Display

5.4.2 Data Printout 5


The entire data can be printed out as a numeric data table on the printer (optional). In the header part,
the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement parameters are
5
printed.

5
NOTE
Pressing the key on the keypad will produce only a hard copy of the screen. 5

The printout form varies according to the connected printer for output. 5

„ Output to a hard-copy printer


The data is printed in the same form as when printing for each measurement.
(See Fig. 5.8 for a printout example.)
5

„ Output to a commercially available printer


The measurement data and the calculation result are printed in a row for each sample. 5

Date and time when 5


the first measurement
was completed
Header
part 5

First measurement 5

5
Fig. 5.10 Example of Data Printout

1260 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 5-13


6
6 Spectrum

Chapter 6 Spectrum 6

6
The spectrum mode is used to measure spectra. Measure the absorbance and transmittance spectra of the
sample by performing the wavelength scan. This mode also allows you to measure the energy of a light source 6
using its single beam.
The measured spectra may be stored as a single file in the memory of the main unit. Data processing such as
peak detection, smoothing, and mathematical calculation may also be applied to those spectra. 6
CONTENTS
6
6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3 Displaying Spectrum........................................................................................................................ 6-10 6
6.4 Print Out .......................................................................................................................................... 6-15

1261 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-1


6.1 6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

When you select [2.Spectrum] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the
6
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 6.1) will be displayed.
The measurement parameter configuration screens differ slightly for the Abs (absorbance) and %T
6
(transmittance) measurement modes, and for the E (energy) measurement mode (Fig. 6.1).

6 Wavelength/
Photometric value
1 Indicates Abs or %T measured at
the currently set wavelength.
6 2
3
4
6 5
6 Cycle
Displayed when the number of
7
6 scans is two or more.
8

6 0 a b c

(Abs and %T modes)


6

6 9

6 (E mode)
Fig. 6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

6-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1262 OF 4699


6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
6
Operation

1 [Meas. Mode] Selects the measurement mode.


6
You can select one of the following measurement
modes: %T (transmittance), Abs (absorbance), or E
6
(energy). Upon selection, the [Rec. range] value is also
changed to the corresponding range.

2 [Scan range] Sets the range of the wavelength scans. Enter the 6
scan starting and ending wavelength, in that order.
„Range 6
Wavelength range 190 nm to 1100 nm

The starting wavelength must be longer than the 6


ending wavelength. The minimum scan range is
determined by the scan pitch setting.

(Scan start wavelength) ≥ (Scan end wavelength) +


(Scan pitch)
6

NOTE 6
If the measurement points led by the calculation
with the specified scan range and scan pitch exceed 6
2001, the scan pitch is changed to the minimum
value that creates less than 2001 points, after the
6
execution confirmation message is displayed.
3 [Rec. range] The recording range is used to input the upper limit/
6
lower limit of Y-axis when displaying the Reaction
Curve on the screen.
„Input range 6
Abs -4.000 to 4.000
%T and E -400.0 to 400.0 6
4 [Scan speed] To specify a wavelength scanning rate, select one from
6
the four options, i.e. Fast, Medium, Slow, and Very
slow.
„Accumulation time
Fast 0.05 sec
Medium 0.2 sec
Slow 0.5 sec
Very slow 2.0 sec

1263 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-3


6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

6 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

5 [Scan pitch] Selects the pitch (interval) at which to obtain data


6
during wavelength scan.
„Selection item
6 AUTO The scan pitch is automatically
set according to the scan range.

6 0.05 Measured every 0.05 nm.


0.1 Measured every 0.1 nm.
0.2 Measured every 0.2 nm.
6 0.5 Measured every 0.5 nm.
1.0 Measured every 1.0 nm.
6 2.0 Measured every 2.0 nm.

If [AUTO] is selected, the scan pitch is determined by


the selected scan range so that the number of
measurement points becomes maximum and still does
not exceed 2001 (the minimum value out of 0.05/0.1/
6
0.2/0.5/1.0/2.0 that meets [Wavelength range/Scan
pitch < 2001])
6

6-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1264 OF 4699


6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
6
Operation

6 [No. of scans] Set the number of times a scan will be repeated.


6
To save all curve data obtained in a repeated
measurement, connect a USB memory device and use
6
the auto-file function (^ "6.2.2 Auto-file Function").

NOTE
When a repeated measurement is performed 6
without connecting the USB memory device, only
the latest acquired data can be saved or printed 6
after the measurement.
„Range
6
Range of repetition times 1 to 99 times

• If this is set to 2 or more times, the interval setting will


be displayed with the scanning repetitions on the
same display line. (See Fig. 6.1.)
• If this is set to 2 or more times, a multi cell 6
measurement using multi-cell holder cannot be
performed. 6
• When you press key once, measurement
will be repeated only the set number of times.
6
„Scanning interval
This is a time period from a scan start to the next scan
start.
6
• The scanning interval includes the time required for
scanning. If the scanning interval is set to a value 6
longer than the time required for scanning, the UV-
1800 will wait for the time equivalent to the difference 6
between the two and then start scanning. During this
waiting period, the next scanning count and the
6
remaining waiting time are displayed.
• If the time required for scanning is actually longer
6
than the scanning interval, the scan will be
continuously carried out without any waiting time. In
this case, the set value for the scanning interval will
be changed to the actually required time.

1265 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-5


6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

6 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

7 [Display mode] Selects how to display the spectra.


6
Each time this key is pressed, the parameter toggles
between Sequential and Overlay.
6
„Display method
Sequential The screen is renewed for each scan
6 and only the spectrum from that
measurement is displayed.
Overlay The screen is not updated with each
6 scanning result. The spectrum display
for each scan is left as it is so that
6 multiple spectra are overlaid in the
display.

8 [Auto-Print] Switches ON/OFF of the auto-print function.


Each pressing of this key toggles between ON and

6 OFF.
„Description
ON A screen hard copy and measurement
6 parameters are automatically printed
after the measurement.
For details on the printout form, refer to
6 "6.4.2 Waveform Format", Fig. 6.9
Example of waveform printout (with
hard copy printer).
6
OFF The automatic printout is not performed.

• For multi-cell measurements and repeated


6 measurements without using the auto-file function,
only the latest-acquired data can be saved or printed
after the measurement. Therefore, if you wish to
6
obtain the printouts of these measurement results,
connect the printer (Communication: ON) and set the
6 auto-print function to [ON] beforehand.

6-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1266 OF 4699


6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
6
Operation

9 [Light source] Selects the light source for the measurement. (E


6
(energy) mode only)
Select a light source for the energy measurement. The
6
selected light source will be used regardless of the
parameter setting for the light source.
„Light source types 6
WI lamp Selects the tungsten iodine lamp
(halogen lamp).
6
D2 lamp Selects the deuterium lamp.
OFF Turns OFF both the WI and D2 lamps.
The light source mirror turns to the third 6
light source.

* This function is used to introduce the external light


source into the spectrometer when measuring the
energy change of light sources other than those 6
equipped with the standard UV-1800.

0 [BaseCorr] Allows you to set a blank sample prior to the 6


measurement of an unknown sample and correct the
baseline.
6
a [SmplCmpt] Set the sample module. The setting items include the
sample module type and the operating conditions of
6
the sipper.
^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control (Multi-cell,
Sipper Operation)" 6
b [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen.

c [SavParam] Saves current measurement parameters to the built-in 6


memory or USB memory device.
^ "3.1 Save Files" 6
d – Starts the measurement under the set parameters and
displays the Measurement screen (Fig. 6.3).
6

– – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1).

1267 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-7


6.2 6.2 Measurement

6 6.2.1 Measurement Screen


When you press the key in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 6.1) or
Curve Display screen (Fig. 6.3), measurement starts and a spectral waveform is plotted in real time
6
(Fig. 6.2).
After the measurement has been finished (stopped), the Curve Display screen will be displayed as
6
shown in Fig. 6.3.

6
Wavelength/Photometric value
The current status is displayed.

6
1

6
Fig. 6.2 Screen during measurement

6
Key
No. Display Description
6 Operation

1 – Terminates the current measurement and moves to the

6 Curve Display screen (Fig. 6.3).

6
NOTE
6 When [7. Display mode] is set to "Overlay" in the Measurement Parameter Configuration
screen (Fig. 6.1), all spectra are overlaid on the screen graph. However, only the spectrum
6 data obtained in the latest measurement can be saved, processed, and printed.

6-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1268 OF 4699


6.2 Measurement

6.2.2 Auto-file Function 6


When using a USB memory device, you can save all curve data acquired in a repeated measurement.

6
* The repeated measurement refers to a measurement of which the "No. of scans" parameter is set to
more than [2] in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen.
6

1 If you set a parameter for repeated measurements


and press the key, the confirmation screen 6
appears asking you whether or not to execute the
auto-file function.
6

2 Use
the key.
keys to select [Yes] and press
6

3 The screen for saving multiple files appears. Enter


the file name and press the [Register] key.
6

(^ "3.1.2 Save Multiple Files")


6

6
4 A repeated measurement is started.
Upon completion of the measurement, the multiple
6
spectrum data obtained are saved to the USB
memory. The file name specified in procedure 3 is
assigned to those data with sequential numbers from 6
"01" attached.
6

1269 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-9


6.3 6.3 Displaying Spectrum

6 6.3.1 Curve Display Screen


When you complete/terminate measurement, or press the [MeasScrn] key in the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the Curve Display screen (Fig. 6.3) appears.
6
In this screen, you can display, save, and print the waveform within measured or loaded spectrum
data.
6

Wavelength/
6 Photometric value
The current status is displayed.

1 2 3 4
6
Fig. 6.3 Curve Display Screen
6

6 NOTE
Acquired curve data is not yet saved when the measurement has completed. The curve data
will be lost if (1) the next sample measurement is started, (2) another curve data file is loaded,
6
or (3) the measurement parameters are changed.
To save the acquired spectrum data, press the key.
6

6
No. Key Operation Display Description

6 1 [Zoom] Changes the vertical or horizontal axis range.


^ "6.3.3 Zoom Screen"

2 [DataProc] Performs the following data processings on


displayed spectra.
• Mathematical calculation, derivative processing,
peak detection, Area calculation, point pick and
printout.
^ Chapter 13 "Data Processing"

3 [LoadCurv] Loads the spectrum data files that are stored in the
memory storage.
^ "3.2.2 Load Multiple Files"

6-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1270 OF 4699


6.3 Displaying Spectrum

No. Key Operation Display Description 6


4 [SavCurve] Saves the acquired spectrum data to the built-in
memory storage or USB memory device. 6
^ "3.1 Save Files"

5 – The measurement is started under the set 6


parameters and the spectrum is displayed.
If pressed during measurement, the measurement is
6
terminated.

6 – Prints a hard copy of the screen or the spectrum


6
data.
^ "6.4 Print Out"

7 – Returns to the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig.


6
6.1).

8 – Displays the reading cursor on the graph to read the


wavelength and data values at any arbitrary cursor
position. 6
^ "6.3.2 Reading with Cursor"

1271 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-11


6.3 Displaying Spectrum

6 6.3.2 Reading with Cursor


If the or key is pressed in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 6.3), the reading cursor
appears.
6
Using this reading cursor, you can read the wavelength and data values at any arbitrary cursor
position.
6
Furthermore, for listing or printing the data values at multiple wavelengths, refer to the description on
the point pick function (^ "13.6 Point Pick"). For printing all data as numeric values, refer to the
6 description on the print processing function (^ "13.7 Print Processing").

6
Reading cursor

Wavelength/
6 Measured value
Indicates the wavelength and
measured value at the cursor
position.
6
Fig. 6.4 Reading with Cursor screen
6

Key Operation Description


6
Moves the cursor on the graph and displays the wavelength and
photometric values at the current cursor position.
6
Holding down the key will move the cursor faster.

6 Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed.

Any keys other than The reading cursor disappears, and you will return to the Curve Display
above screen (Fig. 6.3).

NOTE
When multiple spectra are overlaid on the graph, the cursor reads the wavelength and
photometric values of the latest measured or loaded spectrum data.

6-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1272 OF 4699


6.3 Displaying Spectrum

6.3.3 Zoom Screen 6

When you press the [Zoom] key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 6.3), the Zoom screen
(Fig. 6.5) will be displayed. 6
The displayed spectrum can be enlarged or reduced by changing the vertical or horizontal axis of the
spectrum (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis). 6

6
NOTE
1. If the curve data is overwritten on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
reduction is applied to the last loaded data. 6
2. If the measurement result is overwritten, the enlargement or reduction is applied to the last
measurement data.
6

6
1 2 3

Fig. 6.5 Zoom screen


6

1273 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-13


6.3 Displaying Spectrum

6 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [InputNum] Enlarges or reduces the graph by directly specifying


6 the vertical or horizontal axis range.
Specify the range value at the cursor position with
numeric keys, and confirm it with the key.
6
Each pressing of key moves the cursor to
[vertical axis upper limit] → [vertical axis lower limit]
6 → [horizontal axis lower limit] → [horizontal axis
upper limit], and finally returns to the Zoom screen
6 (Fig. 6.6).

Cursor
6
Input range/
Input value
Displays
available input
range and key
input value.
6

6
Fig. 6.6 Zoom screen

6 NOTE
Data exist only at each scan pitch. Therefore,
when values other than the integral multiple of the
6
scan pitch are entered as horizontal axis values,
the entered values are automatically replaced
6 with the wavelength values nearest to the existing
data values.
6 2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the
displayed spectrum automatically.
6 3 [Restore] Restores the display range to the original state.

– – Prints the curve data with the zoom operation


6
applied.
^ "6.4 Print Out"

– – Displays the cursor on the spectrum graph to


activate the cursor reading function.
^ "6.3.2 Reading with Cursor"

– – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 6.3).

6-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1274 OF 4699


6.4 6.4 Print Out

The graph of the spectrum data can be printed out in "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" or "Hard copy of
6
screen ([Screen copy])". For printing all data as numeric values, refer to the description on the print
processing function (^ "13.7 Print Processing").
6

6.4.1 Print Mode


6
If you press the key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 6.3), the screen will appear for
selecting a print mode from above.
Move the cursor to the desired mode with the keys, and confirm the selection with
6
the key.
6

Cursor

Fig. 6.7 Print form selection screen


6

1275 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-15


6.4 Print Out

6 „ Print waveform ([Draw curve])


The graph and measurement parameters of a spectrum data are printed out. If a commercially
available printer is selected, the screen for selecting a grid type for the graph output is displayed.
6 Move the cursor to the desired grid type with the keys, and confirm the selection
with the key.
6

6
Cursor

Fig. 6.8 Grid Type Selection screen


6
When the grid type is confirmed, the spectrum and parameters in measured or loaded curve data are
printed out. The print form varies according to the connected printer for output. ^ "6.4.2 Waveform
6
Format"

6
NOTE
Even though multiple spectra are overlaid on the screen, only the latest measured or loaded
6 curve data can be printed out.

6 „ Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy])


The current screen (spectrum display screen) image when the key is pressed will be printed
in the same size.
6

6-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1276 OF 4699


6.4 Print Out

6.4.2 Waveform Format 6


First, the print format for the "Print waveform" varies according to the connected printer for output.
The following shows examples of printouts using different types of printers.
6

„ Output to a hard-copy printer


6

The screen hard copy 6


excluding the title row and
function row

Fig. 6.9 Example of waveform printout (with hard copy printer)


6

1277 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 6-17


6.4 Print Out

6 „ Output to a commercially available printer

6
Measurement end date
6
Measurement parameters

6
Fig. 6.10 Example of waveform printout (with commercially available printer)
6

6-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1278 OF 4699


7
7 Quantitation

Chapter 7 Quantitation 7

The quantitation mode is used to quantify an unknown sample by creating a calibration curve from the standard
sample. The following four types of measurement methods are available according to the number of 7
wavelengths used:
• One-wavelength method: The sample is quantified using its absorbance at a single wavelength. The
operation procedures in this chapter mainly describe this method.
• Two-wavelength method: The absorbance at a wavelength other than the quantitation wavelength is used to
7
eliminate the interfering components and contaminants (^ "7.5.1 Two-wavelength Quantitation").
• Three-wavelength method: The absorbance of two wavelengths is used to eliminate the interfering
components (^ "7.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation"). 7
• Derivative quantitation: The derivative value (1st through 4th orders) for the spectrum at the quantitation
wavelength is used (^ "7.6 Derivative Quantitation Method").
The calibration curve is created using one of the following three methods: 7
• K factor method: In the equation, "concentration = K x absorbance + B", K and B are predetermined.
• Single-point calibration curve method: One standard sample is measured to create the calibration curve.
• Multi-point calibration curve method: Multiple standard samples (10 maximum) are measured to create the 7
calibration curve.
If the measurement is repeated, the measurement results may be displayed as a list. A single list can include a
maximum of 200 measurement results. This data may be stored as a single file in the memory of the main unit. 7
CONTENTS

7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 7-2


7
7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve ........................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation) .................................................................................... 7-16 7
7.4 List Display ...................................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.5 Two/Three-wavelength Quantitation Method................................................................................... 7-20
7.6 Derivative Quantitation Method ....................................................................................................... 7-22

1279 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-1


7.1 7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

When you select [3. Quantitation] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the
7
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen in Fig. 7.1 will be displayed.

7
Set wavelength/Measured
value
1 Indicates Abs or %T measured
7 at the currently set
wavelength.
2

3
7 4
5

7
0

7
6 7 8 9

Fig. 7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

7
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Meas.] Selects the measurement method used for


7 quantitation.
^ "7.1.1 Select Measurement Method"
7 2 [Method] Selects the calibration method used for
quantitation.
7 ^ "7.1.2 Select Calibration Method"

7-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1280 OF 4699


7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

No. Key Operation Display Description 7


3 [No. of Meas.] Specifies how many times the same sample is
to be measured. 7
Input range of repetition count: 1 to 10 times
„When the repetition count is set to more than 1
7
• Standard sample: The measurement is
repeatedly performed and the mean value for
absorbance is used. 7
^ "7.2.2 Entering Absorbance"
• Unknown sample: The measurement is
repeatedly performed and both the measured
7
values and mean value are displayed.
^ "7.3.1 Measurement Screen" 7
To abort the repeating measurement, press the
key. In this case, the mean value will
7
not be calculated.

NOTE
The repeating measurement while using a
multi-cell or similar holder (optional) with the
multiple cells cannot be carried out. 7
4 [Unit] Specifies the concentration unit for the
Quantitation result by selecting one of the 7
following units:
None, %, ppm, ppb, g/l, mg/ml, ng/ml, M/L and
7
µg/ml.
You can also register the desired unit other than
those listed above.
7
^ "7.1.3 Select Concentration Unit"

5 [Baseline The baseline is corrected in the wavelength 7


correction] range specified in the measurement
wavelengths. To perform the quantitation by the 7
two-wavelength, three-wavelength, or derivative
quantitation method, set the blank sample on
7
the cell prior to the measurement, and then
correct the baseline. 7
To abort the correction, press the key.

6 [ClbCurve] Switches to the Calibration Curve screen.


^ "7.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve"
If a calibration has not been created, switches
to the screen for creating the calibration curve
(Concentration Table screen).
^ "7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve"

1281 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-3


7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

7 No. Key Operation Display Description

7 [SmplCmpt] Sets the parameters for the sample module.


7 The setting items include the sample module
type, the number of cells, and the operating
conditions of the sipper.
7
^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control
(Multi-cell, Sipper Operation)"
7
8 [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen.

9 [SavParam] Save measurement parameters, including the


7
calibration curve equation, to the built-in
memory storage or USB memory device.
7 ^ "3.1 Save Files"

0 – If a calibration curve used for quantitation exists


7 or if K-factor method is to be applied, the
measurement is started under the set
parameters and the Measurement screen is
displayed.
^ "7.3 Measuring Unknown Sample
7
(Quantitation)"
If a calibration has not been created, switches
7 to the screen for creating the calibration curve
(Concentration Table screen).

7 ^ "7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve"

– – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1).

7 If it is required to perform a blank correction, place a blank sample and press the key before
measurement.
7 The obtained photometric value will be set to 0 Abs (100 %).

7
NOTE
Changing any parameter (including unit) in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen after
7 creating a calibration curve will result in the deletion of the calibration curve data.

7-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1282 OF 4699


7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

7.1.1 Select Measurement Method 7


When [Meas.] is selected in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the Measurement
Method screen (Fig. 7.2) is displayed.
7
Select the measurement method from the following four types and then enter the measurement
wavelength as instruction on the screen.
7
Move the cursor to the desired measurement method with the keys, and confirm it
with the key.
7

Cursor
7

7
Fig. 7.2 Measurement Method screen
7
[1λ] (One-wavelength method)
Enter measurement wavelength λ1.
[2λ] (Two-wavelength method)
Enter measurement wavelengths λ1 and λ2. λ1 is the quantitation wavelength and λ2 the
wavelength at which to eliminate the interfering components. (^ "7.5.1 Two-wavelength
7
Quantitation")
[3λ] (Three-wavelength method)
Enter measurement wavelengths λ1, λ2 and λ3. λ1 is the quantitation wavelength, and λ2 and λ3 7
the wavelengths at which to eliminate the interfering components. The entered wavelength
values are automatically arranged as λ1, λ2, and λ3 in this order starting with the longer
wavelength side. (^ "7.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation") 7
[Derivative] (Derivative quantitation method)
Enter the measurement wavelength λ1 and the order of the derivatives. 7
(^ "7.6 Derivative Quantitation Method")

1283 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-5


7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

7 7.1.2 Select Calibration Method


When [Method] is selected in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the Calibration
Method screen (Fig. 7.3) is displayed.
7 Select one of the three quantitation methods, namely [K-facter (C=K*Abs + B)], [1 point calib.],
and [Multi-point calib.], and then set the parameters according to the instructions given on the
screen.
7
Move the cursor to the desired calibration method with the keys, and confirm
it with the key.
7
When the single-point calibration curve or the multi-point calibration curve is selected, measure
the standard sample for creating the calibration curve before measuring an unknown sample.
7

Cursor
7

7
Fig. 7.3 Calibration Method screen

• [K Factor]
The relationship between the concentration C and absorbance Abs of a sample is expressed
as C=K × Abs + B, and when the values for the constants K and B are already known, you can
7 manually enter the values for K and B to create the calibration curve.
If K-factor method is selected in the Calibration Method screen, the screen for specifying a
factor is displayed. Input the factor with numeric keys, and press the key. The factor
7 at the cursor position is confirmed. After the confirmation of K value, the cursor moves to the B
value column. After the B value has been confirmed by the same procedure, the UV-1800
returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 7.1).
7
Input range for K and B: –9999.9 to 9999.9
The number of significant figures is 5 (0.0001 is acceptable).
7

Fig. 7.4 Setup screen for calibration curve (K factor method)

7-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1284 OF 4699


7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

• [1 point] (Single point calibration curve method)


7
This will measure the concentration of an unknown sample by finding the value for K in the
calibration curve equation C=K × Abs from a single standard sample of known concentration.
The calibration curve will be a straight line defined by the origin and the absorbance and 7
concentration of the standard sample. The created calibration curve can be reviewed by
pressing the key on the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 7.1).
7
• [Multi-point] (Multi-point calibration curve method)
Set the parameters for creating the calibration curve from multiple standard samples of known
concentrations. A linear, quadratic, or cubic equation can be used as the calibration curve 7
equation. Enter the number of standard samples, the order of the calibration curve equation,
and the zero intercept conditions according to the messages appearing on the screen.
7
The required number of standard sample is equal to or larger than the order of the calibration
curve equation when "0 Intercept" is set to YES, or equal to or larger than the order of the
calibration curve equation plus 1 when "0 Intercept" is set to NO. 7
Number of standard samples: 1 to 10
Order: 1 to 3
Zero intercept: YES/NO 7
The cursor on the screen indicates the item currently specified. Confirming the selection with
the key moves the cursor to the next item.
After all the parameters are specified, the UV-1800 returns to the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen.

7
Cursor

7
Input value
Input range
7
Fig. 7.5 Setup screen for calibration curve (multi-point calibration curve method)
7

1285 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-7


7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

7 7.1.3 Select Concentration Unit


When [Unit] is selected on the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the Concentration Unit
screen (Fig. 7.6) is displayed.
7
Move the cursor to the desired concentration unit using the keys, and confirm it
with the key.
7
To use a unit other than those displayed on the list, select [Unit Regist.] on the screen.

7
Registered unit
Cursor Indicates the unit that has been created
and registered by the user.
7

Fig. 7.6 Concentration Unit screen


7
If [Unit Regist.] is selected, the Unit Registration screen appears (Fig. 7.7).
Using the keys, move the cursor to desired characters on the
list, and confirm it with the key.

7
NOTE
7 A maximum of 6 characters can be entered as a registered unit.

Press the [Register] key to register the unit you have entered. The unit will be displayed in
7
the Concentration Unit screen.

Cursor
7

Fig. 7.7 Unit Registration screen

7-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1286 OF 4699


7.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

7.1.4 Save Calibration Curve 7


A calibration curve can be saved to memory at the same time that the other measurement parameters
are saved using the [Sav Param] function in the Parameter Configuration screen.
7
(See "3.1 Save Files")
A saved calibration curve can be recalled at the same time as the other measurement parameters
7
using [Params] in the [Mode menu] screen.
(See "2.3 Load Parameters")
7

1287 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-9


7.2 7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve

If the single point or multi-point calibration curve is selected for the calibration curve method among
7
the measurement parameters, the calibration curve must be created before an unknown sample is
measured. The calibration curve equation may be stored as a parameters file like other parameters. It
7
is therefore possible to call it using the parameter call function ( key) via the [Mode menu]
screen.
7 When the key is pressed with the Parameter Configuration screen displayed, the screen for
entering concentration of standard sample (concentration table) appears.
7
7.2.1 Entering Concentrations
7 Key in the concentration of standard samples (STD). Their concentrations can be entered at random
regardless of which one is larger or smaller.
7 When the concentrations of all the standard samples are entered, the screen for entering absorbance
appears.

Cursor
7 Indicates where
concentration is to be
entered.

7
Fig. 7.8 Concentration Table (entering concentrations)
7

7-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1288 OF 4699


7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve

7.2.2 Entering Absorbance 7


Specify the absorbance (Abs) of each standard sample (STD) by selecting one of the following three
methods.
7
When the concentrations are entered, the screen for selecting a method to input absorbance appears.
To select the input method, use the keys to move the cursor to the desired input
7
method, and confirm your selection with the key.

Cursor
7

NOTE
• For the single point curve calibration curve method, select either [Keying-in] or [Measurement
7
input (cell 1 only)].
• If the repetition count is set to more than one (1), you cannot select [Multi-cell sequential
measurement input].

„ Keying-in ([Key-in]) 7
Enter a value for Abs.
„ Measurement input (cell 1 only) ([Meas. (only cell)]) 7
Set the standard samples on the multi-cell holder (optional) in the order of having entered their
concentrations starting with cell 1, and then press the key. 7

If the repetition count is set to more than one, the measurement will be performed repeatedly and the
mean value for absorbance will be used.
7
Fig. 7.9 shows the Standard Sample Measurement screen.
The table on the left side screen displays the concentration and absorbance of each standard sample. 7
When measurements are repeated, the measured values are displayed in the table on the right side
screen. After the repeated measurements are completed, the mean value of the results is displayed 7
on the left side table as the standard sample absorbance.

1289 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-11


7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve

7 Measured value at repeated


measurement run
Displays each measured value
Cursor obtained during repeated
7 measurements.

7
Absorbance
Displays the mean value
obtained during repeated
7 measurements.

7
Fig. 7.9 Standard Sample Measurement screen (multi-point calibration method)
7
„ Multi-cell sequential measurement input (Displayed only when the Multi-point
calibration curve method is selected)
Each cell will be automatically selected to carry out the measurement.

7 Even though using a multi-cell holder that can hold more than 10 cells, no more than 10 standard
samples can be measured. Additionally, if for example 7 standard samples are to be measured with a
6-cell holder, the measurement will be interrupted when the 6th measurement has completed, and the
7
UV-1800 will return to the standby screen for the next measurement.

7-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1290 OF 4699


7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve

7.2.3 Concentration Table 7


After the input of absorbance has been completed, the Concentration/Abs Data screen (Fig. 7.10)
appears. This screen allows you to review the calibration curve by pressing the key.
7

1 2 3 4

Fig. 7.10 Concentration/Abs Data screen (concentration table)

No. Key Operation Display Description


7
1 [ClbCurve] Switches to the Calibration Curve screen.
^ "7.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve"
7
2 [Change] Allows changing the concentration and
absorbance of the specified standard sample
number. 7
3 [Delete] Deletes the data on the specified standard
sample number. 7
4 [Add] Allows adding each concentration and
absorbance of the standard sample. 7
– – Switches to the Measurement screen and starts
measurement of unknown sample. 7
^ "7.3 Measuring Unknown Sample
(Quantitation)" 7
– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 7.1).

1291 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-13


7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve

7 7.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve


The calibration curve can be reviewed on the Concentration Table screen (Fig. 7.10) or the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 7.1).
7

1 2 3 4

Fig. 7.11 Calibration Curve screen


7

7 Key
No. Display Description
Operation

1 [Std.Tab] Displays the list of concentration and absorbance of each


7
standard sample. ^ "7.2.3 Concentration Table"

7-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1292 OF 4699


7.2 Creating a Calibration Curve

No.
Key
Display Description
7
Operation

2 [Equation] Displays the calibration curve equation.


7

7
Fig. 7.12 Calibration Curve screen
The correlation coefficient r2 is obtained using the
following equation (only when there is no zero intercept): 7
{ Σ ( Ai – A m ) ( Ci – C m ) } 2
r 2 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
{ Σ ( Ai – A m ) 2 } { Σ ( Ci – C m ) 2 }

where
Ai: Absorbance of standard sample
Ci: Concentration of standard sample
7
Am: Mean value of Ai
Cm: Mean value of Ci 7

NOTE 7
For the quadratic or cubic equation, the value of
K3Ci3 + K2Ci2 + K1Ci + K0 is used for the value Ai.
7
3 [Chg.Ord.] Allows changing the order of the calibration curve.

4 [NewCalib] Creates a calibration curve. The concentration and 7


absorbance values of all the standard samples are
deleted and then the screen for entering concentration
7
appears.
^ "7.2.1 Entering Concentrations"
7
– – Switches to the Measurement screen and starts
measurement of unknown sample.
7
^ "7.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation)"

– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration


screen (Fig. 7.1).

1293 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-15


7.3 7.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation)

7 7.3.1 Measurement Screen


After the calibration curve has been created successfully, an unknown sample can be measured.
Press the [DataDisp] key or the key while the Measurement Parameter
7
Configuration screen (Fig. 7.1) is displayed. The Measurement screen will appear (Fig. 7.13). If the
key is pressed, the first measurement run will be carried out.
7

Set wavelength/
7 Photometric value
The current status is
displayed.
Sample No.*
7
Concentration
Indicates the concentration
calculated from the
7 calibration curve equation.

7 Absorbance
Cursor
Indicates the sample The number of display digits
No. for the next 5 6 follows the setting.
measurement. (See "14.1.2 Decimal
Display")

1 2 3 4
7
* The display format of sample No. varies according to the set measurement parameters.
„ When measuring a single cell or using the Multi-cell (optional) with the parameter of "Drive cell No." set to "1".
The sample numbers are assigned from 1 sequentially.
7
„ When measuring multiple cells by attaching the Multi-cell (optional), etc.
A hyphen (-) and cell No. are attached to the sample No.
Example) The first measurement at cell position "3" => Sample No.: 1-3
7
„ When measurements are repeated
A hyphen (-) and repetition count or "m" signifying a mean value are attached to the sample No.
Example) The second measurement of the first sample => Sample No.: 1-2 (1-m for the mean value)
7

Fig. 7.13 Measurement screen for unknown sample


7
No. Key Operation Display Description
7 1 [Smpl No.] Changes the next measured sample number by
entering a number in a range between 0 and
7 9999.

2 [ClbCurve] Displays the calibration curve.


7
^ "7.2.4 Displaying a Calibration Curve"

3 [DataDisp] Displays the list of measurement data or allows


printing it out again. ^ "7.4 List Display"

4 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data


file to the memory storage.
^ "3.1 Save Files"

7-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1294 OF 4699


7.3 Measuring Unknown Sample (Quantitation)

No. Key Operation Display Description 7


5 – Starts the measurement under the set
parameters. 7
NOTE
A maximum of 200 measurements can be 7
entered in a single table data file.
6 – Delete all the data displayed on the screen.
7
– – Returns to the Measurement Parameters
Configuration screen (Fig. 7.1).
7

7
NOTE
Repeated measurement using a multi-cell or similar holder (optional) with the multiple cells
cannot be carried out. 7

7.3.2 Data Print for Each Measurement


If a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1800 (and communication is established), the
measurement results will be printed on the printer every time measurement has finished. 7
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
parameters are printed. 7

End Date/Time of First


7
Measurement

Header Part 7

First Measurement 7

Fig. 7.14 Example of data printout for each measurement

1295 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-17


7.4 7.4 List Display

7 7.4.1 List Display Screen


As the measurement is repeated, the Measurement screen will be scrolled while displaying only the
latest eight measurement results. The list display function is used to display the list of the
7
measurement data.

7
Data display list
Displays measurement
7 results or all data contained
in a table data file. (The
data are displayed from
Sample No. 1.)
7

7 Page number
3
Indicates "current page/ total
pages" of the file list.

1 2

Fig. 7.15 List Display screen


7

7 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [PrntData] Prints all data displayed in the list.


^ "7.4.2 Data Printout"
7
2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "3.2.1 Load Single File"
7
3 – Allows scrolling the data table to review hidden
measurement data.
7
Each pressing of the key scrolls the table by 8 data
lines.
7
– – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 7.13).

7-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1296 OF 4699


7.4 List Display

7.4.2 Data Printout 7


The entire data can be printed out as a numeric data table on the printer (optional). In the header part,
the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement parameters are
7
printed.

7
NOTE
Pressing the key on the keypad will produce only a hard copy of the screen. 7

7
Date and Time when the
first measurement was
completed 7

Header Part 7

First Measurement

7
Fig. 7.16 Example of data printout for each measurement

1297 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-19


7.5 7.5 Two/Three-wavelength Quantitation Method

This is an accurate quantitation method which can be used to eliminate the effects of dispersion due to
7
interfering components and contaminants, and in to correct "floating" of the baseline due to bubbles
when such conditions exist.
7

7.5.1 Two-wavelength Quantitation


7
This method quantitates based on the difference between the photometric values at two wavelengths.
This allows for the elimination of the effects of interfering components.
7 Assume that the absorbance of the measured sample is A1 and A2 at wavelengths λ1 and λ2, that the
absorbance of the target component B is B1 and B2, and that the absorbance of interfering component
7 C is C1 and C2 (A1 = B1 + C1, A2 = B2 + C2).
When wavelengths λ1 and λ2 are selected so that C1 is equal to C2, the following equation holds:
7 A 1 – A 2 = B1 – B 2
Thus, the information on the target component remains. Normally, the absorbance wavelength for the
target component is set for λ1.
7
An example of two-wavelength measurement is shown in Fig. 7.17.

7
Measurement curve A

7
Interfering component C

7 Target component B

7
Fig. 7.17 Schematic diagram of two-wavelength quantitation

7 Quantitation measurement is then performed according to these parameters.

7-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1298 OF 4699


7.5 Two/Three-wavelength Quantitation Method

7.5.2 Three-wavelength Quantitation 7


Three-wavelength quantitation also eliminates the effects of interfering components, and is also useful
in eliminating "floating" of sloped baselines due to dust, etc.
7
The following calculation is performed based on the photometric values at three wavelengths.
( λ 1 – λ 2 )A 3 + ( λ 2 – λ 3 )A 1
 Where, A 4 = ------------------------------------------------------------------
A2 – A4
 λ1 – λ3
- 7

Where A1, A2, and A3 stand for the absorbance of the sample at wavelengths λ1, λ2, and λ3. (See Fig.
7
7.18)
The elimination of the effects of an interfering component will be explained below using Fig. 7.18.
If λ1, λ2 and λ3 are taken so that the points S, T and U of the interfering component are connected by 7
a single straight line, then A2-A4 = B2-B4, leaving only the information for the target component.
Normally, the absorbance wavelength for the target component is set for λ2. Quantitation 7
measurement is then performed according to these parameters.

Measurement curve A

7
Interfering component C

Target component B
7

7
Fig. 7.18 Schematic diagram of three-wavelength quantitation
7

1299 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 7-21


7.6 7.6 Derivative Quantitation Method

This method of quantitation uses the derivative value at a set wavelength(s). Derivative quantitation
7
has the following advantages.
• Absorption bands can be recognized when there are two or more absorption bands overlapping at
7 the same wavelength or at slightly different wavelengths.
• Weak absorption bands which are hidden in portions where the absorbance increases sharply
relative to wavelength.
7 • The single greatest point of absorption can be recognized in broad absorption spectra.
• Since a straight line correlation can be drawn between the derivative value and the concentration,
quantitative analysis becomes simpler in the presence of a background.
7
The 2nd derivative spectrum in a case where two absorption bands overlap at different wavelengths is
shown in Fig. 7.19. (a) is the normal spectrum, where the absorption band B cannot be discerned in
7 the spectrum A + B in which the absorption bands A and B are overlapped. The 2nd order derivative
of this is shown in (b), where the spectrum A + B is obtained by the combination of the derivatives of
7 absorption bands A and B. Thus, the absorption band B, which was hidden in the larger absorption
band A, can clearly be discerned in the 2nd derivative.

7 Refer to "13.3 Derivative Operations" for details on derivative calculations.


Derivative in the quantitation mode is calculated from 17 points of data before and after the center of
the set wavelength. The derivative wavelength difference ∆λ is constant at 0.8 nm. In addition, the
order of derivative can be set from 1st through 4th.

7
(a) (b)

7
Fig. 7.19 2nd derivative spectrum with two absorption bands - Overlapping at different wavelengths -
7

7-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1300 OF 4699


8
8 Kinetics

Chapter 8 Kinetics 8

8
The Kinetics mode allows you to measure the changes in the absorbance (Abs), which occur over time from the
enzyme reaction, and to obtain the activity value of the enzyme from that measurement result.

CONTENTS
8
8.1 Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 8-4
8.3 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 8-8 8
8.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve ............................................................................................................. 8-9
8.5 Data List .......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.6 Print (Output) Format....................................................................................................................... 8-19 8

1301 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-1


8.1 8.1 Operation

When you select [4. Kinetics] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the
8
Method Selection screen (Fig. 8.1) will be displayed.

8
Fig. 8.1 Method Selection screen

8 When you select [1. Kinetics] (press the key) in the Method Selection screen, the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for kinetics measurement (Fig. 8.4) will be displayed.

In the kinetics measurement, it is possible to display the change (Reaction speed) at the rate of
absorbance on the screen and to obtain the change in absorbance quantity of an interval set by the
8
lag time and rate time by calculating its change in quantity per minute. To eliminate the effect of the
background, the measurement is performed at two wavelengths (for measurement and background
8 correction), and the reaction speed can be obtained by similarly calculating from the time course
change in the difference of the two measured absorbances.
8 Fig. 8.2 shows the relation between the change in the rate of absorbance and the lag time and rate
time. Linear regression of the sampling data between the rate time is carried out by the method of

8 least squares to obtain the rate of change (∆ Abs/min).


Activity values are obtained by multiplying the range of change by four factor values.

8
(Activity value) = (Factor 1) × (Factor 2) × (Factor 3) × (Factor 4) × (Rate of change)

8-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1302 OF 4699


8.1 Operation

8
Measurement time

Lag time Rate time


8
Initial value

8
(Absorbance)

(time)
8
Start Measurement end

8
Fig. 8.2 Lag time and rate time

1303 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-3


8.2 8.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

Fig. 8.3 shows the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for Kinetics measurement.
8
Set the parameters by pressing the numeric keys corresponding to the item numbers on the screen.

8
Set wavelength/
Absorbance
1 Indicates Abs measured at the
8 2 currently set wavelength.

8
4

8 5
6
Sample module
8 (No. of drive cell)
Indicates the type of the current a
multi-cell holder for sample
control and the number of drive
8 cells.
8 9 0

(BG correction: OFF)


8

Measurement wavelength
When the background
correction is ON, the
correction wavelength (λb) is
8 also displayed.

7
8
(BG correction: ON)
Fig. 8.3 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen
8

Key
8 No. Display Description
Operation

1 [Meas. λ] Specifies the measurement wavelength (λ) and the


8
wavelength for background measurement (λb: only
when the background correction is ON).

2 [BG Corr.] Indicates whether or not to perform the background


correction.
Each pressing of the key toggles the background
correction ON/OFF.

8-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1304 OF 4699


8.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
8
Operation

3 [Meas. time] Specifies Measurement time, Cycle, and Lag/Rate


8
[Cycle] time (start and end times of activity value calculation)
[Lag/Rate] in order. Confirm each of the values using the
8
key.
^ "8.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle
(Measurement Cycle), and Lag/Rate" 8
4 [Factor] Used to input a coefficient for the equation that
connects the rate of change of absorbance in terms of 8
the activity value.
It is possible to specify each of the four factors in the
8
equation below. The input range is from -9999.9 to
9999.9. The number of significant figures is 5. (0.0001
8
is acceptable.)

(Activity value) = (Factor 1) × (Factor 2) × (Factor 3) × 8


(Factor 4) × (Reaction speed)

5 [Rec. range] The recording range is used to input the upper limit/
lower limit of the Y-axis when displaying the Reaction
Curve on the screen.
8
Input range is from -4.000A to 4.000A.

6 [Time scale] The time scale (unit) can be toggled between minutes
8
and seconds. When the key is pressed the unit of time
is changed from [min] to [sec] and vice versa.
8
7 [BaseCorr] Performs the baseline correction involving the
wavelength specified in [1. Meas. λ]. (Displayed only
when BG correction is ON.) 8
8 [SmplCmpt] Sets the sample module.
^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, 8
Sipper Operation)"

9 [MeasScrn] Measurement results are displayed in tabular format. 8


0 [SavParam] Saves the current measurement parameters.
^ "3.1 Save Files" 8
a – Switches to the Reaction Curve Display screen and
starts the measurement.
8

– – Returns to the Kinetics Method Selection screen (Fig.


8.1).

1305 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-5


8.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

8 8.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle (Measurement Cycle), and Lag/


Rate
When [3] (Meas. Time, Cycle, and Lag/Rate) is selected in the Measurement Parameter Configuration
8
screen, the following values should be entered:
„ Measurement time
8 To set the measurement time, enter the total time to obtain actual absorbance data values. The input
range is from 1 to 9999 seconds (minutes).
8 However, when the background correction is ON or when performing a multi cell measurement with
multi-cell holder, the lower limit of the range is determined by the difference of set wavelengths or the

8 number of drive cells.

8
Input range

8 Fig. 8.4 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

„ Cycle (measurement cycle)


8 Specify the interval (measurement cycle) to acquire measurement data.
Move the cursor on the selection screen with the keys, and confirm the selection

8 with the key.


Up to 2001 data points can be obtained in this measurement method. You cannot select measurement
cycle values that create data points exceeding the limit.
8

8 Fig. 8.5 [Cycle] screen

8-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1306 OF 4699


8.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

The unit of the measurement cycle follows the setting specified in the [6. Time scale] in the
8
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen.
If [Integer] is selected, the cycle input range is as given in the following:
8
When "Measurement time" < 2001 sec. (min.): Integers from 1 to 1000
When "Measurement time" 2001 sec. (min.): Integers from (Measurement time/2000) to 1000
As in the setting of measurement time, however, when the background correction is ON or when 8
performing a multi cell measurement with multi-cell holder, the lower limit of the range is determined
by the difference of set wavelengths or the number of drive cells. 8

„ Lag/Rate 8
For Lag (lag time), define the time period which is not counted for activity value calculation. Specify
the time from the measurement start.
8
For Rate (rate time), define the time period which is counted for activity value calculation. Specify the
time from the lag time end (See Fig. 8.2).
The input range for the lag time is from [0 to (Measurement time - Cycle)] (in units of 1). The range for 8
the rate time is from [Cycle to (Measurement time - Lag time)] (in units of 1).
8

1307 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-7


8.3 8.3 Measurement

When the kinetics measurement is started, the reaction curve starts being plotted on the screen in real
8
time (Fig. 8.6).
After the measurement, measurement results are displayed in the data table (^ "8.5 Data List") the
8
screen will be changed to one showing the reaction curve (Fig. 8.7).
The dotted line as shown in Fig. 8.6 indicates the calculation interval of the activity value (the end of
8 lag time and the end of rate time).
If a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed
8 on the printer for every measurement.

8 Elapsed time/
Photometric value
Indicates the time elapsed after
measurement start and the
8 Lag time end
current absorbance.

8 Rate time end

Time period for activity value


8 calculation

8 Fig. 8.6 Kinetics Measurement screen

8
No. Key Operation Description

1 Terminates measurement and displays the [Data List Display


8
screen]. After the measurement results has been registered and
displayed, the [Reaction Curve Display screen] is displayed. In
8 the case of multi-cell measurement, the measurement will be
terminated after the last cell measurement has completed. All
8 data measured before the termination can be considered to be
valid.

8-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1308 OF 4699


8.4 8.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

8.4.1 Curve Display Screen 8


When you complete/terminate measurement, or press the (Curve) key in the Data List
screen (Fig. 8.13), the Curve Display screen appears (Fig. 8.7).
8

1 2 3 4
8
Fig. 8.7 Curve Display screen

NOTE 8
The acquired curve data is not yet saved when the measurement has completed. The curve
data will be lost, if (1) the next sample measurement is started, (2) another curve data file is
8
loaded, or (3) the measurement and calculation parameters are changed. To save the
acquired curve data, press the key.
8

8
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Zoom] Changing the range of Y-axis and X-axis of


8
displayed reaction curve enables zooming of the
reaction curve.
^ "8.4.3 Zoom Screen" 8
2 [DataList] Pressing this function key changes the screen to one
showing the data table. Measurement results 8
(sample number, initial value (Abs), ∆a/min, activity
value) will be displayed in tabular format. 8
^ "8.5 Data List"

1309 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-9


8.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

8 No. Key Operation Display Description

3 [LoadCurv] Loads a curve data file that is stored in the memory


8 storage.
However, you can load only curve data obtained
under the same parameters (measurement
8
wavelengths, BG correction, and measurement time)
as those currently set.
8 ^ "3.2 Load Files"
The activity value is calculated by the calculation
8 parameters set on the Parameters Setting screen
with respect to the recalled waveform data, and the
results will be displayed.
8
4 [SaveCurv] Saves the acquired reaction curve data to the built-in
memory storage or USB memory device.
8
^ "3.1 Save Files"

– – Starts the measurement under the set parameters.


8
– – Prints a hard copy of the screen or the time course
data.
^ "8.4.4 Print Mode"
^ "8.6.1 Waveform Format"
8 – – Returns to the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 8.4).
8 – – Displays the reading cursor on the graph to read the
data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
8 ^ "8.4.2 Reading with Cursor"

8-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1310 OF 4699


8.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

8.4.2 Reading with Cursor 8


If the or key is pressed in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.7), the reading cursor
appears. Using this reading cursor, you can read the data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
8

8
Reading cursor
8

Time/Abs/Cell No. 8
Indicates the wavelength and
photometric value at the current cursor
position. Indicates also Cell No. for
the multi cell measurement. 8

Fig. 8.8 Reading with Cursor screen

8
Key Operation Description

Moves the cursor on the reaction curve graph and displays the time and
8
Abs at the cursor position.
Holding down the key will move the cursor faster.
8
Selects a reaction curve to be read with the cursor.
When performing a multi cell measurement with multi-cell holder,
multiple reaction curves will be displayed on the graph. 8
Therefore, to review a particular reaction curve, you need to switch the
cell No. and select the target curve by pressing the 8
keys.

Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed. 8


Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears, and the UV-1800 returns to the
above Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.8). 8

1311 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-11


8.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

8 8.4.3 Zoom Screen


When you press the [zoom] key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.7), the Zoom screen
(Fig. 8.9) will be displayed. The displayed reaction curve can be enlarged or reduced by changing the
8
vertical or horizontal axis of the graph (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis).

8
NOTE
8 If the curve data is over-written on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
reduction is applied to the last loaded data.

1 2 3
8
Fig. 8.9 Zoom screen

8-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1312 OF 4699


8.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

8
Key
No. Display Description
Operation
8
1 [InputNum] Enlarges or reduces the graph by directly specifying the
vertical or horizontal axis range.
8
Specify the range value at the cursor position with numeric
keys, and confirm it with the key. Each pressing of
the key moves the cursor to [vertical axis upper 8
limit] → [vertical axis lower limit] → [horizontal axis lower
limit] → [horizontal axis upper limit], and finally returns to 8
the Zoom screen (Fig. 8.9).
Cursor 8

8
Input range/
Input value
Displays
available input 8
range and key
input value.

8
Fig. 8.10 Zoom Screen (during setting)

NOTE 8
Data exist only at each measurement cycle. Therefore,
when values other than the integral multiple of the cycle 8
are entered as horizontal axis values, the entered values
are automatically replaced with the time values nearest
8
to the existing data values.
2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the displayed
reaction curve automatically.
8

3 [Restore] Restores the display range to the original state.


8
4 – Prints the curve data with the zoom operation applied.
^ "8.6 Print (Output) Format"
8
5 – Displays the cursor on the reaction curve graph to activate
the cursor reading function.
8
^ "8.4.2 Reading with Cursor"

6 – Returns to the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.7).

1313 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-13


8.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

8 8.4.4 Print Mode


When you press the key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.7), the screen appears for
selecting a print mode from "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" and "Hard copy of screen ([Screen
8
copy])".
Move the cursor to the desired print mode with the keys, and confirm the selection
8
with the key.

8
Cursor

8
Fig. 8.11 [Print mode] screen
8
„ Print waveform ([Draw curve])
Waveforms and measurement parameters of a curve data are printed. ^ "8.6.1 Waveform Format"
8 For a commercially available printer, the screen for selecting a grid type for graph output is displayed.
Move the cursor to the desired grid type with the keys, and confirm the selection
8 with the key.

Cursor

8
Fig. 8.12 [Frame Type] Selection screen
8
When the grid type is confirmed, the measured or loaded reaction curve and the parameters are
printed out.
8
„ Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy])
8 The current screen image when the key is pressed will be printed in the same size.

8-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1314 OF 4699


8.5 8.5 Data List

8.5.1 Data List Screen 8


As shown in Fig. 8.13, measurement results (Smpl No., Abs (init.), ∆ A/min, Activ) will be displayed in
the tabular format. Measurement results for each measurement will be added below. The maximum
8
number of data of measurement results is 200. To display or print out these measurement results,
press the [DataDisp] key to bring up the screen of data display for further processing.
8

Set wavelength/
Photometric Value
Indicates Abs measured at the
8
Sample No. currently set wavelength.
The assignment rule for the
number varies according to 8
the cell holder used (Note 1).
Activity value

Reaction speed
8
Cursor
Indicates the sample No. for
the next measurement. Initial Value
Indicates the absorbance at 8
calculation start. The number
5 6 of display digits follows the
setting.
(^ "14.1.2 Decimal 8
Display")
1 2 3 4

Fig. 8.13 Data List Display screen

(Note1) When using a single cell or when No. of drive cells is 1, the sample numbers are assigned 8
in sequence, starting from 1.
When using multiple cells by attaching a multi-cell or micro multi-cell, a dash (-) and the cell
8
number are attached to the sample number.

Single cells: [Sample No.]


8
Multiple cells: [Sample No.] - [Cell No.]
8

1315 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-15


8.5 Data List

8
Key
No. Display Description
Operation
8
1 [Smpl No.] Used to change the sample number for the next
measurement.
8
The sample number can be selected from 0 to 9999.

2 [Curve] Switches to the Reaction Curve Display screen.


8
^ "8.4.1 Curve Display Screen"

3 [DataDisp] Displays and prints all measured data, or loads a table


8
data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "8.5.2 List Display"
8 4 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data file to
the memory storage.
8 ^ "3.1 Save Files"

5 – Starts the measurement under the set parameters.


8 NOTE
A maximum of 200 measurements can be entered
in a single table data file.
6 – Deletes all the data displayed on the screen.

8 7 – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration


screen (Fig. 8.3).

8-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1316 OF 4699


8.5 Data List

8.5.2 List Display 8


In the screen of the data list, the results of only the 8 immediately previous measurements will be
displayed. In this case, it is possible to display all of the measurement results. It is also possible to
8
output a batch of all measurement results on a printer.

Data display list 8


Displays measurement
results or all data
contained in a table data
file. (The data are 8
displayed from Sample
No. 1.)

Page number 8
3
Indicates "current page/ total
pages" of the file list.

8
1 2

Fig. 8.14 List Display screen

Key
8
No. Display Description
Operation

1 [PrntData] Prints all listed data or reaction curve data that is 8


displayed on the screen.
^ "8.5.3 Data Print Format" 8
2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "3.1 Save Files"
8
3 – Allows scrolling the data table to review the hidden
measurement data.
8
Each pressing the key scrolls the table in units by 8
data lines.
8
– – Returns to the List Display screen (Fig. 8.13).

1317 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-17


8.5 Data List

8 8.5.3 Data Print Format


When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen, the screen for selecting a print
format appears. Move the cursor to the desired format with the keys, and confirm
8
the selection with the key.
The print process will be started when the print format is confirmed.
8

Cursor
8

8 Fig. 8.15 [Print format] Selection screen

8
Print Format Description

8 [Table data] Prints all numeric data shown on the data table and the measurement
parameters.
^ "8.6.2 Table Data Format"
8
[Curve data] Prints time and absorbance at each cycle on reaction curve, and also
the measurement parameters.
^ "8.6.3 Curve Data Format"

8-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1318 OF 4699


8.6 8.6 Print (Output) Format

8.6.1 Waveform Format 8


When you press the key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 8.7), the screen appears for
selecting a print mode (Fig. 8.11).
8
If you select [Draw curve] as a print mode, waveforms and measurement parameters of a curve data
are printed.
8
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the curve data measurement as well as
measurement parameters are printed.
The print format for "Print waveform" varies according to the connected printer for output. 8
The following shows examples of printouts using different types of printers.
8
„ Output to a hard-copy printer
8

8
Screen hard copy
The screen hard copy
excluding the title row and 8
function row

Measurement end date 8

Measurement
parameters 8

Fig. 8.16 Example of waveform printout (with hard copy printer)


8

1319 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-19


8.6 Print (Output) Format

8 „ Output to a commercially available printer

Measurement end date


8

Measurement parameters

8 Fig. 8.17 Example of waveform printout (with commercially available printer)

8-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1320 OF 4699


8.6 Print (Output) Format

8.6.2 Table Data Format 8


In kinetics measurement, the result can be printed after each measurement, or the entire result can be
printed at once. Both print modes use the same print format.
8
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
parameters are printed.
8

End date of first 8


measurement

Header Part
Measurement parameters 8

8
First measurement

Fig. 8.18 Example of table data printout 8

„ Printout for each measurement


If a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed
out on the printer for each measurement (rate interval).
8
„ Print all at once
When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 8.14), the screen for 8
selecting a print format appears. If [Table data] is selected, all measurement results up to that point, or
all the data within the currently-loaded table data file will be printed.
8

1321 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 8-21


8.6 Print (Output) Format

8 8.6.3 Curve Data Format


When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 8.15), the screen for
selecting a print format appears. If [Curve data] is selected, the curve data (time and absorbance at
8
each measurement cycle) within the latest measured or loaded reaction curve will be printed.
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the curve data measurement as well as
8
measurement parameters are printed.

8
Measurement end date

8 Measurement parameters

Fig. 8.19 Example of curve data printout

8-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1322 OF 4699


9
9 Kinetics Rate

Chapter 9 Kinetics Rate 9

CONTENTS 9
9.1 Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 9-3
9.3 Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve ............................................................................................................. 9-9
9.5 Data List .......................................................................................................................................... 9-15 9
9.6 Print (Output) Format....................................................................................................................... 9-18

1323 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-1


9.1 9.1 Operation

When you select [4. Kinetics] (press the key) in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the
9
Method Selection screen (Fig. 9.1) will be displayed.

9
Fig. 9.1 Method Selection screen

9 When you select [2. Rate] (press the key) in the Method Selection screen, the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen for rate measurement (Fig. 9.2) will be displayed.

9
The kinetics rate measurement mode is used to measure the change in the rate of absorbance for one
wavelength and obtain the change in quantity of absorbance per rate interval.
A discriminant is used to determine whether the absorbance is being changed linearly and to display
the linearity (L) or the non-linearity (N). The discriminant is as follows. Linearity (L) is determined by
9
whether the ratio of the rate of change of absorbance during one cycle and the rate of change of one
cycle before are within the proportion (%) set in the criteria.
9
(Discriminant)
9 |{(change in quantity of absorbance at the last rate interval)-(change in quantity of absorbance at the
rate interval)}/ (change in quantity of absorbance at the last rate interval)| × 100<(criteria)

9-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1324 OF 4699


9.2 9.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

Fig. 9.2 shows the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen.


9
Set the parameters by pressing the numeric keys corresponding to the item numbers on the screen.

9
Set wavelength/
Absorbance
1 Indicates Abs measured at the
2 currently set wavelength. 9

3
9
4
5
9

9
9

9
6 7 8

Fig. 9.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen


9

9
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Meas. λ] Specifies the measurement wavelength. The


input range is from 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm.

2 [Meas. time] Specifies Measurement time, Cycle, and Rate


[Cycle] interval in order. Confirm each of the values with 9
[Interval] the key.
^ "9.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle, 9
and Interval"

3 [Rec. range] The recording range is used to input the upper 9


limit/lower limit of the Y-axis when displaying the
Reaction Curve on the screen.
9
Input range is from -4.000 A to 4.000 A.

4 [Time scale] The time scale (unit) can be toggled between


9
minutes and seconds. When the key is pressed
the unit of time is changed from [min] to [sec]
and vice versa. 9

1325 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-3


9.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

9 No. Key Operation Display Description

5 [Discriminator] A discriminant is used to determine whether the


9 absorbance is being changed linearly and to
display the linearity (L) or the non-linearity (N).
„Discriminant
9
|{(change in quantity of absorbance at the last
rate interval)-(change in quantity of absorbance
9 at the rate interval)} / (change in quantity of
absorbance at the last rate interval)|×100
9 <(Criteria)
^ "9.1 Operation"

9 6 [SmplCmpt] Sets the sample module.


^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control
(Multi-cell, Sipper Operation)"
9
NOTE
Multi-cell measurement with a multi-cell
9
holder is not available in the Rate
measurement.
9
7 [DataList] Measurement results are displayed in tabular
format.

8 [SavParam] Saves the current measurement parameters.


^ "3.1 Save Files"
9 9 – Switches to the Data List Display screen and
starts the measurement.
9 – – Returns to the Kinetics Method selection screen
(Fig. 9.1).
9

9-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1326 OF 4699


9.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

9.2.1 Setting Measurement Time, Cycle, and Interval 9


„ Measurement time
To set the measurement time, enter the total time to obtain actual absorbance data values. The input 9
range is from 1 to 9999 seconds (minutes).

9
„ Cycle (measurement cycle)
Specify the interval (measurement cycle) to acquire measurement data.
Move the cursor on the selection screen with the keys, and confirm the selection 9
with the key.
Up to 2001 data points can be obtained in this measurement method. You cannot select measurement 9
cycle values that create data points exceeding the limit.

9
Fig. 9.3 [Cycle] screen

The unit of the measurement cycle follows the setting specified in [4. Time scale] on the Measurement
9
Parameter Configuration screen.

If [Integer input] is selected, the cycle input range is as given in the following:
When "Measurement time" < 2001 sec. (min.):Integers from 1 to 1000 9
When "Measurement time" 2001 sec. (min.):Integers from (Measurement time/2000) to 1000

1327 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-5


9.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

9 „ Interval (rate interval)


In the rate measurement, the reaction speed (Abs/min) at each of the specified rate interval is
obtained.
9 Move the cursor on the selection screen with the keys, and confirm the selection
with the key.
9 Up to 401 measurement points can be obtained in the rate measurement. You cannot select rate
interval values that create measurement points exceeding the limit.
9

9
Fig. 9.4 [Interval] screen
9
If [Integer input] is selected, the input range is from [1 to (Measurement time)] (integral multiple of
measurement cycle).
9 The rate interval unit follows the setting specified in [4. Time scale] on the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen. If an [Integer input] is selected, the input range is integers from "(Measurement
9 time/400) to Measurement time" (integral multiples of measurement cycle).

9-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1328 OF 4699


9.3 9.3 Measurement

The screen displayed during measurement varies according to the screen from which the
9
measurement is started. If a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement result
will be printed for each rate interval, regardless of the displayed screen. (See "9.6.2 Table Data
9
Format").

9
9.3.1 Data Display during Measurement
When measurement is initiated from the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 9.2) or
the Data List screen (Fig. 9.13) by pressing the key, the measurement result starts being
9
displayed in the Data List for each rate interval. For details on the displayed item results, refer to "9.5
Data List". 9

Elapsed time/ Photometric


value
9
Indicates the time elapsed after
measurement start and the
current absorbance.
9

Displays a countdown for 9


the next measurement if
the measurement interval is
relatively long.

9
Fig. 9.5 Screen during measurement (data display)

9
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 – Terminates the measurement and moves to the 9


Data List Display screen (Fig. 9.14).

1329 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-7


9.3 Measurement

9 9.3.2 Curve Display Screen during Measurement


When the measurement is started from the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 9.5) by pressing the
key, the reaction curve starts being plotted on the screen in real time.
9

9 Elapsed time/ Photometric


value
Indicates the time elapsed after
measurement start and the
9 current absorbance.

9
1

9
Fig. 9.6 Screen during measurement (curve display)

No. Key Operation Display Description

1 – Terminates the measurement and displays the


[Data List Display screen] (Fig. 9.13). After the
9 measurement results have been registered and
displayed, the UV-1800 switches to the
9 [Reaction Curve Display screen] (Fig. 9.7).

9-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1330 OF 4699


9.4 9.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

9.4.1 Curve Display Screen 9


When you complete/terminate measurement, or press the [Curve] key in the Data List
screen (Fig. 9.13), the Curve Display screen appears (Fig. 9.7).
9
In this screen, you can display, save, or print the reaction curve within measured or loaded spectrum
data.
9

9
1 2 3 4
9
Fig. 9.7 Reaction Curve Display screen

NOTE
The acquired curve data is not yet saved when the measurement has completed. The curve
9
data will be lost, if (1) the next sample measurement is started, (2) another curve data file is
loaded, or (3) the screen is switched (to the Parameter Configuration screen). To save the
acquired curve data, press the key. 9

9
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Zoom] Changing the range of Y-axis and X-axis of


9
displayed reaction curve enables zooming of the
reaction curve.
^ "9.4.3 Zoom Screen" 9

2 [DataList] Switches to the data table screen. Measurement


results (Time (sec), Abs, ∆Abs, Discriminant result) 9
will be displayed in tabular format.
^ "9.5 Data List" 9
3 [LoadCurv] Loads a curve data file that is stored in the memory
storage. 9
^ "3.2 Load Files"

1331 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-9


9.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

9 No. Key Operation Display Description

4 [SaveCurv] Saves the acquired reaction curve data to the built-in


9 memory storage or USB memory device.
^ "3.1 Save Files"

9 – – Prints a hard copy of the screen or the reaction curve


data.
^ "9.4.4 Print Mode"
9
^ "9.6 Print (Output) Format"

– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter


9
Configuration screen (Fig. 9.2).

– – Displays the reading cursor on the graph to read the


9 data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
^ "9.4.2 Reading with Cursor"
9

9-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1332 OF 4699


9.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

9.4.2 Reading with Cursor 9


If the or key is pressed in the Curve Display screen, the reading cursor appears.
Using this reading cursor, you can read the data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
9

9
Reading cursor

9
Time/Abs
Indicates the wavelength and
photometric value at the
current cursor position. 9

Fig. 9.8 Reading with Cursor screen


9

Key Operation Description

Moves the cursor on the reaction curve graph and displays the time and
Abs at the cursor position. Holding down the key will
9
move the cursor faster.

Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed.


9
Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears, and the UV-1800 returns to the
above Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 9.7).
9

1333 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-11


9.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

9 9.4.3 Zoom Screen


When you press the [Zoom] key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 9.7), the Zoom screen
(Fig. 9.9) will be displayed. The displayed reaction curve can be enlarged or reduced by changing the
9
vertical or horizontal axis of the graph (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis).

9
NOTE
If the curve data is overwritten on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
9 reduction is applied to the last loaded data.

1 2 3
9
Fig. 9.9 Zoom screen

9-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1334 OF 4699


9.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

No. Key Operation Display Description 9


1 [InputNum] Enlarges or reduces the graph by directly specifying
the vertical or horizontal axis range. 9
Specify the range value at the cursor position with
numeric keys, and confirm it with the key.
9
Each pressing of the key moves the cursor
to [vertical axis upper limit] → [vertical axis lower
limit] → [horizontal axis lower limit] → [horizontal 9
axis upper limit], and finally returns to the Zoom
screen (Fig. 9.9). 9

Cursor
9
Input
Range/Input
Value
Displays 9
available
input range
and key input
value. 9

9
Fig. 9.10 Zoom Screen

NOTE
Data exist only at each measurement cycle.
Therefore, when values other than the integral 9
multiple of the cycle are entered as horizontal axis
values, the entered values are automatically
9
replaced with the time values nearest to the
existing data values.
9
2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the
displayed reaction curve automatically.
9
3 [Restore] Restores the display range to the original state.

– – Starts the measurement under the set parameters


9
and returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 9.5).

– – Prints the curve data with the zoom operation


applied.
9
^ "9.6 Print (Output) Format"

– – Displays the cursor on the reaction curve graph to 9


activate the cursor reading function.
9
^ "9.4.2 Reading with Cursor"

– – Returns to the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig.


9.7).

1335 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-13


9.4 Displaying a Reaction Curve

9 9.4.4 Print Mode


When you press the key in the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 9.7), the screen appears
for selecting a print mode from "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" and "Hard copy of screen ([Screen
9
copy])" (Fig. 9.11).
Move the cursor to the desired print mode with the keys, and confirm the selection
9
with the key.

9
Cursor

Fig. 9.11 [Print mode] screen


9
„ Print waveform ([Draw curve])
Waveform and measurement parameters of a curve data are printed. ^ "9.6.1 Waveform Format"
9 For a commercially available printer, the screen for selecting a grid type for graph output is (Fig. 9.12)
displayed. Move the cursor to the desired grid type with the keys, and confirm the
9 selection with the key.

9 Cursor

9 Fig. 9.12 [Frame Type] Selection screen

„ Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy])


9 The current screen image when the key is pressed will be printed in the same size.

9-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1336 OF 4699


9.5 9.5 Data List

9.5.1 Data List Display Screen 9


As shown in Fig. 9.13, measurement results (Time (sec), Abs, ∆ A/min and D) will be displayed in
tabular format. Measurement results for each measurement will be added below. To display or print
9
out these measurement results, press the [DataDisp] key to bring up the data display screen
for further processing.
9

Set wavelength/ 9
Photometric value
Indicates Abs measured at the
The time at the last currently set wavelength.
measurement point for 9
each rate interval is
displayed.
Discriminant result 9
L: Linear
N: Non linear

9
Absorbance Change in quantity of
Indicates the first Abs at absorbance
each rate interval. 4 9
The number of displayed
digits follows the setting.
(See "14.1.2 Decimal
Display") 1 2 3 9

Fig. 9.13 Data List screen

No. Key Operation Display Description 9


1 [Curve] Switches to the Reaction Curve Display screen
(Fig. 9.7). 9
^ "9.4.1 Curve Display Screen"

2 [DataDisp] Displays and prints all measured data, or loads


9
a table data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "9.5.2 List Display"
9
3 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data
file to the memory storage.
^ "3.1 Save Files"
9

4 – Starts the measurement under the set


parameters. 9

– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter


Configuration screen (Fig. 9.2). 9

1337 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-15


9.5 Data List

9 9.5.2 List Display


In the screen of the data list, the results of only the 8 immediately previous measurements will be
displayed. In this screen, it is possible to display all of the measurement results. It is also possible to
9
output a batch of all measurement results on a printer.

9
Data display list
Displays measurement results
or all data contained in a table
9 data file. (The data are
displayed from Sample No. 1.)

9
3 Page number
Indicates "current page/ total
9 pages" of the file list.

1 2
9
Fig. 9.14 List Display screen

No. Key Operation Display Description


9 1 [PrntData] Print all listed data or reaction curve data that is
displayed on the screen.
9 ^ "9.5.3 Data Print Format"

2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.


9 ^ "3.2.1 Load Single File"

3 – Allows scrolling the data table to review the hidden

9 measurement data.
Each pressing of the key scrolls the table by 8 data
lines.
9
4 – Returns to the Data List screen (Fig. 9.13).

9-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1338 OF 4699


9.5 Data List

9.5.3 Data Print Format 9


When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen, the screen for selecting a print
format appears. Move the cursor to the desired format with the keys, and confirm
9
the selection with the key.
The print process will be started when the print format is confirmed.
9

Cursor
9

9
Fig. 9.15 [Print format] Selection screen

9
Display Description

[Table data] Prints all numeric data shown on the data table and the measurement 9
parameters.
^ "9.6.2 Table Data Format" 9
[Curve data] Prints the time and measured absorbance for each cycle together with
the measurement parameters. 9
^ "9.6.3 Curve Data Format"

1339 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-17


9.6 9.6 Print (Output) Format

9 9.6.1 Waveform Format


When you press the key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 9.7), the screen appears for
selecting a print mode (Fig. 9.11). If you select [Draw curve] as a print mode, waveforms and
9
measurement parameters of a curve data are printed.
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the curve data measurement as well as
9
measurement parameters are printed.
The print format for "Print waveform" varies according to the connected printer for output.
9 The following shows examples of printouts using different types of printers.

9 „ Output to a hard-copy printer

9 Screen hard copy


The screen hard copy
excluding the title row and
function row
9

Measurement end date


9

Measurement
9 parameters

9
Fig. 9.16 Example of waveform printout (with hard copy printer)

9-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1340 OF 4699


9.6 Print (Output) Format

„ Output to a commercially available printer 9

Measurement end date 9

Measurement parameters 9

Fig. 9.17 Example of waveform printout (with commercially available printer)


9

1341 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-19


9.6 Print (Output) Format

9 9.6.2 Table Data Format


In rate measurement, the result can be printed for each rate interval, or the entire results can be
printed all at once. Both print modes use the same print format.
9
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
parameters are printed.
9

End date/time of first measurement


9 Indicates the end time of the first
measurement.

Header Part
9 Measurement parameters

9 First measurement

Fig. 9.18 Example of table data printout


9
„ Printout for each measurement
If a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed
9
out on the printer for every measurement (rate interval).

9
„ Print all at once
When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 9.14), the screen for
9 selecting a print format appears. If [Table data] is selected, all measurement results up to that point, or
all the data within the currently-loaded table data file will be printed.
9

9-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1342 OF 4699


9.6 Print (Output) Format

9.6.3 Curve Data Format 9


When you press the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 9.14), the screen for
selecting a print format appears. If [Curve data] is selected, the curve data (time and absorbance at
9
each measurement cycle) within the latest measured or loaded reaction curve will be printed.
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the curve data measurement as well as
9
measurement parameters are printed.

9
Measurement end date

9
Measurement parameters

9
Fig. 9.19 Example of curve data printout

1343 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 9-21


1
10 Time Scan

Chapter 10 Time Scan 1

1
The time scan mode is used to measure the change in the rate of absorbance (Abs), transmittance (%T), or
energy (E) in the specified arbitrary wavelength. 1
CONTENTS
10
10.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 10-2
10.2 Measurement................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3 Displaying Time Course Curve ........................................................................................................ 10-7
10.4 Print Format ................................................................................................................................... 10-13

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1344 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 10-1


10.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen
10.1

When [5. Time scan] is selected in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the Measurement Parameter
10
Configuration screen related to the time scan mode is displayed.

10
Set wavelength/
Photometric value
1 Indicates Abs or %T measured
10 2 at the currently set wavelength.
3
4
10
5
6
10

Sample module
10 (No. of drive cells)
Indicates the type of the a
current multi-cell holder for
sample control and the number
10 of drive cells.
8 9 0

10 (Abs and %T modes)

10

10

7
10

a
10

10 (E mode)
Fig. 10.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (E mode)

10
Key
No. Display Description
Operation
10
1 [Meas. mode] Selects the measurement mode.
You can select one of the following measurement
10
modes: %T (transmittance), Abs (absorbance), or E
(energy). Upon selection, the [Rec. range] value is also
10 changed to the corresponding range.

2 [Meas. λ] Specifies the measurement wavelength. The input


range is from 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm.

10-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1345 OF 4699


10.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
1
Operation

3 [Meas. time] Specifies Measurement time and Cycle in order.


1
[Cycle] Confirm each of the values with the key.
^ "10.1.1 Setting Measurement Time and Cycle"
1
4 [Rec. range] The recording range is used to input the upper limit/
lower limit of Y-axis when displaying the Reaction
Curve on the screen. 1
Input range is from - 4.000 A to 4.000 A.

5 [Time scale] The time scale (unit) can be toggled between minutes 1
and seconds. When the key is pressed, the unit of time
is changed from [min] to [sec] and vice versa. 1
6 [Auto-Print] Switches ON/OFF of the auto-print function.
Each pressing of this key toggles between [ON] and 1
[OFF].
ON A screen hard copy and
measurement parameters are 1
automatically printed after the
measurement.
For details on the printout form, 1
refer to "10.4.2 Waveform
Format", Fig. 6.8 Example of
waveform printout (with hard copy
10
printer).
OFF The automatic printout is not
performed.

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1346 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 10-3


10.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

10 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

7 [Light source] Selects the light source for the measurement. (E


10
(energy) mode only)
The selected light source will be used regardless of the
10
parameter setting for the light source.
„Light source types
10 WI lamp Selects the tungsten iodine lamp
(halogen lamp).
D2 lamp Selects the deuterium lamp.
10
OFF Turns OFF both the WI and D2
lamps. The light source mirror
turns to the third light source*.
10
* This function is used to introduce the external light

10 source into the spectrometer when measuring the


energy change of light sources other than those
equipped with the standard UV-1800.
10
8 [SmplCmpt] Sets the sample module. ^ Chapter 18 "Sample
Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation)"
10
9 [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen.

0 [SavParam] Enables current measurement parameters to be


10
saved.
^ "3.1 Save Files"
a – Starts the measurement under the set parameters and
displays the Measurement screen (Fig. 10.3).
10 b – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1).

10

10

10

10

10

10

10-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1347 OF 4699


10.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

10.1.1 Setting Measurement Time and Cycle 1


„ Measurement time
To set the measurement time, enter the total time to obtain actual absorbance data values. The input
1
range is from 1 to 9999 seconds (minutes).
However, when performing multi-cell measurement with multi-cell holder, the lower limit of the range is
determined by the number of drive cells.
1

1
Input range

1
Fig. 10.2 Measurement Parameters Configuration screen

„ Cycle (measurement cycle) 10


Specify the interval (measurement cycle) to acquire measurement data.
The unit of the measurement cycle follows the setting specified in [5. Time scale] in the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen.
If [Integer input] is selected, the cycle input range is as given in the following:
When "Measurement time" < 2001 sec. (min.): Integers from 1 to 1000 10
When "Measurement time" 2001 sec. (min.): Integers from (Measurement time/2000) to 1000

10

10

10

10

10

10

1348 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 10-5


10.2 Measurement
10.2

When the measurement is started from the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 10.1)
10
or Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.4) by pressing the key, the time course change in the
absorbance (transmittance, or energy) starts being plotted on the screen in real time (Fig. 10.3).
10
After the measurement, the Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.4) will be displayed.

10
Elapsed time/ Photometric
value
Indicates the time elapsed after
10 measurement start and the
current absorbance.

10

10

10
1

10
Fig. 10.3 Time Scan Measurement screen during measurement

10
No. Key Operation Description
10 1 Terminates the measurement and switches to the Curve Display
screen (Fig. 10.4).

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1349 OF 4699


10.3 Displaying Time Course Curve
10.3

10.3.1 Curve Display Screen 1


When you complete/terminate measurement, or press the [MeasScrn] key in the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 10.1), the Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.4)
1
appears.
In this screen, you can display, save, and print the waveform within measured or loaded spectrum
1
data.

1
Wavelength/
Photometric value
Indicates the current status.
1

1
Fig. 10.4 Curve Display screen

NOTE 10
The acquired time course data is not yet saved when the measurement has completed. The
time course data will be lost if (1) the next sample measurement is started, (2) another time
course data file is loaded, or (3) the measurement parameters are changed. To save the
acquired time course curve data, press the key.
10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1350 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 10-7


10.3 Displaying Time Course Curve

10 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Zoom] Changing the range of Y-axis and X-axis of


10 displayed time course curve enables zooming of the
time course curve.
^ "10.3.3 Zoom Screen"
10
2 [DataProc] Performs the data processing on measured or
loaded time course data.
10
In the Data Processing screen, the following
processing options are available:
10 Mathematical calculation, derivative processing,
peak detection, area calculation, point pickup and
10 printout.
^ Chapter 13 "Data Processing"
This data processing can only be performed on a
10
single reaction curve. Therefore, for a multiple cell
measurement with multi-cell holder, the Curve Data
10 Selection screen appears for selecting a target curve
(cell No.). Enter the cell No. for the target curve
10 (Input range: 1 to the number of drive cells), and
confirm with the key.

10

10

10

10 Fig. 10.5 Curve Data Selection screen

3 [LoadCurv] Loads a time course data file that is stored in the


10 built-in memory storage or USB memory device.
^ "3.2 Load Files"

10 4 [SavCurve] Saves the acquired reaction curve data to the


memory storage.
^ "3.1 Save Files"
10
– – Prints a hard copy of the screen or the time course
data.
10
^ "10.4 Print Format"

10-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1351 OF 4699


10.3 Displaying Time Course Curve

No. Key Operation Display Description 1


– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 10.1). 1
– – Displays the reading cursor on the graph to read the
data values at any arbitrary sampling point. 1
^ "10.3.2 Reading with Cursor"

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1352 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 10-9


10.3 Displaying Time Course Curve

10 10.3.2 Reading with Cursor


If the or key is pressed in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.4), the reading cursor
appears. Using this reading cursor, you can read the data values at any arbitrary sampling point.
10
Furthermore, for listing or printing data values at multiple sampling points, refer to the description on
the point pick function (^ "13.6 Point Pick"). For printing all data in numeric values, refer to the
10
description on the print processing function (^ "13.7 Print Processing").

10

Reading cursor
10

10

10

10
Time/Abs/Cell
Indicates the wavelength and
photometric value at the current
10 cursor position. Indicates also Cell
No. for multi-cell measurement.

10
Fig. 10.6 Reading with Cursor screen

Key Operation Description


10
Moves the cursor on the time course curve graph and displays the time
and Abs at the cursor position.
10 Holding down the key will move the cursor faster.

Selects a time course data to be read with the cursor.


10 When performing multi cell measurement with multi-cell holder, multiple
reaction curves will be displayed on the graph.
10 Therefore, to review a particular reaction curve, you need to switch the
cell No. and select the target time course data by pressing the
keys.
10
Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed.

10 Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears, and the UV-1800 returns to the
above Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.4).

10

10-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1353 OF 4699


10.3 Displaying Time Course Curve

10.3.3 Zoom Screen 1


When you press the [Zoom] key in the Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.4), the Zoom screen
(Fig. 10.7) will be displayed. The displayed time course curve can be enlarged or reduced by changing
1
the vertical or horizontal axis of the graph (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis).

1
NOTE
If the curve data is overwritten on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
reduction is applied to the last loaded data.
1

10
1 2 3

Fig. 10.7 Zoom Screen

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1354 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 10-11


10.3 Displaying Time Course Curve

10 No. Key Operation Display Description


1 [InputNum] Enlarges or reduces the graph by directly specifying
the vertical or horizontal axis value.
10
Specify the range value at the cursor position with
numeric keys, and confirm it with the key.
10
Each pressing, the key moves the cursor
to [vertical axis upper limit] → [vertical axis lower
10 limit] → [horizontal axis lower limit] → [horizontal
axis upper limit], and finally returns to the Zoom

10 screen (Fig. 10.7).

Cursor
10
Input Range/
Input Value
10 Displays
available input
range and key
input value.
10

10
Fig. 10.8 Zoom Screen

NOTE
10
Data exist only at each measurement cycle.
Therefore, when values other than the integral
multiple of the cycle are entered as horizontal axis
values, the entered values are automatically

10 replaced with the time values nearest to the existing


data values.
2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the
10
displayed reaction curve automatically.
3 [Restore] Restores the display range to the original state.
10
– – Prints the curve data with the zoom operation
applied.
10 ^ "10.4 Print Format"
– – Displays the cursor on the reaction curve graph to
10 activate the cursor reading function.
^ "10.3.2 Reading with Cursor"

10 – – Returns to the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig.


10.4).

10

10-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1355 OF 4699


10.4 Print Format
10.4

The graph of a time course data can be printed out in "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" or "Hard copy of
1
screen ([Screen copy])".
If you wish to output all the data in numeric values, see "13.7 Print Processing".
1

10.4.1 Print Mode


1
When you press the key in the Reaction Curve Display screen (Fig. 10.5), the screen
appears for a print mode from "Print waveform ([Draw curve])" or "Hard copy of screen ([Screen
copy])".
1
Move the cursor to the desired mode with the keys, and confirm the selection with
the key. 1

Cursor 1

Fig. 10.9 [Print mode] screen 1

„ Print waveform ([Draw curve])


1
Waveforms and measurement parameters in a time course data are printed.
(^ "10.4.2 Waveform Format")
For a commercially available printer, the screen for selecting a grid type for graph output is displayed. 1
Move the cursor to the desired grid type with the keys, and confirm the selection
with the key. 10

Cursor

10
Fig. 10.10 [Frame Type] Selection screen

When the grid type is confirmed, the measured or loaded reaction curve and the parameters are 10
printed out.

10
„ Hard copy of screen ([Screen copy])
The current screen image when the key is pressed will be printed in the same size.
10

10

10

10

1356 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 10-13


10.4 Print Format

10 10.4.2 Waveform Format


The print format for "Print waveform" varies according to the connected printer for output.
The following shows examples of printouts using different types of printers.
10

„ Output to a hard-copy printer


10

10

10
Screen hard copy
The screen hard copy
excluding the title row and
10 function row

10

10

Measurement end date


10
Measurement parameters

10

Fig. 10.11 Example of waveform printout (with hard copy printer)

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1357 OF 4699


10.4 Print Format

„ Output to a commercially available printer 1

1
Measurement end date

Measurement parameters 1

10
Fig. 10.12 Example of waveform printout (with commercially available printer)

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1358 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 10-15


1
11 Multi-component Quantitation

Chapter 11 Multi- 1

component Quantitation 1

CONTENTS
1
11.1 Multi-component Quantitation.......................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 11-3 1
11.3 Standard Sample Data .................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.4 Measurement of Unknown Sample ............................................................................................... 11-16
11.5 Data Display .................................................................................................................................. 11-19 11
11.6 Spectrum Display screen............................................................................................................... 11-21

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

1359 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-1


11.1 Multi-component Quantitation
11.1

The multi-component quantitation mode is the mode in which the concentration of each constituent
11
component is determined by using the absorption spectrum of the mixed sample with pure standards
or standards made up of multiple constituent components.
11
1) Mixed samples with up to 8 constituent components can be quantitated.
2) In addition to using pure samples of each constituent component as the standard samples, a
11 mixed sample in which the concentration of each constituent component is known may also be
used.
The effects of interference among the various constituent components can be minimized by using
11 a mixed sample as the standard sample.
3) Parameter files for this mode store measurement parameters and standard sample data, making
their file size relatively large. Therefore they can only be saved by using a USB memory device.
11
In addition, a spectrum saved in memory can be loaded and used as the standard sample (^
"11.3 Standard Sample Data") or unknown sample data (^ "11.4 Measurement of Unknown
Sample"). However, unlike other parameter files, these can only be saved one at a time.
11
4) The measurement wavelengths can be set at uniform intervals or randomly set.

11
NOTE
11 1) If Multi-component quantitation calculation cannot be performed, e.g. due to an unsuitable
standard sample, the error message "Multi-component calculation error" will be displayed
on the screen.
11

11

11

2) If a sample whose absorbance is virtually zero, or a sample with a closely similar absorption
11 spectrum shape is used as the standard sample, isolation quantitation calculations may not be
properly be performed or accurate values may not be found.
3) If a mixed sample with 4 or more constituent components is used as the standard sample, it is
11 highly probable that isolation quantitation calculations will not be properly performed.

11

11

11

11

11

11-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1360 OF 4699


11.2 11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

When you select [6. Multi-Component] in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the Measurement
1
Parameter Configuration screen is displayed (Fig. 11.1). Set the parameters by pressing the numeric
keys corresponding to the item numbers on the screen.
1

Set wavelength/ Absorbance


Indicates Abs measured at the 1
1 currently set wavelength.
2
3 1
4
5
6 1
7
8
1
9
d
1

0 a b c
1
Fig. 11.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

1
Key
No. Display Description
Operation 1
1 [Scan range] Enter the wavelength range over which the
absorbance will be measured. 11
The input range is from 190 nm to 1100 nm (in units of
1 nm).
The scan pitch will be automatically determined by the
scan range specified here.
11
Table 11.1 The relation between scan range
and scan pitch
Scan Range (nm) (Start 11
wavelength-End Scan Pitch
wavelength)
11
910 nm ≥ (Scan range) 1.0 nm ≥ 500 nm
500 nm > (Scan range) 0.5 nm ≥ 200 nm
200 nm > (Scan range) 0.2 nm ≥ 100 nm 11
100 nm > (Scan range) 0.1 nm

2 [Rec. range] Enter the range for the vertical axis (-4.000 to 4.000) 11
when displaying the absorption spectrum on screen for
a standard sample measurement or unknown sample 11
measurement.

11

1361 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-3


11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

11 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

3 [Scan speed] Set the wavelength scanning speed from among 4


11
levels (Fast, Medium, Slow, Very Slow).

4 [Display mode] Select whether to overlay absorption spectra for


11
standards or unknown samples, or rewrite the
spectrum for each measurement.
11 Each pressing of the key toggles between [Overlay]
and [Rewrite].
11 5 [No. of Enter the number of components that comprise the
component] mixed sample. The entry range is from 2 to 8
11 components.
The number of constituent components is related to
both [6. Standard type] and [7. No. of Standard].
11
If it becomes necessary to change the No. of
standards because there has been a change in the No.
11 of components, you will be instructed on screen to
"Change param".
11 In addition, if [6. Standard type] is set to "Pure", [7. No.
of Standard] will automatically be overwritten with the
same number as the No. of components.
11
6 [Standard type] Select whether the standard sample is a pure sample
made from a single component or a mixed sample of
11
known concentrations of more than one component.
Move the cursor with keys and
confirm the selection with the key.

11

11 Fig. 11.2 [Standard type] Selection screen

5 [No. of Standard] Enter the number of standard samples.


11 For a pure sample, the number will be automatically
entered with the same number as the No. of
11 components.
For a mixed sample, the input range is from (No. of
components + 1) to 16.
11

11

11

11-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1362 OF 4699


11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
1
Operation

8 [Meas. λ] Select the wavelength for measurement of standards


1
and unknowns. The concentration of the sample will
be calculated from the absorbance at specified
1
measurement wavelengths in the spectrum.
Select [8. Meas. λ] to review the currently set
wavelength. 1

1
Fig. 11.3 Set Wavelength Review screen
1
To modify wavelength values, press the
[Input λ] key while this screen is displayed.
1
^ "11.2.1 Input Measurement Wavelength"
Press the key to return to the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen. 11
9 [Standard data] Enter the standard sample concentrations to measure
the standard sample absorbance spectra.
^ "11.3 Standard Sample Data"

0 [BaseCorr] Used to correct the baseline under the specified 11


conditions.

a [SmplCompt] Used to set the sample module. The setting items 11


include the sample module type and the operating
conditions of the sipper.
11
^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control (Multi-cell,
Sipper Operation)"
11
NOTE
Multi-cell measurement with multi-cell holder is not
available in the Multi-component Quantitation 11
Mode.
b [MeasScrn] Switches to the Component Concentration screen (Fig. 11
11.15).

11

1363 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-5


11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

11 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

c [SavParam] Saves the current set parameters as a parameter file.


11
^ "3.1 Save Files"

11 NOTE
The parameter file for the Multi-component
Quantitation Mode cannot be saved to the built-in
11 memory since the file size is too large. Please use a
USB memory device when saving the parameter
11 file.
d – Switches to the Measurement screen and starts the
11 measurement.

– – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1).

11
11.2.1 Input Measurement Wavelength
11 You can enter wavelengths by setting an equal interval using the starting wavelength (long
wavelength) as a standard or by numerically entering any desired wavelength values.
When the [Input λ] key is pressed on the Set Wavelength Review screen (Fig. 11.3), the
11
screen for selecting the input method is displayed (Fig. 11.4).
Move the cursor with the keys and confirm the selection with the key.
11

11

Fig. 11.4 [Input of Meas. λ] screen

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1364 OF 4699


11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

„ Manual Input (Entering Wavelength Values Arbitrarily) 1


When you select [Manual input] in Fig. 11.4, Fig. 11.5 will be displayed.

1 Refer to the input range displayed at the screen


bottom and enter the desired number of wavelengths
Cursor 1

with numeric keys. (The entered value will be


1
displayed at the cursor position.)

No. of wavelengths at the last


NOTE measurement 1
When using pure standards, skip to the next
Available No. of wavelengths
procedure, which is the setting on the Desired This range is determined by the numbers of components
Wavelength Input screen. and standards specified in the Parameter Congifugraion
1
screen.
Lower limit: (No. of components)
Press the key to confirm the input number of Upper limit: (No. of standards) - 1
1
wavelengths.
Fig. 11.5 Input of Number of Meas.λ screen
1

2 The Desired Wavelength Input screen is displayed.


Enter desired wavelength values with numeric keys. 1
(The entered value will be displayed at the cursor
position.)
1

NOTE
You cannot enter two or more of the same 1
wavelength, or wavelengths that are not integral
multiples of the scan pitch.
Cursor
11
Press the key to confirm the input number of
Wavelength input range
wavelengths. The input range is the wavelength range specified in the
Parameter Configuration screen.

Fig. 11.6 Input Range of Meas.λ screen 11

11
3 Repeat procedure 2 until you finish entering all
wavelength values for the specified number of points.
The display will return to the Parameter Configuration 11
screen (Fig. 11.1). ("Defined" will be displayed in [8.
Meas. λ].)
11

11

11

11

1365 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-7


11.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen

11 „ Even Interval (Acquiring Data at Even Intervals)


The screen for specifying a measurement wavelength interval is displayed.

11
1 Enter the desired wavelength interval with numeric
keys. The value will be displayed at the cursor
position at the bottom of the screen. The minimum
11
input unit for the interval is 1 nm.

11 * The wavelength intervals are determined by measurement


wavelength range, No. of components, and No. of standards.For
pure sample (the minimum unit of 1 nm)
11 Lower limit: Wavelength range/No. of components + 1 nm
Upper limit: Wavelength range/(No. of components - 1) nm
Example)
Wavelength range: 700 nm to 400 nm, No. of components: 5 →
11 The specifiable minimum value: 61 nm, and the maximum Available wavelength Indicates the last wavelength
value: 75 nm. interval range* interval at the last measurement.
• For mixed sample (the minimum unit of 1 nm)
Lower limit: Wavelength range/(No. of standards- 1) + 1 nm
11 Upper limit: Wavelength range/(No. of components- 1) nm
Example) Fig. 11.7 Wavelength Interval Input screen
Wavelength range: 700 nm to 400 nm, No. of components: 5 →
11 The specifiable minimum value: 34 nm, and the maximum
value: 75 nm.

11
2 Press the key and the measurement
wavelengths will be automatically set in even
11 intervals starting from the start wavelength (the
longest wavelength in the scan range).
Approximately 2 seconds after the wavelengths are
11 listed, the display returns to the Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 11.1). ("Defined" will be
displayed in [8. Meas. λ].)

11
Fig. 11.8 Example of wavelength definition

11

11

11

11

11

11

11-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1366 OF 4699


11.3 11.3 Standard Sample Data

When you select [9. Standard data] in the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 11.1), a standard
1
sample concentration input screen will be displayed.
In this screen, you will enter standard sample concentrations, and load the absorbances at specified
1
wavelengths (Fig. 11.1 [8. Meas.λ]).
You can load the standard sample absorbances from actually measured data or existing spectrum
data files. 1
In either case, however, parameters [1.] through [8.] must be set in the Parameter Configuration
screen beforehand. 1
The Concentration Input screen differs depending on whether the standard sample is pure or mixed.

1
Asterisk
Indicates that the
measurement has been Cursor
completed. 1

1
Standard
(Component) No.
1
5 4

1
1 2 3

(Pure sample) 11

Standard No.

Component No.
11

Cursor 11
Asterisk
Indicates that the
measurement has been 11
completed

11

(Mixed sample) 11
Fig. 11.9 Standard Sample Data Input screen

11

11

1367 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-9


11.3 Standard Sample Data

11 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Curve] Switches to the Spectrum Display screen where you


11 can confirm the spectral waveform.
^ "11.6 Spectrum Display screen"
Additionally, by using the [LoadCurv] function from
11
the Spectrum Display screen, you can specify
spectrum data files stored in the built-in memory or
11 USB memory as standard sample data.
^ "11.3.3 Loading from Spectrum (Curve) Data
11 File"

NOTE
11 You can load only spectrum data under
parameters identical to the current parameter
settings (Scan range, Measurement mode, and
11
Scan pitch).
2 [InptConc] Switches to the Concentration Input screen.
11
^ "11.3.1 Entering Concentration"

3 [Calc.] Calculates the parameters for quantitation after all


11
the standard data are entered and measured.
Upon completion of calculation, a message is
11 displayed.
After that, the Measurement (Fig. 11.1) Parameter

11 Configuration screen will be displayed.

4 – Switches to the Measurement screen and starts


standard sample measurement.

5 – Moves the cursor on the component (standard


sample) column.
11
– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 11.1).
11

11

11

11

11

11

11-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1368 OF 4699


11.3 Standard Sample Data

11.3.1 Entering Concentration 1


The procedure for entering standard sample concentrations is as follows:

1
1 In the Standard Sample Data Input screen (Fig. 11.9),
move the cursor by pressing the
keys ( keys for mixed sample) to the 1
position of the component (standard sample) whose
concentration is to be entered. Then, press the
[InptConc] key. 1

2 The concentration column of the standard sample


selected in procedure 1 will be highlighted (Fig.
1

11.10). Input the concentration using the numeric


keys. 1

3 Press the key to reflect the input


concentration on the concentration table. The
1

concentration column for the next component will


then be highlighted. 1

(Pure sample) 1
NOTE
If the key is pressed without inputting any
concentration value, no change is made to the 1
existing concentration, and the concentration column
for the next component is highlighted.
After the concentration of Component 3 is confirmed, 11
the cursor returns to Component 1 in the case of
example in Fig. 11.10.

4 After all concentrations are confirmed, press the


key to return to the Standard Sample Data 11
Input screen (Fig. 11.9).
11

11

11

(Mixed sample)
11
Fig. 11.10 Concentration Input screen

11

11

1369 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-11


11.3 Standard Sample Data

11 11.3.2 Loading Absorbance


Next, measure the standard sample at the wavelength range specified in the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 11.1).
11 To perform baseline correction, press the [BaseCorr] key in the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 11.1).
The following is the procedure for loading absorbance:
11

11
1 In the Standard Sample Data Input screen (Fig. 11.9),
move the cursor by pressing the
keys ( keys for mixed sample) to the
position of the component (standard sample) to be
11 measured.

11 2 Place the standard sample in the sample


compartment, and press the key. The
Measurement screen (Fig. 11.11) appears and the
11 measurement begins.

11 NOTE
If the key is pressed during measurement,
the measurement is terminated and the currently
11 obtained data is discarded.

11 Fig. 11.11 Screen during measurement

11 3 After the measurement is completed, the absorbance


at the specified wavelength (Fig. 11.1 [8. Meas. ]) is
automatically loaded and the Data Input screen
appears.
The component (standard sample) already measured
is marked with "*".
11
NOTE
11 When the next measurement is started, the
previously measured spectrum data (curve data) is
discarded. If you wish to save the curve data, press
(Pure sample)
11 the key to perform the saving operation.
^ "11.6 Spectrum Display screen"

11

11

11

11

11-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1370 OF 4699


11.3 Standard Sample Data

4 Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for each standard


sample, and after all measurements are completed,
1
press the [Calc.] key.
Upon completion of calculation, a message is 1
displayed.
Press the key to return to the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen. 1

(Mixed sample) 1
Fig. 11.12 Standard Sample Data
Input screen 1

5 The Measurement Parameter Configuration screen


(Fig. 11.1) appears, and the [9. Standard data] column 1
is indicated with "Defined".

1
11.3.3 Loading from Spectrum (Curve) Data File
Instead of performing actual measurement, you can load the absorbance at the specified wavelength
1
(Fig. 11.1 [8. Meas.λ]) from the standard sample spectrum data (curve data) stored in the built-in
memory or USB memory.
11

NOTE
You can load only spectrum data (curve data) acquired under the same parameter values (scan
range, photometric mode, and scan pitch) as those currently set.
11

11

11

11

11

11

11

1371 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-13


11.3 Standard Sample Data

The following is the procedure for the operation:


11

11 1 In the Standard Sample Data Input screen (Fig. 11.9),


move the cursor by pressing the
keys to the position of the component (standard
11 sample) to which the data is to be loaded.
Press the [Curve] key.

11
2 The Spectrum Display screen appears. Press the
[LoadCurv] key to load the desired curve
data.
11
^ "3.2 Load Files"

11

11

11
Fig. 11.13 Screen during measurement

11 3 When the curve data is loaded, the data (absorbance


at the wavelength specified in Fig. 11.1 [8. Meas.λ]) is
automatically imported. Then the Standard Sample
11 Data Input screen appears with the data reflected in
the list.
The component (standard sample) to which the data
11 has been loaded is indicated with "*".

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1372 OF 4699


11.3 Standard Sample Data

4 Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for each standard


sample, and after all measurements are completed,
1
press the [Calc.] key.
1
Upon completion of calculation, a message is
displayed.
Press the key to return to the Measurement 1
Parameter Configuration screen.
1

(Pure sample) 1

(Mixed sample)
1
Fig. 11.14 Standard Sample Data
Input screen
11

5 The Measurement Parameter Configuration screen


(Fig. 11.1) appears, and the [9. Standard data] column
is indicated with "Defined".
11

11

11

11

11

11

11

1373 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-15


11.4 11.4 Measurement of Unknown Sample

11.4.1 Measurement Screen 1


After you finish setting quantitation parameters, press the [MeasDisp] key to switch the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 11.1) into the Component Concentration screen
1
(Fig. 11.13).

1
Set an unknown sample and press key. Then the Spectrum Display screen comes up and
the measurement begins. After setting quantitation parameters are completed, you can start the
measurement by hitting key in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 1
11.1).
When the measurement is over, the display turns to the Component Concentration screen (Fig. 1
11.15), and the concentration of each component in the unknown sample. If an optional screen copy
printer is connected to the UV-1800, the result output will be printed when each of the sample
1
measurements is complete (^ "11.4.2 Data Print for Each Measurement").

1
Set wavelength/
Absorbance
Indicates Abs measured at the
Sample No.
currently set wavelength. 1

1
Concentration
Component No.
(When the sample consists
of 3 components) 1

11
5 6

1 2 3 4

Fig. 11.15 Component Concentration screen 11

11
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Smpl No.] Used to change the sample number for the next
measurement.
11
The sample number can be selected from 0 to
9999. 11

11

11

11

1374 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-16


11.4 Measurement of Unknown Sample

No. Key Operation Display Description 1


2 [Curve] Switches to the Spectrum Display screen on
which you can confirm and save the spectral 1
waveform of the unknown sample. ^ "11.6
Spectrum Display screen"
1
Additionally, by loading spectrum data files
stored in the built-in memory or USB memory in
the Spectrum Display screen, the concentration 1
for each component is calculated and displayed
in the Component Concentration screen, just as 1
if using actually measured data.

NOTE 1
You can load only the spectrum data under
identical parameters to the current parameter
1
settings (Scan range, Measurement mode,
and Scan pitch).
1
3 [DataDisp] Displays the data list of measurement data (Fig.
11.17). ^ "11.5.1 Data Display Screen"
1
4 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data
file to the memory storage.
^ "3.1 Save Files" 1
5 – Starts the measurement of unknown sample.

NOTE 11
A maximum of 200 measurements can be
performed as a single table data file.
6 – Deletes all the data displayed on the screen.

– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter 11


Configuration screen (Fig. 11.1).

11

11

11

11

11

11

1375 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-17


11.4 Measurement of Unknown Sample

11 11.4.2 Data Print for Each Measurement


If a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed on the
printer for every measurement.
11
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
parameters are printed.
11

Date and time when the first


11 Header Part measurement was completed

11 Component No.

First Measurement
11
Sample No.

11
Fig. 11.16 Example of data printout for each measurement

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1376 OF 4699


11.5 11.5 Data Display

11.5.1 Data Display Screen 1


When you press the [DataDisp] key in the Component Concentration screen (Fig. 11.15), the
Data Display screen (Fig. 11.17) will be displayed.
1
In this screen, you can browse through all quantitation results obtained up to that point.
Additionally, you can load the data from the built-in memory or USB memory, and print the quantitation
1
results all at once.

Data list 1
Displays the quantitation
results for an unknown
sample.
1

3 Page number 1
Indicates "current page/ total
pages".

1 2 1

Fig. 11.17 Data Display screen


1

No. Key Operation Display Description 11


1 [PrntData] Prints all data displayed in the list.
^ "11.5.2 Data Printout"

2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.


^ "3.2.1 Load Single File" 11
3 – Allows scrolling the data table for each sample.

– – Returns to the Component Concentration screen 11


(Fig. 11.15).

11

11

11

11

11

1377 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-19


11.5 Data Display

11 11.5.2 Data Printout


The entire data can be printed out as a numeric data table on the printer (optional).
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
11
parameters are printed.

11
NOTE
11 Pressing the key on the keypad will produce only a hard copy of the screen.

11
Date and time when the first
measurement was completed
Header Part
11
Component No.
11
First Measurement

11
Sample No.

11 Fig. 11.18 Example of data printout for each measurement

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1378 OF 4699


11.6 11.6 Spectrum Display screen

When you press the [Curve] key on the Standard Sample Data Input screen (Fig. 11.9) or
1
the Component Concentration screen, the Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 11.19) will be displayed.

1
5

1
1 2 3 4

Fig. 11.19 Spectrum Display screen


1

1
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Zoom] Allows changing the ranges of the vertical and


horizontal axes. 1
^ "11.6.2 Zoom Screen"

2 [DataList] Returns to the screen on which the current spectrum 11


was called up (Standard Sample Data Input screen
(Fig. 11.9) or Component Concentration screen (Fig.
11.15)).

3 [LoadCurv] Loads a curve data file stored in the memory 11


storage.
^ "3.2 Load Files"
11
The loaded spectrum data can be used as standard
or unknown sample data for isolation quantitation
calculation. 11
4 [SavCurve] Saves measured spectrum data to the built-in
memory storage or USB memory device. 11
^ "3.1 Save Files"

5 [Review Deletes the spectral waveform displayed on the 11


Screen] screen.

– – Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed. 11

11

1379 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-21


11.6 Spectrum Display screen

11 No. Key Operation Display Description

– – Displays the cursor on the graph and enables the


11 cursor reading of the data.

– – Returns to the screen on which the current spectrum

11 was called up (Standard Sample Data Input screen


(Fig. 11.9) or Component Concentration screen (Fig.
11.15)).
11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1380 OF 4699


11.6 Spectrum Display screen

11.6.1 Reading with Cursor 1


When you press the or key in the Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 11.19), the
Reading with Cursor screen (Fig. 11.20) will be displayed.
1
In the Reading with Cursor screen (Fig. 11.20) the spectrum data at given measurement wavelength
can be read with the cursor.
1

1
Reading cursor

Time/Abs 1
Indicates the wavelength and
photometric value at the current cursor
position.
1
Fig. 11.20 Reading with Cursor screen
1

Key Operation Description


11
Moves the cursor on the spectrum graph and displays the time and Abs
at the cursor position.
Holding down the key will move the cursor faster.

Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed.


11
Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears and the UV-1800 returns to the
above Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 11.19).
11

11

11

11

11

11

1381 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-23


11.6 Spectrum Display screen

11 11.6.2 Zoom Screen


When you press the [Zoom] key in the Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 11.19), the Zoom
screen (Fig. 11.21) will be displayed.
11
The displayed spectrum graph can be enlarged or reduced by changing the vertical or horizontal axis
of the spectrum (only enlarged by changing the horizontal axis).
11

11 NOTE
1. If the curve data is overwritten on the screen using the curve call function, the enlargement or
reduction is applied to the last loaded data.
11
2. If the measurement result is overwritten, the enlargement or reduction is applied to the last
measurement data.
11

11

11

11

11

11

1 2 3

Fig. 11.21 Zoom Screen


11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11-24 UV-1800 SERIES 1382 OF 4699


11.6 Spectrum Display screen

No. Key Operation Display Description 1


1 [InputNum] Enlarges or reduces the graph by directly specifying
the vertical or horizontal axis range. 1
Specify the range value at the cursor position with
numeric keys, and confirm it with the key.
1
Each pressing of the key moves the cursor
to [vertical axis upper limit]→[vertical axis lower
limit]→[horizontal axis lower limit]→[horizontal axis 1
upper limit], and finally returns to the Zoom screen
(Fig. 11.22). 1

Cursor
1
Input range
Input value
Displays 1
available input
range and key
input value.
1

Fig. 11.22 Zoom Screen 1

2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the


displayed spectrum automatically. 1
3 [Restore] Restores the display range to the original state.

– – Produces a hard copy of the screen with the zoom


11
operation applied.

– – Displays the cursor on the spectrum graph to


activate the cursor reading function.
^ "11.6.1 Reading with Cursor" 11
– – Returns to the Spectrum Display screen (Fig. 11.19).
11

11

11

11

11

11

1383 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 11-25


12
12 Bio-method

12

Chapter 12 Bio-method 1

1
The Bio-method mode allows you to obtain the DNA and protein concentrations with various quantitation
methods. 1
CONTENTS
1
12.1 Bio-method Selection ...................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 DNA Quantitation............................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB Method, and Biuret Method .................................................... 12-14 1
12.4 UV Absorption Method .................................................................................................................. 12-16

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

1384 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-1


12.1 Bio-method Selection
12.1

When you select [7.Bio-Method] in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the screen for selecting a
1212
quantitation method appears (Fig. 12.1). Select the item number for a desired method with numeric
keys while the selection screen (Fig. 12.1) is displayed.
1212

12
1
12 2
3
4
12 5
6

12

12

Fig. 12.1 Bio-Method Selection screen


12

No. Key Operation Display Description


12
1 [DNA [DNA Quantitation] performs measurement at
Quantitation] specified two to three fixed wavelengths and
12
obtains the concentration of DNA and proteins,
and absorbance ratio, based on the measured
12 absorbances.

12 You can choose any wavelength for


measurements, including the most commonly
used wavelengths (260 nm/ 230 nm or 260 nm/
280 nm). You can add measurements at a
wavelength of 320 nm for back ground
12 correction. You can also set the desired
parameters for calculating the DNA and protein
12 concentrations in samples.
^ "12.2 DNA Quantitation"

12 2 [Lowry Method] This method offers excellent sensitivity and


reproducibility. Based on reactions to tyrosine
and tryptophan, this method utilizes different
12
absorbance values depending on the type of
protein measured, even if the amount of protein
12 is the same.
^ "12.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB
12 Method, and Biuret Method"

12-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1385 OF 4699


12.1 Bio-method Selection

No. Key Operation Display Description 12


3 [BCA Method] This method measures the absorbance at a
wavelength of 562 nm using a reagent called 12
Bicinchoninic Acid. You must take into
consideration that the absorbance is known to
1
increase with time when this method is used.
^ "12.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB
Method, and Biuret Method" 1

4 [CBB Method This method measures the absorbance at a


(Bradford wavelength of 595 nm using a reagent called 1
Method)] Coomassie Brilliant Blue G-250.
^ "12.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB 1
Method, and Biuret Method"

5 [Biuret Method] This method is based on the unique peptide 1


linkage of protein as well as the Biuret reaction
which involves the formation of a colored
1
compound with copper reagent. This method
offers a fast and easy determination of protein
concentration. The drawback is its low 1
sensitivity. In this method, absorbance is
normally measured at a wavelength of 540 to 1
560 nm.
^ "12.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB
1
Method, and Biuret Method"

6 [UV Method] This method determines protein concentration


12
directly from absorbance value and absorptivity
in the ultraviolet region, without using any color
reagent. This method normally measures
absorbance at a wavelength of 280 nm.
^ "12.4 UV Absorption Method" 12
For details on the quantitation methods described above, refer to the following references.
1. Warberg, O., and Christian, W. (1942) Biochem.Z.310, 384-421. 12
2. Vernon F. Kalb, Jr., and Robert W. Bernlohr (1977) Anal. Biochem. 82, 362-371.
3. Gornall, A.G., Bradawill, C. J. & David, M.M. (1949) J. Biol. Chem. 177, 751-766.
4. Lowry, O. H., Rosebrough, N. J., Farr, A. I. & Randall, R. J. (1951) J. Biol. Chem. 193, 265-275.
12
5. Bradford, M. M. (1976) Anal. Biochem. 72, 248-254.
6. Smith, P. K., Krohn, R. I., Hermanson, G. T., Mallia, A. K., Gartner, F. H., Provenzano, M. D., 12
Fujimoto, E. K., Goeke, N. M., Olson, B. J. & Klenk, D. C. (1985) Anal. Biochem. 150, 76-85.

12

12

1386 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-3


12.2 DNA Quantitation
12.2

1212 12.2.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen


When you select [1. DNA Quantitation] in the Bio-Method Selection screen (Fig. 12.1), the
Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 12.2) is displayed as follows.
1212
In the DNA quantitation, the following equations are used to calculate DNA and protein
concentrations:
12
Absorbance ratio = A1/A2
12 DNA = K1 × A1 - K2 × A2 [µg/ml] (Equation 12.1)
Protein = K3 × A2 - K4 × A 1[µg/ml]
12
K1 to K4: Factors
A1: Absorbance at wavelength λ1 (Subtract absorbance at wavelength λb when performing BG
12
correction.)
A2: Absorbance at wavelength λ2 (Subtract absorbance at wavelength λb when performing BG
12
correction.)
The factors used in equation 12.1 and wavelength values for measuring absorbance can be set in the
12 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 12.2).

12
Set wavelength/
Absorbance
12 1 Displays the current status.
2
3
12

12

12
4 5 6 7
12 Fig. 12.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

12

12

12

12

12-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1387 OF 4699


12.2 DNA Quantitation

No.
Key
Display Description
12
Operation

1 [λ] Sets the desired wavelength.


12
^ "12.2.2 λ (Wavelength)"

2 [BG Corr.] Indicates whether or not to perform the background


1
correction.
Background correction is performed by subtracting
absorbance λb from absorbances λ1 and λ2 set in [1. λ]. 1
Each pressing of the key toggles between ON/OFF of the
background correction. 1

Specify the wavelength (λb) for background correction in


1
the item [1. λ].

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

1388 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-5


12.2 DNA Quantitation

1212 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

3 [Factor] Specifies the equation factors:


1212
For [3. Manual Input], the input range is from - 9999.9 to
12 9999.9. The minimum input unit is 0.0001 (the number of
significant figures is 5).

12

12

12

12
Fig. 12.3 Factor Selection screen

The equations used for calculating DNA and protein


12
concentrations (Equation 12.1) are formulated to
eliminate mutual interference, which means that the
equation factors will be automatically determined once
12
two measurement wavelengths (λ1, λ2) are defined.
Table 12.1 Measurement wavelength and factor in the
12 concentration equation (optical pass length: 10 mm)
K1 K2 K3 K4
λ1: 260.0 nm
12 49.1 3.48 183 75.8
λ2: 230.0 nm
λ1: 260.0 nm
62.9 36.0 1552 757.3
12 λ2: 280.0 nm

Therefore, if you select wavelengths in [λ] of the


Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig.
12.2), the factors are automatically set.
However, the wavelength-factor relationship described in
12 Table 12.1 applies only when using the cell with optical
path length of 10 mm. Therefore, when using a different
12 cell, it is required to select the [Manual Input]
key to input corrected factors.
For manual input, the input range is from "- 9999.9 to
12
9999.9" and the lowest digit is "0.0001" (5 significant
figures).
Example) When optical path length l = 5 mm,
12
10/ l = 2
Thus, the corrected factors (Kn') can be obtained as
follows:
12
K1' = K1 × 2, K2' = K2 × 2, K3' = K3 × 2, K4' = K4 × 2

12

12-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1389 OF 4699


12.2 DNA Quantitation

No.
Key
Display Description
12
Operation

4 [BaseCorr] Select this to a baseline correction over the range


12
covering all selected wavelengths, using a blank sample.

5 [SmplCmpt] Sets the parameters for the sample module. The setting
1
items inlluce the sample module, type, the number of
cells, and the operating conditions of the sipper.
^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, 1
Sipper Operation)"

6 [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen. 1


7 [SavParam] Saves measurement parameters, including the
calibration curve equation to the built-in memory storage 1
or USB memory device.
^ "3.1 Save Files" 1
8 – Starts the measurement under the set parameters and
displays the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.6). 1
^ "12.2.3 Measurement"

9 – Returns to the Bio-method Selection screen (Fig. 12.1).


1

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

1390 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-7


12.2 DNA Quantitation

1212 12.2.2 λ (Wavelength)


When you select [λ] in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen, the λ (Wavelength)
Selection screen is displayed (Fig. 12.4).
1212
Select the measurement wavelengths at which to measure A1 and A2 used in Equation 12.1. You can
select one of the most frequently used combinations of wavelengths, or input arbitrary wavelengths
12
manually.

12
1
12
2

12 3

12

12

12 Fig. 12.4 λ (Wavelength) Selection screen

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1391 OF 4699


12.2 DNA Quantitation

No.
Key
Display Description
12
Operation

1 [λ1=260.0 nm Specifies the wavelengths (shown in the left) displayed in


12
λ2=230.0 nm] the Selection screen (Fig. 12.4) as measurement
[ λb=320.0 nm] wavelengths.
1

NOTE
If the wavelength combination described above is selected, 1
the factors suitable for the wavelengths are automatically
set. 1
^ "12.2.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration
Screen" [3. Factor]
1
2 [λ1=260.0 nm Specifies the wavelengths (shown in the left) displayed in
λ2=280.0 nm] the Selection screen (Fig. 12.4) as measurement
1
[ λb=320.0 nm] wavelengths.

1
NOTE
If the wavelength combination described above is selected,
the factors suitable for the wavelengths are automatically 1
set.
^ "12.2.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration 1
Screen" [3. Factor]

3 [Manual Input] Allows you to manually input measurement wavelengths


1
(λ1, λ2, λb) using the numeric keys.
The input range is from 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm (in units of
0.1 nm). 12

12

12

12

Fig. 12.5 Measurement Wavelength Manual Input Screen


12

12

12

1392 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-9


12.2 DNA Quantitation

1212 12.2.3 Measurement


After selecting all the parameters in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 12.2),
press to start measurement. After the measurement, the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.6)
1212
displays the sample No., absorbance values A1, A2, and Ab, absorbance ratio A1/A2 and DNA and
protein concentrations.
12
If overflow occurs because A1 is divided by A2=0, "####" will appear on the screen.
If a hard copy printer is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed on the
12 printer for every sample measurement. ^ "12.2.5 Printout (Output)"

12 Wavelength/Photometric
Sample No. value
The assignment rule for Indicates the current status.
12 the number varies
according to the cell Absorbance
holder used.* Indicates the measurement
values at λ1, λ2, λB.
12
Absorbance ratio
Calculation results
12

12 4 5

12 1 2 3

* The display format of sample No. varies according to the set measurement parameters.
12 „ When measuring a single cell or using the Multi-cell (optional) with the parameter of "Drive cell No." set to "1".
The sample numbers are assigned from 1 sequentially.

„ When measuring multiple cells by attaching the Multi-cell (optional), etc.


12 A hyphen (-) and cell No. are attached to the sample No.
Example)The first measurement at the cell position "3" => Sample No.: 1-3

Fig. 12.6 Measurement screen

12

12

12

12

12

12

12-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1393 OF 4699


12.2 DNA Quantitation

No. Key Operation Display Description 12


1 [Smpl No.] Changes the next measured sample number by
entering a number in a range between 0 and 12
9999.

2 [DataDisp] Displays the list of measurement data. 1


^ "12.2.4 List Display"

3 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data 1


file to the memory storage.
^ "3.1 Save Files"
1
4 – Starts the measurement under the set
parameters.
1
NOTE
A maximum of 100 measurements can be
entered in a single table data file. 1
5 – Deletes all the data displayed on the screen.

– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter


1
Configuration screen (Fig. 12.2).
1

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

1394 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-11


12.2 DNA Quantitation

1212 12.2.4 List Display


Fig. 12.7 shows the Data Display screen, where all measurement results are displayed. In addition,
you can output those results to the printer all at once, or load the data file stored in the built-in memory
1212
or USB memory.

12

Data display list


12 Displays measurement results
or all data contained in a table
data file. (The data are
displayed from Sample No. 1.)
12

12

12
3 Page number
Indicates "current page/
total pages" of the file list.
12
1 2

Fig. 12.7 List Display screen


12

12 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [PrntData] Prints all data listed on the screen.


12 ^ "12.2.5 Printout (Output)"

2 [LoadData] Loads the table data file stored in the memory


12 storage.
^ "3.2.1 Load Single File"

3 – Allows scrolling the screen. Each pressing of the key


scrolls the screen by 1 sample data set.

12 – – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.6).

12

12

12

12

12

12-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1395 OF 4699


12.2 DNA Quantitation

12.2.5 Printout (Output) 12


Fig. 12.8 shows an example of data printout.
In DNA quantitation, the result can be printed for each measurement, or the entire results can be
12
printed all at once. Both print modes use the same print format.
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
1
parameters are printed.

1
Date and time when the first
measurement was
completed
Header Part 1

First Measurement
1

Fig. 12.8 Example of data printout for each measurement 1

„ Printout for each measurement


If a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed 1
out on the printer for every measurement of the sample.
1
„ Print all at once
When you select the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 12.7), all measurement 12
results up to that point, or all the data within the currently loaded table data file will be printed.

NOTE
Pressing the key in the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.6) or the List Display screen (Fig. 12
12.7) will produce only a hard copy of the displayed screen.
12

12

12

12

12

1396 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-13


Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB Method, and
12.3 12.3

Biuret Method

1212 12.3.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen


When you select [Lowry Method], [BCA Method], [CBB Method], or [Biuret Method] in the Bio-Method
Selection screen (Fig. 12.1), the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen is displayed as
1212
follows.

12
Set wavelength/
Photometric value
Displays the current status.
12

12

12
1
Indicates the selected
12 quantitation method.

12
Fig. 12.9 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (when Lowry method is selected)

12 Except for [0. Reset parameters (defined value)], the items displayed on the screen are identical to
those for the Quantitation Mode. Since all measurement function, etc., are also the same, refer to

12 Chapter 7 "Quantitation" for details on the functions and operation procedures.


This section only describes the parameter configuration functions.

12
No. Key Operation Display Description

12 1 [Reset Resets the measurement parameters to the


parameters pre-defined values.
(Lowry)] ^ "12.3.2 Measurement Parameters
(Defined Values)"

12

12

12

12

12

12

12-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1397 OF 4699


12.3 Lowry Method, BCA Method, CBB Method, and Biuret Method

12.3.2 Measurement Parameters (Defined Values) 12


Table below shows the pre-defined values for each quantitation method. These defined parameters
facilitate the subsequent procedures and can also be arbitrarily modified after the setting.
12
Table 12.2 Measurement Parameters (Defined Values) for Different Bio-Method
1
Quantitation
Lowry method BCA method CBB method Biuret method
method

Measurement 1λ quantitation 1λ quantitation 1λ quantitation 1λ quantitation 1


method

Measurement 500.0 nm 562.0 nm 595.0 nm 540.0 nm 1


wavelength (λ1)

Calibration curve Multi-point Multi-point Multi-point Multi-point 1


method calibration curve calibration curve calibration curve calibration curve
method method method method 1
No. of standards 5 5 5 5

Order of multi- Quadratic Quadratic Quadratic Linear 1


point calibration
curve method
1
Zero intercept No No No No

No. of repetitions 1 1 1 1 1
Unit µg/ml µg/ml µg/ml mg/ml

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

1398 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-15


12.4 UV Absorption Method
12.4

1212 12.4.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen


When you select [6. UV Method] in the Bio-Method Selection screen (Fig. 12.1), the Measurement
Parameter Configuration screen will be displayed as follows.
1212

12

2
12 3
4
5
12

12
1
9
12

6 7 8
12
Fig. 12.10 Measurement Parameter Configuration screen

12
Key
No. Display Description
Operation
12
1 [Reset Resets the changed measurement parameters to the
parameters (UV pre-defined values.
12
method)] „Defines values
Quantitation method Defined values
12 Absorbance coefficient 0.6670
Measurement wavelength 280.0 nm
No. of repetitions 1
Unit mg/ml

12 2 [Abs coefficent] Enter the desired absorptivity for the protein to be


measured.
The input range is from 0.0001 to 99.999 (The number
12
of significant figures is 5)
The concentration can be calculated by (absorbance/
12 absorptivity).
The frequently used absorptivity BSA (bull serum
12 albumin) has been selected as the default setting.

3 [λ] Select the desired wavelength as which to perform


12 quantitative analysis. Normally, set it to 280 nm.
The input range is from 190.0 nm to 1100.0 nm (in
units of 0.1 nm).
12

12-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1399 OF 4699


12.4 UV Absorption Method

No.
Key
Display Description
12
Operation

4 [No. of Meas.] Specifies how many times the same sample is to be


12
measured.
Input range of repetition count: 1 to 10
1
„When the repetition count is set to more than 1
• Standard sample: The measurement is repeatedly
performed and the mean value for absorbance is 1
used.
• Unknown sample: The measurement is repeatedly
performed and both the measured values and mean 1
value are displayed.
To abort the repeating measurement, press the
1
key. In this case, the mean value will not be
calculated.
1
NOTE
If a multi-cell or similar holder is used with the number
of cells set to more than one, the repeating 1
measurement function takes priority. The interlocked
measurement of multiple cells cannot be carried out. 1
5 [Unit] Specifies the concentration unit for the Quantitation
result by selecting one of the following units:
1
None, %, ppm, ppb, g/l, mg/ml, ng/ml, M/L and µg/ml
You can also register the desired unit other than those
1
listed above
^ "12.4.2 Select Concentration Unit"

6 [SmplCmpt] Sets the parameters for the sample module. The 12


setting items include the sample module type, the
number of cells, and the operating conditions of the
sipper.
^ Chapter 18 "Sample Module Control (Multi-cell,
12
Sipper Operation)"

7 [MeasScrn] Switches to the Measurement screen.


12
8 [SavParam] Saves measurement parameters, including the
calibration curve equation.
12
^ "3.1 Save Files"

9 – Starts the measurement under the set parameters and


12
displays the Measurement screen.
^ "12.4.3 Measurement"

– – Returns to the Bio-method Selection screen.


12

12

1400 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-17


12.4 UV Absorption Method

1212 12.4.2 Select Concentration Unit


When you press the [Unit] key in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig.
12.10), the Concentration Unit screen (Fig. 12.11) is displayed.
1212
Move the cursor to a desired concentration unit using the keys, and confirm it with
the key.
12
To use a unit other than those displayed on the list, select [Unit Regist.] on the screen.

12

12
Registered unit
Indicates the unit that has been
Cursor created and registered by the
12 user.

12

12

12
Fig. 12.11 Concentration Unit screen

If [Unit Regist.] is selected, the [Unit Registration] screen appears (Fig. 12.12).
12
Using the keys, move the cursor to desired characters on the
list, and cofirm with the key.
12
Press the [Register] key to register the unit you have entered. The unit will be displayed in
the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 12.10).
12

Cursor
12

12

12

12

Fig. 12.12 [Unit Registration] screen


12

12

12-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1401 OF 4699


12.4 UV Absorption Method

12.4.3 Measurement 12
Press the [DataDisp] key or the key while the Measurement Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 12.10) is displayed. The Measurement screen will appear (Fig. 12.13). If
12
the key is pressed, the first measurement run will be carried out.
It a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed
1
on the printer for every measurement of the sample.

Wavelength/Photometric
1
value
Indicates the current status.
Sample No.* 1
Concentration
Indicates absorbance/
absorbance coefficient. 1

1
Cursor Absorbance
Indicates the sample The number of display digits
No. for the next 5 6 follows the setting. (See 1
measurement. "14.1.2 Decimal Display")

1 2 3 4
1

* The display format of sample No. varies according to the set measurement parameters.
„ When measuring a single cell or using the Multi-cell (optional) with the parameter of "Drive cell No." set to "1". 1
The sample numbers are assigned from 1 sequentially.

„ When measuring multiple cells by attaching the Multi-cell (optional), etc.


A hyphen (-) and cell No. are attached to the sample No. 1
Example)The first measurement at the cell position "3" => Sample No.: 1-3

„ When measurements are repeated


A hyphen (-) and repetition count or "m" signifying a mean value are attached to the sample No. 12
Example)The second measurement of the first sample => Sample No.: 1-2 (1-m for the mean value)

Fig. 12.13 Measurement screen

12
NOTE
The repeating measurement while using a multi-cell or similar holder (optional) with the multiple 12
cells cannot be carried out.

12

12

12

12

1402 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-19


12.4 UV Absorption Method

1212 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

1 [Smpl No.] Changes the next measured sample number by entering


1212
a number in range between 0 and 9999.

2 [Equation] Displays the equation for concentration calculation.


12

12

12

12

12
Fig. 12.14 Concentration equation display

3 [DataDisp] Displays the list of measurement data.


12
^ "12.4.4 List Display"

4 [SaveData] Saves the measurement results as a table data file to the


12
memory storage.
^ "3.1 Save Files"
12 5 – Starts the measurement under the set parameters.
Note: A maximum of 200 measurements can be entered
12 in a single table data file.

6 – Deletes all the data displayed on the screen.


12 – – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration
screen (Fig. 12.9).

12

12

12

12

12

12

12-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1403 OF 4699


12.4 UV Absorption Method

12.4.4 List Display 12


When you press the [DataDisp] key in the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.13), a list of
measurement results is displayed (Fig. 12.15).
12
As the measurement is repeated on the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.13), the data will be scrolled
with only the latest eight measurement results displayed on the screen. The List Display is the function
1
that can display the list of all measurement results.

1
Data display list
Displays measurement
results or all data
contained in a table data 1
file (The data are
displayed from Sample
No. 1.)
1

3 Page number 1
Indicates "current page/
total pages" of the file list.

1
1 2

Fig. 12.15 List Display screen


1

No. Key Operation Display Description 1


1 [PrntData] Print all data listed on the screen.
^ "12.4.5 Printout (Output)" 12
2 [LoadData] Loads a table data file stored in the memory storage.
^ "3.2.1 Load Single File"

3 – Allows scrolling the data table to review the hidden


measurement data. 12
Each pressing of the key scrolls the table by 8 data
lines.
12
– – Returns to the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.13).

12

12

12

12

1404 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 12-21


12.4 UV Absorption Method

1212 12.4.5 Printout (Output)


Fig. 12.16 shows an example of data printout.
In UV absorption method, the result can be printed for each measurement, or the entire results can be
1212
printed all at once. Both print modes use the same print format.
In the header part, the date and time of the end of the first measurement as well as the measurement
12
parameters are printed.

12
Date and time when the first
measurement was completed

12 Header Part

12
First measurement

12

12

Fig. 12.16 Example of data printout for each measurement


12
„ Printout for each measurement
If a hard copy printer (optional) is connected to the UV-1800, the measurement results will be printed
12
out on the printer for every measurement of the sample.

12
„ Print all at once
When you select the [PrntData] key in the List Display screen (Fig. 12.15), all measurement
12 results up to that point, or all the data within the currently loaded table data file will be printed.

NOTE
Pressing the key in the Measurement screen (Fig. 12.6) or the List Display screen (Fig.

12 12.7) will produce only a hard copy of the displayed screen.

12

12

12

12

12

12-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1405 OF 4699


13
13 Data Processing

13

13

Chapter 13 Data 1

Processing 1

1
The data processing function can be used from the Spectrum mode or the Time Scan mode. This function
allows you to apply the following processing options to the measured waveform data: 1
• Mathematical calculation
• Derivative processing (including smoothing)
• Peak detection 1
• Area calculation
• Point pickup
• Printout 1
CONTENTS
1
13.1 Processing Options Screen ............................................................................................................. 13-2
13.2 Arithmetic Operations ...................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.3 Derivative Operations .................................................................................................................... 13-12 13
13.4 Peak Detection .............................................................................................................................. 13-17
13.5 Area Calculation ............................................................................................................................ 13-21
13.6 Point Pick....................................................................................................................................... 13-26
13.7 Print Processing ............................................................................................................................ 13-31

13

13

13

13

13

1406 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-1


13.1 Processing Options Screen
13.1

Upon pressing the [DataProc] key on the Measurement screen (Spectrum mode) or on the
1313
Curve Display screen (Time Scan mode), the Processing Options screen appears.
The last measured data is displayed and can be processed. To process the data that is already stored
1313 in the built-in memory of the main unit or the USB memory, call the corresponding file using the Call
Curve function.
1313 (Multiple waveforms cannot be displayed simultaneously on the Data Processing screen.)

13
Curve graph
Displays the curve data to be
13 processed.

13

13
1~6

13

13 7 8 9 0

Fig. 13.1 Processing Options screen


13

No. Key Operation Display Description


13
1 [Four Allows performing arithmetic operations between
Operations] curve data and values and operation between curve
13
data. However, no data can be calculated if unit
inconsistencies exist between the vertical and
13 horizontal axes.
^ "13.2 Arithmetic Operations"

2 [Derivative] Applies the 1st to 4th order differential operation or


smoothing to the curve data.
13 ^ "13.3 Derivative Operations"

3 [Peak] Detects the peaks or valleys of the curve data and

13 then displays them as a list of values on the vertical


and horizontal axes. Up to 20 peaks or valleys can
be detected.
13
^ "13.4 Peak Detection"

4 [Area Calc.] Calculates the area enclosed by the curve data and
13
the horizontal axis.
^ "13.5 Area Calculation"
13

13-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1407 OF 4699


13.1 Processing Options Screen

No. Key Operation Display Description 13


5 [Point pick] Displays, as a list, values on the vertical axis against
the horizontal axis at arbitrary or constant intervals of 13
the curve data. Up to 20 points can be displayed.
^ "13.6 Point Pick"
13
6 [Data Print] Prints the measurement parameters and the data at
each sampling point on the curve data.
1
^ "13.7 Print Processing"

7 [Zoom] Changing the range of Y-axis and X-axis of


1
displayed curve chart enables enlarging/reducing of
the chart.
^ "13.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing" 1
8 [Undo] Undoes the last data processing. You can undo only
the last operation. This item is only displayed when 1
the undo operation is possible.

9 [LoadCurv] Loads curve data files stored in the memory storage. 1


^ "3.2 Load Files"

0 [SavCurve] Saves processed curve data to the memory storage. 1


^ "3.1 Save Files"

– – Returns to the screen on which this function was 1


celled up.

– – Displays the cursor on the graph to activate the


1
cursor reading function.
^ "13.1.1 Reading with Cursor"
1

13

13

13

13

13

13

1408 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-3


13.1 Processing Options Screen

1313 13.1.1 Reading with Cursor


When you press the or key in the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1) or in the
Operation Result screen displaying the curve data graph, the Reading with Cursor screen (Fig. 13.2)
1313
will be displayed.
In the Reading with Cursor screen (Fig. 13.2), the curve data at a given measurement time can be
1313 read with the cursor.

13

Reading cursor
13

13

13

13
Horizontal value/ Vertical value
Indicates horizontal value
(wavelength or time) and vertical
13 value (photometric value) at the
cursor position.

13 Fig. 13.2 Reading with Cursor screen

13
Key Operation Description

Moves the cursor on the curve graph and displays the horizontal and
13
vertical values.
Holding down the key will move the cursor faster.
13 Prints a hard copy of the screen currently displayed.

Any keys other than the The reading cursor disappears, and the UV-1800 returns to the
above Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1)

13

13

13

13

13

13-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1409 OF 4699


13.1 Processing Options Screen

13.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing 13
When you press the [Zoom] key on the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1), the Zoom
screen is displayed.
13

13

1 2 3
1
Fig. 13.3 Zoom screen

13

13

13

13

13

13

1410 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-5


13.1 Processing Options Screen

1313 No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [InputNum] Enlarges or reduces the graph by directly specifying


1313 the vertical or horizontal axis range.
Specify the range value at the cursor position with
numeric keys, and confirm it with the key.
1313
Each pressing of the key moves the cursor
to [vertical axis upper limit] → [vertical axis lower
13 limit] → [horizontal axis lower limit] → [horizontal
axis upper limit], and finally returns to the Zoom
13 screen (Fig. 13.4).

Cursor
13

Input range/
13 Input value
Displays
available input
range and key
input value.
13

13 Fig. 13.4 Zoom screen


NOTE
13 Data exist only at each sampling interval. Therefore,
when values other than the integral multiple of the
sampling interval are entered as horizontal axis
13
values, the entered values are automatically
replaced with the wavelength (time) values nearest
13 to the existing data values.

2 [AutoScal] Adjusts the vertical axis range according to the


13 displayed curve automatically.

3 [Restore] Restores the display range to the original state.

– – Produces a screen hard copy with the zoom


operation applied.
13 – – Displays the cursor on the graph to activate the
cursor reading function.
13 ^ "13.1.1 Reading with Cursor"

– – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig.


13 13.1).

13

13

13-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1411 OF 4699


13.1 Processing Options Screen

13.1.3 Example of Data Printout 13


The printout examples of arithmetic operations (^ "13.2 Arithmetic Operations"), derivative
operations (^ "13.3 Derivative Operations"), and area calculations (^ "13.5 Area Calculation")
13
are given below.
When you press the [DataPrnt] key in the Operation Result screen of each operation, the
screen hard copy of the processed result and measurement parameters of the original data are 13
printed.
1

Screen hard copy 1

1
Measurement end date

Measurement 1
parameters

1
Fig. 13.5 Example of data printout (arithmetic operation)

13

13

13

13

13

13

1412 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-7


13.2 Arithmetic Operations
13.2

This option allows you to perform arithmetic operations between the curve data and values or
1313
operations between the curve data displayed on the Processing Options screen.

1313
13.2.1 Selecting Data
1313
1 Press the [Four Operations] key on the
Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1) to display the Cursor
13 Operator Selection screen (Fig. 13.6).
Move the cursor to the desired operator with the

13 keys, and confirm with the


key. Fig. 13.6 [Operator] Selection screen

13

13
2 The screen appears for selecting the data to be
operated (Fig. 13.7). Select [Curve data file] when
operating a curve data that is stored in the memory,
13 or select [Factor] when performing the four
Fig. 13.7 Data Selection screen
operations with factor.
Move the cursor with the keys, and
13
confirm the selection with the key.

13

13.2.2 Arithmetic Operations with Factor


13
This option allows you to perform the arithmetic operations (+, –, ×, and ÷) between the curve data
and values that have been displayed (called) on the Processing Options screen.
13

13
1 When you select [Factor] as operation target, the
Factor Input screen (Fig. 13.8) is displayed.

2 Enter a numeric value (factor) with numeric keys with


the input range of - 9999.9 to 9999.9 (the number of
significant figures: 5, the minimum input unit: 0.0001.)
13

13
3 After having entered the factor, press the
key to perform the arithmetic operation.
Press the key to return to the Processing Input range/Input value
Displays available input range and key input value.
13 Options screen (Fig. 13.1)
Fig. 13.8 Factor Input screen

13 4 When the operation has completed, the Operation


Result screen (Fig. 13.13) will display the processed
curve data.
13

13-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1413 OF 4699


13.2 Arithmetic Operations

13.2.3 Arithmetic Operations with Curve Data 13


You can load the curve data stored in the built-in instrument memory or in USB memory as an
operation target, and perform arithmetic operations.
13
However, no arithmetic operations can be performed on data containing unit inconsistencies between
the vertical axis (Abs, %T, and E) and the horizontal axis (nm, sec, and min).
13

1 When you select "Curve data file" as operation target,


the Load Files screen (Fig. 13.9) is displayed. 1
Use the keys to
move the cursor to the desired curve data, and press 1
the key to load the file.
Press the key to return to the Processing
1
Options screen (Fig. 13.1).
(For details on the Load Files screen functions and
operation procedure, refer to "3.2 Load Files" in this 1
manual.)
Fig. 13.9 Load Files screen
1

2 When the file is loaded, the waveform stored in the


curve data and the file name are displayed.
1
Press the key to perform the arithmetic
operation. The Operation Result screen (Fig. 13.13) 1
is displayed.
Press the key to return to the Load Files 1
screen (Fig. 13.9).

File name of the curve data


13
Fig. 13.10 Data Review screen

3 When the operation has completed, the Operation


Result screen (Fig. 13.13) will display the processed
curve data.. 13

13

13

13

13

1414 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-9


13.2 Arithmetic Operations

1313
NOTE
When performing an arithmetic operation between two curve data sets with different horizontal axis
1313
ranges and sampling intervals, the operation will be performed as follows:

1313 „ When the horizontal axis range is different


The arithmetic operation will be performed on the
Original data
13 overlapping part of the two data ranges.

Example) Operation target


13
• Original data (wavelength range: 400 nm to data
600 nm)
13 • Operation target data (wavelength range: 420 nm
to 620 nm)
(Arithmetic operation)

13 In the case above, the following data is generated: Operation result data
• Operation result data (wavelength range: 420 nm
to 600 nm)
13

(Overlapping horizontal range)


13

Fig. 13.11 Operation of data with different


13 horizontal ranges
„ When the sampling interval is different
The arithmetic operation is performed by
13
interpolating the operation target data in Original
compliance with the sampling interval data

13 (wavelength) of the original data, as shown in the


right figure. Interpolated
data
13 Operation target
Example) data

• Original data (sampling interval: 0.2 nm)


• Operation target data (sampling interval: 0.5 nm)

Operation
13 In the case above, the following data is generated: result data
• Operation result data (sampling interval: 0.2 nm)

13 Fig. 13.12 Operation of data with different


sampling intervals

13

13

13

13-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1415 OF 4699


13.2 Arithmetic Operations

13.2.4 Operation Result Screen 13


When the arithmetic operation is completed on the Data Review screen, the Operation Result screen
(Fig. 13.13) displays the processed curve data.
13

13
Displays the processed curve
data.
1

1
Indicates the original data*. Indicates the operation target
(factor or curve data).

1 2 3
1
* This screen displays the processed curve data.
[Original]: Curve data measured or loaded before calling the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1)
[Modified]: Curve data that has already been processed 1
[(File name)]: Curve data loaded in the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1).

Fig. 13.13 Operation Result screen 1

1
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Zoom] Enlarges or reduces the processed waveform on the


1
screen.
^ "13.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing"
13
2 [DataPrnt] Prints a screen hard copy and the measurement
parameters.
^ "13.1.3 Example of Data Printout"

3 [SavCurve] Saves the processed curve data to the memory


storage. 13
^ "3.1 Save Files"

4 – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13


13.1).

5 – Displays the cursor on the curve graph to activate 13


the cursor reading function.
^ "13.1.1 Reading with Cursor"
13

13

1416 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-11


13.3 Derivative Operations
13.3

For the curve data, 1st to 4th order derivative processing or smoothing can be performed. For this
1313
derivative processing, the convolution method digital derivative operation using 17 data pieces
consisting of former and latter data (Savitzky-Golay method)* has been adopted.
1313 * A. Savitzky, M.J.E Golay, "Smoothing and Differentiation of Data by Simplified Least Squares
Procedures", Analytical Chemistry, vol. 36, no. 8, pp. 1627-1639, 1964.
1313
To perform derivative processing, the order of derivative and derivative wavelength (time) difference
must be determined.
13

The derivative wavelength (time) difference is defined by the sampling interval of operated curve data
13
and the coefficient ∆λ(N) (∆T(N)) specified to perform the operation.

13 [Derivative wavelength (time) difference] = ([Sampling interval] × [Coefficient] × 16) =.. 2

13 This coefficient defines the interval of data points on the waveform used for the operation. When the
coefficients are defined as "1" and "2", one sampling interval and two sampling intervals are the
respective intervals of the data points picked up for the operation.
13
Operation target data Curve data
Coefficient=1
13

13
Coefficient=2

13

Data point used for operation Derivative wavelength (time) difference


13 (17 points before and after the target)

13 Fig. 13.14 Derivative wavelength (time) difference and coefficient ∆λ(N) (∆T(N))

The greater the coefficient, the greater the derivative wavelength (time) difference, and the less the
noise. However, specifying a coefficient larger than appropriate deteriorates the resolution of the
derivative spectrum (^ Fig. 13.13). Determine the coefficient value considering the two elements of
noise and resolution.
13

13

13

13

13

13-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1417 OF 4699


13.3 Derivative Operations

13.3.1 Derivative Processing 13

1 Press key [Derivative] on the Processing


Options screen to display the Order Input screen
13
(Fig. 13.15).
13

Specify the order of derivative.


1
Fig. 13.15 Order Input screen

1
2 Enter the order of derivative with numeric keys and
confirm it with the key. .
For the order of derivative, select from 0 through 4. 1
When 0 is specified, smoothing is performed.

1
3 Enter the coefficient ∆λ (N) or (∆T (N)) and confirm it
with the key.
1
For the coefficient, select from 1 through 9.

13
Coefficient ∆λ (N)(∆T(N))

Fig. 13.16 Coefficient (∆λ(N) or ∆T(N)) Input


screen

13

13

13

13

13

1418 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-13


13.3 Derivative Operations

1313 13.3.2 Operation Result Screen


When the coefficient ∆λ(T)(∆T(N)) is entered, the differentiation is performed and then the result is
displayed. Fig. 13.17 shows the result obtained by processing the data in Fig. 13.16 with the order of
1313
1 and the coefficient of 1 (∆λ = 0.8). The processing result can be saved and the waveform can be
enlarged/reduced.
1313 When the key is pressed, the Processing Options screen appears, but the curve data for the
calculation result is displayed on that screen. To re-display the data before it has been processed,
13 press the [Restore] key.

13
Displays the processed curve
data.
13

13

13

13

13 1 2 3

Fig. 13.17 Operation Result screen


13

No. Key Operation Display Description


13
1 [Zoom] Enlarges or reduces the processed waveform on the
screen.
13
^ "13.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing"

2 [DataPrnt] Prints a screen hard copy and the measurement


parameters.
^ "13.1.3 Example of Data Printout"
13 3 [SavCurve] Saves the processed curve data to the memory
storage.
13 ^ "3.1 Save Files"

– – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig.


13 13.1).

– – Displays the cursor on the curve graph to activate

13 the cursor reading function.


^ "13.1.1 Reading with Cursor"

13

13-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1419 OF 4699


13.3 Derivative Operations

„ Example of smoothing processing


13

13

13

1
„ Example of 1st order derivative
1

13

Fig. 13.18 Changes in derivative spectrum depending on derivative wavelength difference

13

13

13

13

13

1420 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-15


13.3 Derivative Operations

1313
NOTE
In order to calculate the derivative values for each data set, 17 data points consisting of former and
1313
latter data are required (Fig. 13.13). Therefore, when calculating the data set around both ends of
the curve data, the edging data is repeatedly used for the calculation, since no other data is
1313 available.
Example)
When performing derivative processing on the following spectrum data, it is assumed for the
13
calculation that all data sets at wavelengths shorter than 400 nm are 0.1 Abs, and those at
wavelengths longer than 500 nm are 0.2 Abs.
13
Wavelength range: 400 nm to 500 nm
Data at both ends: Absorbance at 400 nm=0.1 Abs, Absorbance at 500 nm=0.2 nm
13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1421 OF 4699


13.4 Peak Detection
13.4

This function detects peaks and valleys on the curve data according to the algorithm described below,
13
and displays the values in the table.
„ Peak detection algorithm
For spectra, peaks are searched from the longer wavelength side (right side). For time course curves,
13
peaks are searched from the side of time "zero" (left side).
A maximum of 20 peaks are detected by repeating the following procedures (1) to (3): 13

(1) The program searches a section consisting of six continuously increasing data points (Section A) 1
and a section consisting of six continuously decreasing data points (Section B), appearing after
Section A.
1
(2) The maximum data point detected between Sections A and B is defined as a peak.
(3) Once the peak is detected, the program starts searching the next section consisting of six
continuously increasing data points (Section C). 1

Peak: The maximum point between A and B 1

Peak
1

Section C Section B Section A


1
Valley

Valley: The minimum point between B and C


1
(The center point of the multiple minimum points)

Scanning direction (in the case of spectra)


1

Peak Valley Peak Valley 13

Scanning direction Scanning direction


(in the case of time course curve) (in the case of spectra) 13

13
Fig. 13.19 Peak detection algorithm

13

13

13

1422 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-17


13.4 Peak Detection

When the [Peak] key the pressed in the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1), the peaks
1313
and valleys in the curve data are detected and the Peak Detection screen (Fig. 13.19) is displayed. Up
to 20 peaks or valleys can be detected.
1313 When you select the [Graph] key, the curve data with the marks indicating peaks or valleys
will be displayed.
1313

13

13 Data table
Displays the result of the peak
(valley) detection.

13

13

13
1 2 3 4
13
(Peak table)

13

13

13

13

13 1 2 3 4

(Valley table)
13 Fig. 13.20 Peak (Valley) Detection screen

13

13

13

13-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1423 OF 4699


13.4 Peak Detection

13
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Graph] Displays the curve data with the mark indicating


13
peaks or valleys.

13
Peak/ valley
mark

Fig. 13.21 Peak Detection screen (graph)


1
2 [DataPrnt] Prints a screen hard copy, measurement
parameters, and peak (valley) detection results.
^ "Fig. 13.22 Example of data printout (peak 1
detection)"

3 [Peak] Displays the Peak Detection screen (Fig. 13.20 1


(peak table)).

4 [Valley] Displays the Valley Detection screen (Fig. 13.20 1


(valley table))

– – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 1


13.1).

– – Displays the cursor on the curve graph to activate 1


the cursor reading function.
^ "13.1.1 Reading with Cursor"
13

13

13

13

13

13

1424 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-19


13.4 Peak Detection

1313 „ Data Printout Example


If you press the [DataPrnt] on the Peak Detection screen, the screen hard copy will be
printed (Fig. 13.22).
1313

1313

13
Screen hard copy
Hard copy excluding the
13 function row

13

13

13 Measurement end date

Measurement
13 parameters

13

13 Peak detection results

13
Fig. 13.22 Example of data printout (peak detection)
13

13

13

13

13

13

13-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1425 OF 4699


13.5 Area Calculation
13.5

This function calculates the area of the portion surrounded by the curve data and the specified vertical
13
axis.
The calculation results are expressed as the values α, ß, and α + ß (Fig. 13.26). However, the
calculation method varies according to the data type of the vertical axis (photometric value). 13

„ When the type of photometric value is absorbance (Abs) or energy (E) 13


α = the area of the portion bounded by the curve data and a straight line connecting the starting and
ending points on the data
1
The sign of α for the area protruding upwards is (+), and (-) for that protruding downwards.

1
ß = the area of the portion bounded by a straight line connecting the starting and ending points on the
curve data and the horizontal axis
The sign of ß is always (+). 1
Example)

Ending point Starting point


1

Fig. 13.23 Example of area calculation (Abs, E) 1

13

13

13

13

13

13

1426 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-21


13.5 Area Calculation

1313 „ When the type of photometric value is transmittance (%T)


α = the area of the portion bounded by a straight line connecting the starting and ending points on the
curve data and the horizontal axis
1313 The sign of α for the area protruding upwards is (-), and (+) for that protruding downwards.

1313 ß = the area of the portion bounded by the curve data and horizontal axis (the starting and ending
points)
The sign of ß is always (+).
13
Example)

13

13

13
Ending point Starting point

13

Fig. 13.24 Example of area calculation (%T)


13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1427 OF 4699


13.5 Area Calculation

13.5.1 Area Calculation Processing 13


Press the [Area Calc.] key on the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1) to display the
Range Setting screen (Fig. 13.25).
13

13

Fig. 13.25 Range Setting screen


1
Using the numeric keys, type in the starting and ending points of the horizontal axis (wavelength or
time) for the area calculation, and confirm with the key.
1
Alternatively, you can specify the starting and ending points using the reading cursor function. To do
so, perform the following procedure:
1

NOTE 1
When the cursor is dipslayed on the screen, data input with numeric keys will not be accepted. To
make the entry with numeric keys available, press the key while the cursor is displayed
1
on the screen.

13

13

13

13

13

13

1428 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-23


13.5 Area Calculation

1313 1 Press the keys on the Range


Setting screen (Fig. 13.25) to display cursor on the
curve graph.
1313 Press the keys to move the cursor
to the desired starting point, and confirm it with the
1313 key.

13
NOTE
Holding down the keys moves
13 Fig. 13.26 Input screen for starting point
the cursor faster.

13
2 Next, the Entry screen for the ending point appears.
Similarly as in procedure 1, enter the ending point by
13 pressing the keys to move the
cursor to the desired ending point, and confirm it with
the key.
13
If you confirm the positions of the starting and ending
points, the Operation Result screen (Fig. 13.28) will
13
be displayed.

13
Fig. 13.27 Input screen for ending point

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13-24 UV-1800 SERIES 1429 OF 4699


13.5 Area Calculation

13.5.2 Operation Result Screen 13


The Operation Result screen (Fig. 13.28) displays curve graph, calculation range, and calculation
result.
13

13

1 2 3
1
Fig. 13.28 Operation Result screen

No. Key Operation Display Description


1
1 [Zoom] Enlarges or reduces the processed waveform on the
screen.
^ "13.1.2 Enlarging/Reducing" 1

2 [DataPrnt] Prints the screen hard copy and the measurement


parameters. 1
^ "13.1.3 Example of Data Printout"

3 [SavCurve] Saves the curve data to the memory storage. 13


^ "3.1 Save Files"

– – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig.


13.1).

– – Displays the cursor on the curve graph to activate 13


the cursor reading function.
^ "13.1.1 Reading with Cursor"
13

13

13

13

1430 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-25


13.6 Point Pick
13.6

This function is used to pick up the photometric values at specified wavelengths (time) on the curve
1313
displayed on the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1), and display them as a numeric data list.

1313
1 Press [Point Pick] key on the Processing
Options screen (Fig. 13.1) to display the screen for 1
1313 selecting a data pick-up method (Fig. 13.29). 2
(Press the key to return to the Operator
Cursor
13 Selection screen.)
„ Data pick-up method Fig. 13.29 Pick-up Method screen
No. Method Description
13 1 Even interval Displays a list of ordinate data for
up to 20 points at a specified
interval from a specified abscissa
13 (wavelength, time).
^ "13.6.1 Point Pick at Even

13 Intervals"
2 Manual input Displays the data at arbitrary
wavelengths (or time).
13
^ "13.6.2 Point Pick with
Manual Input"
13

13
2 Move the cursor to a desired method with the
keys, and confirm it with the
key.

13

13
13.6.1 Point Pick at Even Intervals
The screen (Fig. 13.30) appears for specifying a horizontal value (wavelength, time) from which the
data pick-up is started and also the data interval. Enter the start wavelength (time) and interval with
13
numeric keys, and confirm each of the values with the key. A list of the picked up data will be
displayed on the screen (Fig. 13.33).
^ "13.6.3 List Display Screen"

13 Press the key to return to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1).
-Input range of starting abscissa
When horizontal axis is wavelength - Upper limit: Scan start wavelength
13 Lower limit: Scan end wavelength
When horizontal axis is time - Lower limit: 0
Upper limit: Data end time
13
-Input range of interval: Scan pitch (interval) to 1000
13

13

13-26 UV-1800 SERIES 1431 OF 4699


13.6 Point Pick

13
NOTE
Data exist only at each scan pitch (cycle). Enter the integral multiple of the scan pitch (cycle) for the
13
starting wavelength (time) and interval.

13

Fig. 13.30 Wavelength (time) Input screen (even interval)


1
13.6.2 Point Pick with Manual Input
First, the screen appears for specifying the number of data to be picked up (Fig. 13.31). 1
Enter the desired number of the data points with numeric keys (input range of 1 to 20), and confirm
with the key. The screen appears for entering each wavelength value at which the point pick 1
is performed (Fig. 13.32).

13

13

13

13
Fig. 13.31 Data Point Input screen

13

13

1432 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-27


13.6 Point Pick

In the Wavelength (time) Input screen, you can enter wavelengths (time) for each specified data point.
1313
The data list column initially displays the same number of wavelengths (time) used for the last point-
pick operation as the number of the data points specified. (If the last-picked points are fewer than the
1313 number of specified points, the columns for the differences are displayed as "---".)

1313 Enter the wavelength (time) to perform point pick with numeric keys, and confirm with the
key. The entered value will be highlighted on the data list.

13
After all wavelengths for the specified number of points are confirmed, the List Display screen is
displayed. ^ "13.6.3 List Display Screen"
13
Press the key to return to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1).
13

13
Data list

13

Highlighted column
13 Highlight moves to the next
column after the wavelength
(time) is confirmed.

13

Cursor
13 Displays the input value.

13 Fig. 13.32 Wavelength (time) Input screen

13

13

13

13

13

13

13-28 UV-1800 SERIES 1433 OF 4699


13.6 Point Pick

13.6.3 List Display Screen 13


This screen displays up to 20 data points that have been picked up.

13

13

1
1

Fig. 13.33 List Display screen (Start time 200 sec, Interval 20 sec) 1

1
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [DataPrnt] Prints a screen hard copy, measurement


1
parameters, and point pick results. For the point
pick at even intervals, all data points picked
within the horizontal range of curve data are
1
printed out, though only 20 data points are
displayed in the List Display screen. 1
^ "Fig. 13.34 Example of data printout"

– – Returns to the Processing Options screen (Fig. 13


13.1).

13

13

13

13

13

1434 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-29


13.6 Point Pick

1313 „ Data Printout Example

1313

1313

Screen hard copy


13 The screen hard copy
excluding the function row

13

13 Measurement end date

Measurement
13 parameters

13

13 Peak detection results

13

13
Fig. 13.34 Example of data printout

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13-30 UV-1800 SERIES 1435 OF 4699


13.7 Print Processing
13.7

This processing is used to output the data value at each sampling point on the curve displayed on the
13
Processing Options screen (Fig. 13.1).
Once the print process has started, it cannot be cancelled. If you must abort printing nonetheless,
simply unplug the USB cable for the printer from the UV-1800. 13

13
NOTE
The number of display digits of the output data is determined by the setting in [2. Decimal display]
1
of [8. Utilities] on the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1).

1
Measurement end time

Measurement 1
parameters

Curve data
13
All data values for each
sampling point are printed
out.

13
Fig. 13.35 Printout example of data processing
13

13

13

13

1436 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 13-31


14
14 Utilities

14

Chapter 14 Utilities 1

This is the mode for setting the instrument's operating parameters, such as the light source switching
wavelength, printer setup, or number of data columns displayed. 1
The parameters which can be set in this mode are parameters shared with other modes.
These will also be stored internally, even if the power is turned OFF.
1
CONTENTS

14.1 Utilities Menu Screen....................................................................................................................... 14-2 1

14

14

14

14

14

14

1437 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 14-1


14.1 Utilities Menu Screen
14.1

When you select [9. Utilities] in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the Utilities menu shown in Fig.
1414
14.1 will be displayed.

1
2
3
4
5

6
7
8
1414 9

14
Fig. 14.1 Utilities Menu screen

14

Key
14 No. Display Description
Operation

1 [Start program] Sets the mode in which the instrument will enter
14 standby when the power is turned ON.
^ "14.1.1 Start Program"

14 2 [Decimal display] Sets the number of decimals of data to be displayed.


^ "14.1.2 Decimal Display"

14 3 [S/R exchange] Exchange the light flux on the sample side and
reference (subject) side.
Each pressing of the key toggles between "Normal"
14
and "Inverse".
Normal The front of the sample
14 compartment will be the sample
light flux, and the back will be the
reference light flux.
Inverse The front of the sample
compartment will be the
14
reference light flux, and the back
will be the sample light flux.
14
"Inverse" is used when custom-made accessories are
installed. "Normal" is normally used.
14
4 [Light Source] Sets the light source switching.
^ "14.1.3 Light Source Selection"
14

14-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1438 OF 4699


14.1 Utilities Menu Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
14
Operation

5 [Printer] Sets the printer to be used and the format of a hard


14
copy.
^ "14.1.4 Printer Setting"

6 [Clock set] Sets the current time and the date print format.
Use numeric keys to set the clock time.
The clock is the 24-hour type and is set either in the
order (Year/Month/Date Hour: Minute: Second) or
(Date/Month/Year Hour: Minute: Second). The former 1
is displayed in numeric forms, but the latter in English
in order to display Month.
1
Ex.) 10/Dec/07 12:34:56

1
Since it has a battery back-up, it is not necessary to
set the clock every time you turn ON the power.

7 [Beep] Sets the buzzer sound to turn ON/OFF. 1


Each pressing of the key toggles between [ON] and
[OFF]. 1
8 [Data accum. Designates the accumulation time to read data in the
time] Photometric (one- and multi-wavelength), Quantitation, 1
and Bio-method modes.
^ "14.1.5 Setting Data Accumulation Time"
1
9 [Disp. off time] The LCD backlight is automatically turned OFF when
measurement is not performed. The following four time
1
periods are available for OFF timer setting: 10 min,
30 min, 60 min, ∞.
When nothing is executed during the set time, the LCD 1
is turned OFF.
Press any one of the keys to reactivate the display. 14
^ "14.1.6 Turning OFF LCD Backlight
Automatically"

14

14

14

14

1439 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 14-3


14.1 Utilities Menu Screen

1414 14.1.1 Start Program


When you select [Start program] key in the Utilities Menu screen (Fig. 14.1), the screen
below is displayed.
Move the cursor to the desired start program with the key, and confirm with the
key.

Cursor
1414

14

14
Fig. 14.2 Start Program Selection screen
14
The selectable start programs are as shown in the following table.
14
Start Program Description

14 Standard menu This mode has been set as a factory default.

Photometric

14 Photometric 8λ

Spectrum
14 Quantitation

Kinetics
14 Kinetics rate

Time course The instrument will stand by at the Measurement Parameter


14 Configuration screen of the selected mode (or measurement
Multi-component quantitation
method).
Bio-method
14 (DNA Quantitation)

Lowry method

BCA method

CBB method
14
Biuret method

UV Absorption method
14
Stored parameter files The selected parameter file stored in the built-in memory or USB
memory device is loaded and the instrument will start up in the
14
Measurement mode for the file contents. To save measurement
parameters, perform [SavParam] in each measurement mode.
14

14-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1440 OF 4699


14.1 Utilities Menu Screen

14
NOTE
To show the hidden items, scroll the screen display.
14

14.1.2 Decimal Display


You can switch the number of digits in the photometric data display between "Abs (3) %T (1)" and
"Abs (4) %T (2)".
The value at the minimum digit is rounded off when displayed or printed out.

"Abs (3) %T (1)":


1
• Abs (Absorbance): Rounded to three decimal places (i.e. the fourth decimal place is rounded
off).
• %T (Transmittance): Rounded to one decimal place (i.e. the second decimal place is rounded 1
off).
• E (Energy): Rounded to one decimal place (i.e. the second decimal place is rounded
off). 1

"Abs (4) %T (2)":


• Abs (Absorbance): Rounded to four decimal place (i.e. the fifth decimal place is rounded off).
1
• %T (Transmittance): Rounded to two decimal places (i.e. the third decimal place is rounded
off).
1
• E (Energy): Rounded to two decimal places (i.e. the third decimal place is rounded
off).
1
NOTE
Photometric data is saved in CSV format as the decimal place values set here. 1

NOTE 1
Except for some measurement modes (^ "1.5 Handling Internal Data"), internal floating-point
data (before being rounded off) is used for various operations based on measurement values.
The displayed data has been rounded off. Therefore, the value manually calculated from the 1
photometric data is different from the one resulting from the operation; the fewer the number of
significant digits, the larger the difference.
14

14

14

14

14

1441 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 14-5


14.1 Utilities Menu Screen

1414 14.1.3 Light Source Selection


The UV-1800 uses a deuterium lamp (D2 lamp) in the ultra-violet region and a tungsten iodine lamp
(WI lamp) in the visible/near-infrared region.
Select whether to automatically switch between the two light sources according to measurement
wavelengths, or to fix them regardless of the wavelengths.

Cursor 1
1414 2
3
4
14
Fig. 14.3 Light Source Switching Selection screen

14

No. Key Operation Display Description


14
1 – [Auto] Enter the wavelength for light source switching with
numeric keys.
14 The input range is from 295.0 to 364.0 nm (in units of
0.1 nm).
14 The factory default is 340.8 nm.

2 – [WI lamp] Regardless of the setting of the measurement

14 wavelength, the WI lamp is always the light source.

3 – [D2 lamp] Regardless of the setting of the measurement

14 wavelength, the D2 lamp is always the light source.

4 – To select the light switch setting, move the cursor to


a desired setting with keys, and
14
confirm with the key.

14

14

14

14

14

14

14-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1442 OF 4699


14.1 Utilities Menu Screen

14.1.4 Printer Setting 14


When you select [Printer] key in the Utilities Menu screen (Fig. 14.1), the screen below is
displayed.
14

1
2
3
4
5 1

Fig. 14.4 Printer Setting Selection screen 1

1
Key
No. Display Description
Operation
1
1 [Printer] Goes to the Printer Selection screen.
^ "„ Printer Selection" in this section
1
2 [Date printing] Specifies whether the date should be printed on the
hard copy output or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles the display between 1
[ON] and [OFF].

3 [Function area Specifies whether the function key should be printed 1


printing] on the hard copy output or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles the display between 14
[ON] and [OFF].

4 [Left margin] Sets the left margin of the page (not available in MPU).
The setting range is from 0 to 9.

5 [Paper Size] Sets the paper size (not available in MPU).


14
Each pressing of the key toggles the display between
[A4] and [Letter].
14

14

14

1443 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 14-7


14.1 Utilities Menu Screen

„ Printer Selection
1414
Printer type Description

MPU Select this when using the screen copy printer MPU (option).

ESC/P-24 Select this when using a printer that supports the ESC/P control
code for EPSON 24-pin printers. This is also applied for laser
printers.

1414 ESC/P-9 Select this when using a printer that supports the ESC/P control
code for EPSON 9-pin printers.

14 ESC/P-R Select this when using a printer that supports the ESC/Raster
control code for EPSON.

14 PCL Select this when using a printer that supports the PCL control
code for HP.

14
CAUTION
14 When using the ESC/P Raster printer, DO NOT unplug the USB cable before the printer head
returns to its home position. If you do, the printer will fall into an abnormal status in which no
printing commands are accepted.
14 To plug the USB printer cable to another port or computer after (or while) using with the UV-1800,
be sure to turn OFF the printer power beforehand.

14
As long as a printer other than MPU is selected, [4. Left margin] and [5. Paper Size] can be specified.
To select a printer, move the cursor to the desired printer type with keys, and
14
confirm with the key.

14
Cursor

14

14
Fig. 14.5 Printer Selection screen

14

14

14

14

14-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1444 OF 4699


14.1 Utilities Menu Screen

14.1.5 Setting Data Accumulation Time 14


For Photometric (one- and multi-wavelength) mode, Quantitation mode and Bio-method mode, you
can select the data accumulation time for acquiring data.
14
Four options are available: 0.05, 0.2, 0.5 and 2.0 sec. (Default value: 0.2 sec.)
The longer the time become, the less the dispersion of the obtained data, but the number of data
outputs per unit time becomes less.
The number of outputs per second is almost the reciprocal of the accumulation time.
To select the accumulation time, move the cursor to the desired setting with keys,
and confirm with the key.

Cursor
1

1
Fig. 14.6 [Data accumulating time] Selection screen

1
14.1.6 Turning OFF LCD Backlight Automatically
To select "display OFF time", move the cursor to the desired setting with keys, and
1
confirm with the key.

Cursor
1

Fig. 14.7 [Display off time] Selection screen


1

NOTE
For spectrum measurements, the accumulation time is determined depending on "Scan speed" 14
specified as measurement parameters (^ "6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen").

14

14

14

14

1445 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 14-9


15
15 Maintenance

15

15

Chapter 15 Maintenance 1

1
The UV-1800 provides a validation function used to validate its performance, and a maintenance function used
to manage the time periods of lamp illumination and the dates of instrument baseline correction. 1
CONTENTS
1
15.1 Maintenance Screen........................................................................................................................ 15-2
15.2 Security Functions ........................................................................................................................... 15-6
1

15

15

15

15

1446 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 15-1


15.1 15.1Maintenance Screen

When the [Mainte.] key is pressed on the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1) used to select each
1515
measurement mode, the [Maintenance] screen appears.

1515

1
1515 2
Indicates the last time and
date when the instrument
3 baseline was corrected.
15

15 4 Indicates the accumulated


5 illumination time period of
the light source lamp at the
6 current point.
15

15
Fig. 15.1 [Maintenance] screen

15
Key
No. Display Description
Operation
15
1 [Validation] Changes over to the mode used to validate the
performance of the spectrophotometer.
15 The validation function is used to periodically validate the
performance of the UV-1800 and record the result.
15 ^ "16 Instrument Validation"

15

15

15

15

15

15-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1447 OF 4699


15.1 Maintenance Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
15
Operation

2 [Instrument Performs the instrument baseline correction.


15
Baseline Approximately 17 minutes is required to complete the
Correction] correction, and other operations are not available during
15
that period.

Perform the instrument baseline correction in the following 1


cases:
• When installing or moving the UV-1800 1
• When steps or shock noises are observed on spectra
even if the baseline has been corrected.
1
NOTE
DO NOT open the sample compartment cover during
instrument baseline correction.
1

„Instrument baseline correction 1


The UV-1800 has the following two types of baseline
correction:
1
1Instrument Baseline Correction
This corrects the optical balance of the spectrometer itself.
1
The baseline is corrected with a shorter interval within the
entire wavelength range (190 nm - 1100 nm), and the
correction data is stored. 1
NOTE
If the instrument baseline correction is interrupted, the
stored data is not overwritten.

2Baseline Correction
This corrects the baseline within the specified wavelength
range to 100 %T (0 Abs). This correction is completed
1
quickly since it is executed within a relatively wide interval.
15
The UV-1800 uses the correction data obtained from (1)
when performing (2). Therefore, the steps and shock
noises can be removed in a short time. Usually they can be
removed only when corrections are performed with the
15
same interval as that used when the measurement data is
obtained.
15

15

1448 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 15-3


15.1 Maintenance Screen

1515 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

3 [Reset lamp Use this function during the light source lamp replacement
1515
usage time] (^ UV-1800 System User's Guide, "3.6 Replacing the
Light Source") to reset the lamp illumination time currently
1515
recorded/displayed.
Move the cursor to the target lamp with the
15 key, and press the key to reset the
illumination time period.

15 Cursor

Fig. 15.2 [Reset lamp usage time] screen

4 [λ Aligns the wavelength origin (wavelength recalibration) by


Recalibration] referencing the emission line of the D2 lamp (656.1 nm).
Perform the wavelength recalibration in the following cases:
15
• To learn the original wavelength accuracy of the UV-1800
after long elapsed power use, to check instrument
15 functions, etc.
• In the case of significant environment temperature
15 change after the power is turned ON.

15 NOTE
• Use the standard sample compartment, and verify that
nothing is placed in the cell holder.
15
• DO NOT open the sample compartment cover during the
calibration.
15
„Wavelength recalibration
15 The wavelength recalibration is also performed during the
initialization process at the instrument startup.
Normally, the wavelength origin does not fluctuate, but it
15
may occasionally shift due to the influence of environment
temperature fluctuations.
Though the shift can be corrected by restarting the UV-
1800, this function can correct the shift when the instrument
15 and light source lamp are at stable temperature.

15

15

15-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1449 OF 4699


15.1 Maintenance Screen

No.
Key
Display Description
15
Operation

5 [Security Displays the setting screen for security functions, where


15
settings] you can switch ON/OFF each security function, change
passwords, and perform other security operations.
15
NOTE
When the security function is enabled (ON), the setting
screen is displayed only when you have logged in as 1
Administrator.
^ "15.2 Security Functions" 1
– – [WI Lamp life] Displays the part number and product life of the light source
[D2 Lamp life] lamp for replacement. 1
– – Returns to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1).

15

15

15

15

1450 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 15-5


15.2 Security Functions
15.2

1515 15.2.1 Security Function Operations


The UV-1800 has a security function that allows restricting function availability according to user level.
When the security functions are enabled, you need to log in to the UV-1800 as one of the following
1515
users before using the instrument: Administrator, Developer, or Operator. (^ "1.3 Login Screen
(Only when security function is on)")
1515 If available functions are specified for each user beforehand, you can control function availability
according to user level.
15 The following is the procedure for setting the security functions:

15 1 Set the security parameters (^ "15.2.3 Authority Setting for Security Parameters").
In the Security Settings screen (Fig. 15.6), specify which user can use what functions to control the
data and instrument. Table 15.1 shows the security parameters (functions) that can be assigned to
15
users and the default authority setting for each user.
The default (factory) authority setting assumes user levels defined as follows:
15 [Administrator]
The administrative manager of the UV-1800, who can use all functions of the instrument
15 [Developer]
The inspection manager, who can used all functions except those for instrument management
(other than the instrument validation function)
15
[Operator]
The operator of the UV-1800, who can perform measurements using parameter files created/saved
15 by the inspection manager, and save the measured data

15
2 Set the password for each user (^ "15.2.4 Changing Password").
Set the password for each user in the Password Change screen (Fig. 15.9).

15
3 Enable the security functions (^ "15.2.2 Setting Security Functions").
Turn ON the security functions in the [Security settings] screen (Fig. 15.4).

4 Return to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1) and


press the key.
The current user (Administrator) is logged off, and
15 the Login screen appears (Fig. 15.3), where you can
log in to the UV-1800 as the desired user (^ "1.3
Login Screen (Only When Security Function is On)")

15

Fig. 15.3 [Login] screen


15

15

15-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1451 OF 4699


15.2 Security Functions

Table 15.1 Security Parameters (Authority) and Default Values


15
Defualt
Parameters Values*1
No. Description 15
(Authority)
A D O
(Security Parameters 1)
15
1 Change The right to change parameters in the Measurement √ √
parameters Parameter Configuration screen for each measurement mode
1
2 Change Quantitation mode, Bio-method mode √ √
Calibration • The right to change, add, and delete the standard sample
Curve data in Concentration Table screen 1
• The right to change the order of calibration curve and to
create a new calibration curve in the Calibration Curve 1
screen
3 Load The right to load parameter files for each measurement mode √ √ √
1
Parameter in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1)
Files
4 Save The right to save the currently set parameters as a separate √ √
1
Parameter file in the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen for
Files each measurement mode 1
5 Change The right to change parameters in the Utilities Menu screen √ √
Utilities (Fig. 14.1) 1
6 Change The right to change parameters of each item to be validated √ √
Validation for the instrument validation function
1
Settings
7 Load Data • The right to load stored table data files in the (Result) List √ √ √
Files Display screen
• The right to load curve data files in the Measurement
screen or Curve Display screen
8 Save Data The right to save measurement results as data files in the √ √ √
Files Measurement screen or Curve Display screen 1
9 Data The right to perform the data processing (^ Chapter 13) √ √
Processings from the Measurement screen of the Spectrum mode or the
15
Time Scan mode
(Security Parameters 2)
1 Instrument The right to perform the instrument baseline correction in the √
Baseline [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 15.1)
Correction 15
2 Reset Lamp The right to reset the lamp illumination time in the √
Illumination [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 15.1) 15
Time

15

1452 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 15-7


15.2 Security Functions

1515 Defualt
Parameters Values*1
No. Description
(Authority)
A D O
1515
3 PC Control • The right to switch to the external control mode √
Mode (^ Chapter 17) from the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1)
1515 • The right to return to the [Mode menu] screen from the
external control mode *2
15 4 Copy Files The right to copy the files stored in the built-in memory or √ √
USB memory in the [File Manager] screen (^ "2.4.2 File

15 Manager Screen")
5 Delete Files • The right to delete the files stored in the built-in memory or √ √
USB memory in the [File Manager] screen (^ "2.4.2 File
Manager Screen")
• The right to overwrite and save data files in each
measurement mode.
• The right to delete the built-in memory files from the screen
15 displayed when insufficient storage space prevents saving
(^ "3.1.3 Delete Files in Built-in Memory").

15 6 Convert to The right to convert files in the built-in memory or USB √ √


CSV memory to data files in CSV format in the [File Manager]
screen (^ "2.4.2 File Manager Screen")
15
*1
The Column sub-captions of "A", "D", and "O" stand for Administrator, Developer, and Operator,
respectively. The tick mark (√) means that corresponding user(s) can use the particular function.
15 *2
Use this function to protect the status where the UVProbe software (standard accessory) controls
the instrument history (^ "A.1.2 Common Screen Frame").
15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1453 OF 4699


15.2 Security Functions

15.2.2 Setting Security Functions 15


When you press the [Security settings] key on the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 15.1), the
following screen appears.
15

NOTE
Be extremely careful not to lose your password.
15
Note especially that if the password for Administrator is lost, the status cannot be recovered even
by attempting to set a new password, since the security function settings become defunct.
1
In such cases, the service personnel must work at your installation site for function recovery.
Contact your Shimadzu representative.
1
Only the Administrator can change the security function settings.
Therefore, if the [Security settings] key is pressed in the [Maintenance] screen, the UV-1800
1
will prompt you to enter the Administrator's password.

1
Fig. 15.4 Password-prompting message ([Maintenance] screen)

When you enter the Administrator's password and press the key, the [Security settings]
1
screen (Fig. 15.5) appears.

1
NOTE
If you have never set a password (^ "15.2.4 Changing Password"), just press the key
without entering anything. No password has been set to the UV-1800 in its initial setting.

15

15

15

15

1454 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 15-9


15.2 Security Functions

1515

1
1515
2
3
1515 4

15

15

Fig. 15.5 [Security settings] screen

No. Key Operation Display Description


15
1 [Security mode] Switches the ON/OFF of the security functions.
Each pressing of the key toggles the display
15 between [ON] and [OFF].

2 [Password When the security function is ON, specifies the


15 change] password for logging in.
^ "15.2.4 Changing Password"
15 3 [Security When the security function is ON, specifies the
parameters] functions user authority available to user.
15 ^ "15.2.3 Authority Setting for Security
Parameters"

15 4 [Start-up in PC Used to set up the UV-1800 to automatically


ctrl] start up in the PC Control mode (Refer to
Chapter 17) after the initialization. Each
15
pressing of the key toggles the display between
[ON] and [OFF] of this function.
15
– – Returns to the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 15.1).

15

15

15

15-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1455 OF 4699


15.2 Security Functions

15.2.3 Authority Setting for Security Parameters 15


If you press the [Security parameters] key on the Security Setting screen (Fig. 15.5), the
Security Parameters screen is displayed.
15

The Security Parameters screen displays the various functions in which user availability can be set,
and identifies the users who can access those functions. "A", "D", and "O" stand for Administrator, 15
Developer, and Operator, respectively.
To switch the screens for "Security parameters 1" and "Security parameters 2", use the 1
keys.

1
For detailed explanation of each parameter, refer to Table 15.1.

Indicates the user who can use the listed function 1

Fig. 15.6 Security Parameters screens 1

15

15

15

15

1456 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 15-11


15.2 Security Functions

The following is the procedure for indicating which users can use a given security parameter.
1515
Here, the procedure is explained using an example where you indicate the user who can change [5.
Change Utilities] in Security Parameters 1 as "only Administrator".
1515

1515
1 Press the
is displayed.
key when Security Parameters 1
Cursor

The User Selection screen is displayed (Fig. 15.7).


15
Fig. 15.7 User Selection screen

15

2 Using the keys, move the cursor to


the position of "Administrator".
When confirming the setting by pressing the
key, you will return to the Security Parameters screen
(Fig. 15.8).
15
The user who can control the [5. Change Utilities]
parameter is indicated with "A" on the screen.
15

15 Fig. 15.8 Security Parameters screen


(Security Parameters 1)

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1457 OF 4699


15.2 Security Functions

15.2.4 Changing Password 15


If you select the [Password change] key on the [Security settings] screen (Fig. 15.5), the
[Target User] screen will appear.
15
Select the user whose password is to be changed. To select the user, move the cursor to the target
user, and confirm with the key.
15

Cursor
1

1
Fig. 15.9 [Target User] screen

Next, change the password in the screen subsequently displayed.


1

Fig. 15.10 [Password change] screen

Enter the password with numeric keys. The available numerals are 0 to 9, and up to 8 digits can be
entered.

1
NOTE
Be extremely careful not to lose your password.
Note especially that if the password for Administrator is lost, the status cannot be recovered even 15
by attempting to set a new password, since the security function settings become defunct.
In such cases, the service personnel must work at your installation site for function recovery.
Contact your Shimadzu representative.

15

15

15

1458 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 15-13


16
16 Instrument Validation

16

16

16

Chapter 16 Instrument 1

Validation 1

CONTENTS
1
16.1 Parameter Configuration Screen for Instrument Validation ............................................................. 16-2
16.2 Overview of Validation Items ........................................................................................................... 16-3 1
16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen ..................................................................................................... 16-7
16.4 Executing Validation ...................................................................................................................... 16-15
16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details ................................................................................................. 16-21 1
16.6 Auto Validation Item Details .......................................................................................................... 16-49

16

16

16

16

1459 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-1


Parameter Configuration Screen for
16.1 16.1

Instrument Validation
When you press the [Maintenance] key in the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), the
1616
[Maintenance] screen (Fig. 16.1) will be displayed (^ Chapter 15).

1616

1616

1616

16
Fig. 16.1 [Maintenance] screen
16 When you select [1. Validation] (press the key) in the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 16.1), the
Parameter Configuration screen for Instrument Validation (Fig. 16.2) will be displayed.
16

16

16

16

16

16

Fig. 16.2 Parameter Configuration screen for Instrument Validation


16
In this screen, complete the validation setting, select validation items, and execute the validations.
Then you can check instrument function (i.e., the validation process of measurement, evaluation, and
16
result printout).
For details on the validation functions in the Parameter Configuration screen, see "16.3 Parameter
Configuration Screen".

16

16

16-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1460 OF 4699


16.2 Overview of Validation Items
16.2

This section describes the items that UV-1800 allows you to validate with its validation functions.
16

16.2.1 Semi-Auto Items


The semi-auto items are validation items that require validation products such as optical filters.
Therefore, when performing validation using the standard sample compartment, the operator must
perform the key operation and insert/remove the validation products as instructed by the messages
displayed at screen bottom. However, when using optional multiple cell holders such as Multi-cell and
CPS-240, the validation process can be performed automatically for each validation item. For details, 16
refer to "16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details".
16
Table 16.1 List of Semi-Auto Validation Items

Items Description
16
Photometric Accuracy The optical filter for transmittance calibration*1 is measured
(^ 16.5.1) (absorbance or transmittance), and then the deviation of the
measured values from the standard values for calibration 1
(standard values) indicated on the filter is used for the
evaluation.
For this validation, up to 4 types of filters can be simultaneously 1
used.
To produce a more accurate validation, it is recommended to
perform the validation at or near the reagent (filter) temperature 1
specified in the certificate of the calibration filter.
Moreover, when defining the criteria, add the calibration filter
accuracy described in the certificate. 1
Photometric Repeatability The optical filter for transmittance calibration*1 is used to
(^ 16.5.2) measure the photometric value (absorbance or transmittance) at 1
an arbitrarily specified wavelength three times. The mean value
is obtained, and then the deviation of the measured values from
that mean value is used to evaluate the results. 1
For this validation, up to 4 types of filters can be simultaneously
used.

Stray Light Stray light is represented by the ratio of the sum of light intensity
1
(^ 16.5.3) at wavelengths other than the specified one to the intensity of
light coming from the monochromator at the specified
1
wavelength. It is possible to evaluate the stray light value at the
following wavelengths.
• 200 nm - A solution of potassium chloride (12 g/l) is used.
1
• 220 nm - A solution of sodium iodine (10 g/l) is used.
• 340 nm/370 nm - A solution of sodium nitrite (50 g/l) is used.
The UV-1800 System User's Guide, "6.3.7 Calibration Curve
16
Curvature" explains absorbance errors due to stray light. Refer to
the section when defining the criteria.

16

16

1461 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-3


16.2 Overview of Validation Items

1616 Items Description

Resolution The absorbance spectrum of a toluene solution in hexane


(^ 16.5.4) (0.02 %V/V) is measured. The absorbance ratio between the
maximum (peak) value near 269 nm and the minimum (valley)
value near 266 nm is obtained, and this value is evaluated.
This validation conforms to the verification method of resolution
specified in the European Pharmacopoeia.

Wavelength Accuracy The filter for wavelength calibration*1 is measured, and then the
1616 (^ 16.5.5) deviation from the reference wavelength indicated on the filter is
used to evaluate the validation result.
When defining the criteria, add the calibration filter accuracy
1616 (inaccuracy) described in the certificate.

*1 The National Institute of Standard and Technology (NIST), the Japan Quality Assurance
1616 Organization (JQA), and other organizations evaluate and supply glass-optical filters and solution
filters for calibrators of spectrometer transmittance (absorbance) and wavelength indication values.
Various types of the filter are available depending on the wavelength and the type of vertical axis
16 ranges to be calibrated.

The following table shows a list of validation product names used for the semi-auto validation.
16

Validation
16 item
No. Product name Source or Shimadzu P/N

Photometric 1 Optical filter for Procure from the NIST or the


16 Accuracy / transmittance calibration*1 Japan Quality Assurance
Photometric Organization (JQA).
Repeatability
16
Wavelength 2 Filter for wavelength Procure from the NIST or the
Accuracy calibration*1 Japan Quality Assurance
16 Organization (JQA).

Resolution 3 Validation reagent for Procure from a reagent dealer.


resolution specified in the
16 European
Pharmacopoeia*2 (0.02 per
cent V/V solution of toluene
16 R in hexane R)

Stray Light 4 Sodium iodine solution Procure from a reagent dealer.


16 (10 g/l)

5 Sodium nitrite solution Procure from a reagent dealer.


(50 g/l)
16
6 Potassium chloride solution Procure from a reagent dealer.
(12 g/l)

7 10 mm cubic cell made of P/N 200-34442


quartz
16 8 Shutter block P/N 202-30338

*1 Use the filter calibrated at 1 nm band path (spectrum band width).


16 *2 Hexane solution is required for the blank.

16-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1462 OF 4699


16.2 Overview of Validation Items

16
NOTE
Since the cells 7 are used for 4, 5, and 6, as many are required as the number of reagents to be
measured.

16

16

16

16

16

16

1463 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-5


16.2 Overview of Validation Items

1616 16.2.2 Auto Items


The auto items are validation items that do not require validation products, which can be measured
and evaluated, and their results printed out automatically.
Table 16.2 shows a list of auto validation items.

Table 16.2 List of Auto Validation Items

Items Description
1616 Noise Level The time changes around the absorbance of 0 Abs at the
(^ 16.6.1) specified wavelength are measured for 1 minute, and the
deflection of the absorbance at that time is defined as noise level
1616 (P-P). The RMS value* is obtained from the measurement for 1
minute, and then both of these values are evaluated.

1616 Baseline Stability The time changes around absorbance of 0 Abs are measured
(^ 16.6.3) and then the measured change per hour is defined as baseline
stability. The value for baseline stability is evaluated.
16 This validation result is greatly influenced by the environment
temperature fluctuation.
It is recommended to perform the test when the power has been
16 turned ON for more than 1 hour (i.e., when the instrument
temperature is stable) in a place where the fluctuation of
environment temperature falls within 2 °C/H.
16
Baseline Flatness The baseline is corrected without a sample. Immediately after the
(^ 16.6.2) correction, the wavelengths are scanned. The curvature of the
16 spectrum obtained at that time is defined as baseline flatness,
and this value is evaluated.
It is recommended to perform the test when the power has been
16 turned ON for more than 1 hour (i.e., when the instrument
temperature is stable).

Resolution D2 The emission lines radiated from the deuterium (D2) lamp used
16 (^ 16.6.4) as the light source for the UV-1800 are measured. The half-value
width (spectrum bandwidth) of the obtained spectral waveform
for the emission lines is defined as the resolution, and this value
16
is evaluated.

Wavelength Accuracy D2 Emission line radiated from the deuterium (D2) lamp used as the
16 (Emission lines) light source for the UV-1800 is measured, and then the deviation
(^ 16.6.5) from the emission line wavelength is used to evaluate the
validation result.
16
Wavelength Repeatability D2 Emission line radiated from the deuterium (D2) lamp used as the
(^ 16.6.6) light source for the UV-1800 is measured three times. The mean
16 value is obtained, and then the deviation of the measured values
from that mean value is used to evaluate the results.

* The RMS value is obtained using the following equation:

Ai : Absorbance
∑ (Ai - Am)2 Am : Mean value of absorbance
16 RMS value =
N N : Number of data

16

16-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1464 OF 4699


16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen
16.3

When [1. Validation] is selected in the [Maintenance] screen (Fig. 16.1), the Parameter Configuration
16
screen for instrument validation (Fig. 16.3) will appear.
In this screen, you can perform general settings for the validation (^ "16.3.3 Validation Options"),
select validation items (^ "16.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing the Parameters"), and
start the validation (^ "16.4 Executing Validation").
The parameters set in this screen are saved to the UV-1800 when the validation is executed.
This means that the parameters of the previous validation are always stored in the instrument.

16
NOTE
If you return to the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1) after changing parameters without executing the
16
validation, the changed parameters will not be saved to the UV-1800, and the parameters of the
previous validation remain unchanged.
16

1
1 2

1
Highlighted item
Indicates the item has been
selected to be validated.
1
Sample module
Indicates the sample
module that has been 5
selected in "Validation 1
Options".

3 4 1
Fig. 16.3 Parameter Configuration screen for instrument validation
1

16

16

16

1465 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-7


16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen

1616 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

1 [Semi-Auto Switches to the Semi-Auto Items Selection screen.


items] ^ "16.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing
the Parameters"

2 [Auto items] Switches to the Auto Items Selection screen.


^ "16.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing
the Parameters"
1616
3 [Printout] Prints the list of the validation results at the last time.
^ "16.3.2 Printing Results"
1616 4 [Settings] Performs the following settings:
• Auto print: ON/OFF
• Using Multicell (6-position Micro Multi-cell,
1616 CPS-240): Yes/ No
• Print init. Status: ON/OFF
^ "16.3.3 Validation Options"
16
5 – Starts the validation for the selected items (of which
names are highlighted).
16

16.3.1 Selecting a Validation Item and Changing the Parameters


16 Press or key on the Main screen of the instrument validation (Fig. 16.3). The
Validation Options screen for the semi-automatic or full-automatic validation will appear.
16

16

16

16

16
Fig. 16.4 Validation Options screen
16

16

16

16

16-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1466 OF 4699


16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen

An example of selecting validation items and setting validation parameters is given below.
16
The following example describes the steps for selecting the validation items of "Photometric Accuracy"
and "Wavelength Accuracy D2".

1 Press the [Semi-Auto items] key on the


Parameter Configuration screen for instrument
validation.

16

16

16

2 Press the [1. Photometric accuracy] key on


the [Settings of Semi-Auto items] screen. 1

3 Using numeric keys, enter the item number of the


filter to be validated on the filter selection screen for
1

photometric accuracy.
1
Since the validation using "Standard filter 2" is
performed in this example, press the key. 1

NOTE 16
If the serial numbers have been input in the
Parameter Setting screen for standard filters, the
numbers are displayed in the Filter Selection
screen.
^ "16.5.1 Photometric Accuracy"
16

16

1467 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-9


16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen

1616 4 Press the key to change [1. Inspection] from


[No] to [Yes] in the Parameter Setting screen for
"Photometeric accuracy"/ "Standard fileter 2".

Set the other parameters at your option. (For details


of the setting methods, see "16.5.1 Photometric
Accuracy".)

1616
Press the key after completing the setting.

1616
5 Verify that "Standard filter 2" is highlighted in the
Filter Selection screen, and press the key.
1616

NOTE
16 The items to be validated are highlighted.

16

16

16 6 Verify that [1. Photometric accuracy] is highlighted in


the [Settings of Semi-Auto items] screen, and press
the key.
16

NOTE
16 The semi-auto items to be validated are
highlighted.

16

16
7 Press the [2. Auto items] key on the
Parameter Configuration screen for instrument
16 validation.

16 NOTE
The items to be validated are highlighted.

16

16

16-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1468 OF 4699


16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen

8 Press [5. Wavelength accuracy D2] key on


the [Setting of Auto items] screen.
16

16

9 Press the key to change [1. inspection] from


[No] to [Yes] in the Parameter Setting screen for "WL
16

accuracy D2".
16
Specify arbitrary values for measurement wavelength
and tolerance. For details on the setting procedure, 1
refer to "16.6.5 Wavelength Accuracy D2".
1
Press the key after completing the setting.

1
10 highlighted in the [Setting of Auto-items] screen, and
Verify that [5. Wavelength Accuracy D2] is

press the key. 1

1
NOTE
The auto items to be validated are highlighted.
1

1
11 Configuration screen.
Press the key to go back to the Parameter

NOTE
The items to be validated are highlighted. 1

16

16

16

1469 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-11


16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen

1616 16.3.2 Printing Results


When you press key in the Parameter Configuration screen for Instrument Validation (Fig.
16.3), all the recorded validation results are printed out. (Note that the results for items that have not
been validated are not printed out.)

While the "Auto print" command (^ "16.3.3 Validation Options") prints screen hard copies such as
spectral waveforms and time course curves, the "PrintOut" command prints only the validation results.
1616 For details on the contents of each validation item, refer to the printout example of each validation item
described in "16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details" and "16.6 Auto Validation Item Details".

1616

1616 Header Part


The instrument information is
printed.

16
The date and time of the
end of the photometric
accuracy validation is
16 printed.

16
The date and time of the
end of the wavelength
16 accuracy D2 validation is
printed.

16

Fig. 16.5 Example of Printing Results


16
When performing the instrument validation, the UV-1800 stores only the latest result for each
validation item. Therefore, upon the completion of the validation of a new item, the previously obtained
16 result is overwritten by the new one. The date of inspection is stored and printed for each validation
item.
16

NOTE
16 If a commercially available printer is selected as used, the left margin can be set in a range
between 0 and 9. In this case, the printout format is the same as that of a screen hardcopy printer.
To select a printer and then set it up, select [8. Utilities]/[5. Printer] in the Mode screen. (See "14.1.4
16 Printer Setting".)

16

16

16-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1470 OF 4699


16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen

16.3.3 Validation Options 16


When the key is pressed on the Parameter Configuration screen for instrument validation
(Fig. 16.3), the Validation Settings screen appears.

1
2

3 16

16

16

Fig. 16.6 Validation Settings screen 1

1
Key
No. Display Description
Operation

1 [Auto print] Select whether or not to perform Auto print after each 1
validation. Each pressing of the key toggles between
[ON] and [OFF].
If Auto print is set to [ON], the result is printed whenever 1
each validation option is completed. If a spectrum or time
course is measured during the validation, the
corresponding graph is also printed out (as a hard copy of 1
the screen). For the print format, see the sections of each
validation option that describe changing the parameter.
1
NOTE
1) The printout format does not depend upon the printer.
Therefore, the result is printed out in the same format 1
on both a screen hardcopy printer and a commercially
available printer.
2) When a screen hardcopy printer is used with Auto 1
print set to [ON], the validation result cannot be
printed out if the printer is set to "OFF LINE".
16

16

16

1471 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-13


16.3 Parameter Configuration Screen

1616 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

2 [Using Select whether or not to use the optional multicell (6-cell)


Multicell] or CPS-240 for validation. Using the
keys, move the cursor to the desired sample module, and
confirm with the key.

Cursor
1616

1616 Fig. 16.7 Sample Module Selection screen

When executing semi-automatic validation items using


1616 the multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240, the validation can be
implemented by automatically switching filters and
reagents to be used. For the instruction of how to use
16 these options and the operation details, refer to the
instruction on each validation item (16.5).

16 3 [Print init. Allows you to select whether or not to print the results of
status] initialization and various self-diagnosis checks performed
when the power is turned ON. Each pressing of the key
16 toggles between ON and OFF.
If [Print init. status] is set to [ON], the selected
initialization items and the results are recorded and
16 printed out.
The date and time of the
end of the initialization
16

16

16

16
(Printout format of the initialization result record)
16 – – Returns to the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig.
16.3).

16

16

16

16-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1472 OF 4699


16.4 Executing Validation
16.4

When you press the key in the Parameter Configuration screen (Fig. 16.3), the validation for
16
highlighted items is started.
First, the UV-1800 checks the expiration date of the validation products used.
If any one of the validation products registered to the executed semi-auto item has expired, the entire
validation process is terminated and you will return to the Parameter Configuration screen
(^ "16.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products").

The validations are executed from semi-auto items to auto-items.


16
Since the semi-automatic validation is carried out interactively, the operator must type in data and add/
remove validation products in accordance with the messages displayed on the screen.
16

Validation item/Current status


Indicates the validation item in progress 16
and the current status.
This example ("1/2") shows that total
four validation items have been
selected and the first item is being 1
executed.

Operation message 1

Fig. 16.8 Validation Execution screen (Photometric accuracy)


1
The validation results will be displayed and saved for each validation item upon completion of the
validation.
1
When the auto print function is enabled (^ "16.3.3 Validation Options"), the results will be
automatically printed. For printout examples, refer to "16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details" and
"16.6 Auto Validation Item Details".
1

The key functions during validation are given in the following: 1

Key Operation Description 1


Terminates the current validation item, and returns to the Parameter
Configuration screen (Fig. 16.2). (No more validation is executed.)
16
Terminates the current validation item, and proceeds to the next
validation item.

Any keys other than the Allows you to proceed to the next operation when an operation
above message is displayed.
16

16

1473 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-15


16.4 Executing Validation

1616
NOTE
Although the current validation (item) is terminated, the results of the validation items completed up
to that point are saved to the UV-1800. Therefore, those results can be printed out (^ "16.3.2
Printing Results").
For examples of screen displays during validation, refer to "16.4.2 Example of Executing
Validation".

1616

1616

1616

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1474 OF 4699


16.4 Executing Validation

16.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products 16


For the semi-auto validation items, the performance assurance period for validation products, and
validities of standard values and calibration values can be entered in the Validation Parameter Setting
screen. (^ "16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details")

16

16

Validity date for 16


validation products

1
Fig. 16.9 Validation Parameter Setting screen (Photometric accuracy)

When starting the validation process using the instrument validation function, first the UV-1800 checks 1
the expiration date of the validation products.
If any one of the validation products for the scheduled validation items is expired, the entire validation 1
is aborted.
(The following message appears, and by pressing any key you will return to the Parameter
1
Configuration screen for the instrument validation (Fig. 16.3)).

In such a case, verify the validation product expiration date in the Parameter Configuration screen for 1
the item in question, and change any discrepancies to the correct product information.
1

16

16

16

1475 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-17


16.4 Executing Validation

1616 16.4.2 Example of Executing Validation


An example of executing the validation is given below.
The following example describes the steps for executing the validation items of "Photometric
accuracy" and "Wavelength accuracy D2".
Note that the validation parameters in the example below are those specified in "16.3.1 Selecting a
Validation Item and Changing the Parameters".

1616
1 Verify that the title of the validation item to be
executed is highlighted in the Parameter Cofiguration
screen for instrument validation.
1616 (This example shows that "Photometric accuracy"
and "Wavelength accuracy D2" will be executed.)
1616

16
2 Press the key to start the validation.

16 (The validation of the photometric accuracy is started.)

16
3 Verify that nothing is placed in the sample
compartment as instructed in the message, and
16 press the key to start baseline correction.

16 (The baseline correction is performed.)

16 4 When the baseline correction is completed, the next


message appears. Insert the standard filter to follow
the message, and press the key.
16

16
5 The photometric values at the specified wavelengths
are measured sequentially, and the evaluation
results are displayed simultaneously based on the
deviation from the standard value.
16

16 NOTE
When "Auto print" is set to "ON" (^ "16.3.3
Validation Options"), the validation results are
automatically printed (^ Fig. 16.9).

16

16

16-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1476 OF 4699


16.4 Executing Validation

6 When the measurements and evaluations are


completed for all wavelengths, the message in the
16

figure at right appears.


Remove the standard filter, verify that nothing is
placed in the sample compartment as instructed in the
message, and close the sample comartment cover.

Press the key to proceed to the next 16


validation item.

(The validation of the wavelength accuracy D2 is started.) 16

7 The Validation screen for [Wavelength accuracy D2]


is displayed, and the waveform is plotted in real time.
16

1
When both 486.0 nm and 656.1 nm are selected for
measurement wavelengths, first the emission line of
1
656.1 nm is measured, and the result is displayed at
the bottom of the screen. Then, the Measurement
screen for the emission line 486.0 nm immediately
1
appears, and the measurement is started.
1

NOTE 1
When "Auto print" is set to "ON" (^ "16.3.3
Validation Options"), the validation results are
automatically printed (^ Fig. 16.10). 1

1
8 When all scheduled validation items are completed,
you will return to the Parameter Configuration screen
for the instrument validation. 1

16

16

16

1477 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-19


16.4 Executing Validation

1616
Header Part
Instrument information is
printed. Printed when completing the
photometric accuracy
Validation end time is
validation.
printed for each validation
item.

1616

1616

1616

16
Printed when completing the
validation of wavelength
16 accuracy D2 at 656.1 nm
emission line.

16

16

16

16

16

16 Printed when completing the


validation of wavelength
accuracy D2.

16
The date and time of the
end of the wavelength
16 accuracy D2 validation is
printed.

Fig. 16.10 Example of Auto print

16

16

16-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1478 OF 4699


16.5 16.5Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

16.5.1 Photometric Accuracy 16


In the validation of the photometric accuracy, the optical filter for transmittance calibration is measured
(absorbance or transmittance), and then the deviation of the measured values from the standard
values for calibration (standard values) indicated on the filter is used for the evaluation.
For the validation, the calibrated four types of filters are available.
If you enter the item number of each filter on the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig. 16.11) with
numeric keys, the screen appears for setting the validation parameters for the filter (Fig. 16.12). Press
the key to return to the Validation Options screen for the semi-auto items (Fig. 16.4). 16

16
Serial number
Displays the serial number
Highlighted row
entered in the Parameter
Indicates the filter to be
Setting screen (Fig. 16.12). 16
validated.

Fig. 16.11 Standard Filter Selection screen 1

1
2 1
3
Measurement λ
Standard values
1
4
5 1
6

16
7

Fig. 16.12 Parameter Setting screen for photometric accuracy (standard filter 2)

16

16

1479 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-21


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the photometric


accuracy is validated or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and
[No].

2 [Meas. Mode] Select the unit of photometric values. Each pressing of


the key toggles between [Abs (Absorbance)] and [%T
1616 (Transmittance)]. By this operation, the filter standard
value and tolerance are also switched to those
specified for the selected photometric mode.
1616
NOTE
The standard value and tolerance for the filter in the
1616 absorbance/ transmittance mode are separately
stored. Therefore, if the measurement mode is
changed to Transmittance when the standard value
16 and tolerance were entered in the Absorbance mode,
the values entered in the Absorbance mode will not be
converted into the ones in the Transmittance mode.
16
3 [Standard values] Enter the measurement wavelengths and standard
values for the filter.
16
Measurement λ Specify the wavelengths at which
to measure the photometric
16 values. The wavelength entered
here is the wavelength tolerance
for the optical filters used for the
16 validation. For the photometric
accuracy validation, five different
wavelengths can be specified.
16
Standard value Enter the standard values
corresponding to the
16 measurement specified in the item
above. The unit of standard values
changes according to the unit
16 specified in [2. Meas. mode] on
the screen shown in Fig. 16.12.
The input range of standard
16 values is between 0.000 and
4.000Abs and between 0.00 and
99.99 %.
16

16

16

16-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1480 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

No.
Key
Display Description
16
Operation

4 [Serial number] Enter the serial number of the filter. The number
entered here will be saved as a validation parameter
for the photometric accuracy and printed out together
with the validation result.

16

16

16

1
Fig. 16.13 [Setting serial No.] screen

Press the keys to move the cursor


1
to the desired character in the list. Then, press the
key to enter the selected character in the
input filename column. After you finish entering the
1
serial number by repeating the same procedure, press
the [End] key to return to the Parameter
Setting screen (Fig. 16.12).
1
NOTE
If you press the [End] key without entering
any serial number, no serial number will be set. 1
5 [Good THRU] Enter the validity for the standard value of the filter.
The date entered here is saved as a validation 1
parameter and used to automatically check to see
whether the validation expires or not when the
validation is performed. If a filter with expired validity is 1
used, the validation cannot be performed.
(^ "16.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation
Products") 1
NOTE
The format for displaying the date is the same as
specified in [8. Utilities]/[6. Clock set] on the Mode 1
screen.

16

16

16

1481 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-23


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

6 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the


validation result.
The unit of the tolerance changes according to the unit
specified in [2. Meas. mode] in Fig. 16.12. The
tolerance input range is between 1 and 99 mAbs for
absorbance (Abs) and between 0 and 99 % for
1616 transmittance.
The tolerance for transmittance is set as a relative
value. Therefore, if, for example, the tolerance is set to
1616 2 % of the standard value 23.92 (%T), the allowance
range will be "23.92 0.48 (23.44 - 24.40) %T" obtained
.
by [23.92 × (2/100) =. 0.48].
1616 NOTE
To define tolerances, the calibration accuracy of the
standard filter must be considered.
16 For example, if the filter accuracy (relative accuracy to
transmittance) is ± 1 %, the value converted to
absorbance will be approx. "± 0.0043 Abs". Therefore,
16 when checking whether the instrument photometric
accuracy falls within ± 0.004 Abs by using a 10 %
transmittance filter, define the tolerance as "within
16 ±0.008 Abs (the fourth decimal place is rounded off)".

7 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for photometric accuracy to the


16 recommended value (default value).
The recommended value is "within ± 8 mAbs" for
absorbance (Abs) or "within ± 2 %" for transmittance
16 (%T).
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic
16
inspection performed by Shimadzu.

– – Returns to the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig.


16 16.11).

„ Filter arrangement when using the multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240


16
When using the optional cell holder such as multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240, set the standard filters as
shown in Fig. 16.14.
16
Cell 6: Standard Filter 4

16 Cell 5: Standard Filter 3

Cell 4: Standard Filter 2

Cell 3: Standard Filter 1

Cell 2: (None)
16
Cell 1: (None)

16 (Sample module front)

Fig. 16.14 Set positions for standard filter


16-24 UV-1800 SERIES 1482 OF 4699
16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

„ Validation flow 16
After the validation is started, carry out the validation process as instructed by messages displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The validation flow of the photometric accuracy using standard filter 1 is shown below. If multiple
standard filters are to be used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each filter.

[UV-1800 Operation] [Validation Procedure] [Multi-cell holder in use]


16
(Start the validation.) (Moves to cell 1.)

• Remove the standard filter, 16


The message appears. • Remove the standard filter, etc. used for the previous
etc. used for the previous validation.
validation. • Set the standard filter. (Fig. 16
• Verify that nothing has been 16.13)
set on the cell holder.
Baseline Correction → Press the key. 1

Measure the blank value at each 1


measurement wavelength.

1
The message appears.*1 Insert the standard filter 2 into (Moves to cell 4.)
the cell holder.
→ Press the key. 1

Measure the "Standard filter 2" and 1


Evaluate. (Fig. 16.16)

1
Auto Print*2 (Fig. 16.17)

1
Proceed to the next validation. (Moves to cell 1.)

1
1
* Not displayed when using the Multi-cell.
*2 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
Options")
1

Fig. 16.15 Validation flow of photometric accuracy


16

16

16

1483 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-25


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616

Indicates the deviation for


(Measured value - Standard
value).

1616

1616

1616
Fig. 16.16 Validation Results screen for photometric accuracy (in progress)
16 The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below:

16

16
Evaluation result

Validation end time


16

16

16
Fig. 16.17 Auto print format for photometric accuracy

16 The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations at all
validation wavelengths for the filter are within tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is

16 printed out.

16

16

16

16

16-26 UV-1800 SERIES 1484 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

16.5.2 Photometric Repeatability 16


In the validation of photometric repeatability, the optical filter for transmittance calibration is used to
measure the photometric value (absorbance or transmittance) at an arbitrarily specified wavelength
three times. The mean value is obtained, and then the deviation of the measured values from that
mean value is used to evaluate the results.
For this validation, the calibrated four types of filters are available.
If you enter the item number of each filter on the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig. 16.18) with
numeric keys, the screen appears for setting the validation parameters for the filter (Fig. 16.19). Press 16
the key to return to the Validation Options screen for the semi-auto items (Fig. 16.4).

16

Serial number
Highlighted row
Displays the serial number 16
entered in the Parameter
Indicates the filter
Setting screen (Fig. 16.19).
to be validated.
1

1
Fig. 16.18 Standard Filter Selection screen
1

1 1
2
3
1
4
5
6 1

16

7
Fig. 16.19 Parameter Setting screen for photometric repeatability (standard filter 2)

16

16

1485 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-27


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616
Key
No. Display Description
Operation

1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the validation is


performed or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No].

2 [Meas. Select the unit of photometric values. Each pressing of


1616 mode] the key toggles between [Abs (Absorbance)] and [%T
(Transmittance)]. By this operation, the tolerance is also
switched to that specified for the selected photometric
1616 mode.
NOTE
The tolerance in the absorbance/transmittance mode is
1616 independently stored.
Therefore, for example, if the measurement mode is
changed to Transmittance when the standard value and
16 tolerance were entered in the Absorbance mode, the
values entered in the Absorbance mode will not be
converted into the ones in the Transmittance mode.
16
3 [Wavelength] Enter a wavelength at which to measure the photometric
value.
16
4 [Serial Enter the serial number of the filter. The number entered
number] here will be saved as a validation parameter for the
16 photometric repeatability and printed out together with the
validation result.

16

16

16

16
Fig. 16.20 [Setting serial No.] screen
16
Press the keys to move the cursor to
the desired character in the list. Then, press the
key to enter the selected character in the input filename
16
column. After you finish entering the serial number by
repeating the same procedure, press the [End]
key to return to the Parameter Setting screen (Fig.
16.19).
NOTE
16 If you press the [End] key without entering any
serial number, no serial number will be set.

16

16-28 UV-1800 SERIES 1486 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

No.
Key
Display Description
16
Operation

5 [Good Enter the validity for the standard value of the filter. The
THRU] date entered here is saved as a validation parameter and
used to automatically check to see whether the validation
expires or not when the validation is performed. If a filter
with expired validity is used, the validation cannot be
performed.
(^ "16.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products") 16
NOTE
The format for displaying the date is the same as
specified in [8. Utilities]/[6. Clock set] on the Mode screen 16
(Fig. 2.1).

6 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the 16


validation result.
The unit of the tolerance changes according to the unit
specified in [2. Meas. mode] in Fig. 16.19. The tolerance 1
input range is between 1 and 99 mAbs for absorbance
(Abs) and between 0 and 99 % for transmittance.
1
7 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for photometric accuracy to the
recommended value (default value).
The recommended value is "within ± 4 mAbs" for
1
absorbance (Abs) or "within ± 1 %T" for tolerance (%T).
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic 1
inspection (repeatability near 1 Abs) performed by
Shimadzu.
1
– – Returns to the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig.
16.18).
1

16

16

16

1487 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-29


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616 „ Filter arrangement when using the multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240


When using the optional cell holder such as multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240, set the standard filters as
shown in Fig. 16.21.

Cell 6: Standard Filter 4

Cell 5: Standard Filter 3

Cell 4: Standard Filter 2


1616
Cell 3: Standard Filter 1

1616 Cell 2: (None)

Cell 1: (None)
1616
(Sample module front)

16 Fig. 16.21 Set positions for standard filters

„ Validation flow
16
After the validation is started, carry out the validation process as instructed by messages displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
16 The validation flow of the photometric repeatability using standard filter 1 is shown below. If multiple
standard filters are to be used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each filter.
16
NOTE
When using the Multi-cell, standard filters cannot be removed nor inserted.
16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16-30 UV-1800 SERIES 1488 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

[UV-1800 Operation] [Validation Procedure] [Multi-cell holder in use] 16


(Start the validation.) (Moves to cell 1.)

• Remove the standard filter,


The message appears. • Remove the standard filter, etc. used for the previous
etc. used for the previous validation.
validation. • Set the standard filter. (Fig.
• Verify that nothing has been 16.21)
set on the cell holder.
Execute Auto Zero at the → Press the key. 16
measurement wavelength.

16
The message appears*1. Insert the standard filter 2 into (Moves to cell 4.)
the cell holder.
→ Press the key. 16

Measure the standard filter 2 for the 1


first time.

1
1 Remove the standard filter 2
The message appears* .
from the cell holder, and insert
1
it again (removal and insert).
→ Press the key.

Measure the standard filter 2 for the


1
second time.

1
The message appears*1. Remove the standard filter 2
and insert it again. 1
→ Press the key.

1
Measure the standard filter 2 for the
third time.
1

Print out the result (Fig. 16.23).


1

Auto Print*2 (Fig. 16.24)


16

Proceed to the next validation. (Returns to cell 1.)

*1 Not displayed when using the Multi-cell.


*2 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation 16
Options")
Fig. 16.22 Validation flow of photometric repeatability
16

1489 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-31


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616

Indicates the mean


1616 value of three measured
values.
Indicates the deviation
for (Mean value -
1616 Standard value).

1616

Fig. 16.23 Validation Execution screen for photometric repeatability


16
The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below:

16

16
Evaluation result

Validation end time


16

16 Measured value Deviation

16 Fig. 16.24 Auto print format for photometric repeatability

The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations between all
16 measured values at the validation wavelength and the mean value are within the tolerance, [Pass] is
printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
16

16

16

16

16

16-32 UV-1800 SERIES 1490 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

16.5.3 Stray Light 16


Stray light is represented by the ratio of the sum of light intensity at wavelengths other than the
specified one to the intensity of light coming from the spectroscope at the specified wavelength.
In this validation, the transmittance measured at a specific wavelength using an arbitrary test filter is
defined as stray light, and this value is evaluated. Up to four validation wavelengths can be used for
validation.
If you enter the item number of each filter on the Test Filter Selection screen (Fig. 16.25) with numeric
keys, the screen appears for setting the validation parameters for the filter (Fig. 16.26). Press the 16
key to return to the Validation Options screen for the semi-auto items (Fig. 16.4).

16

Highlighted row Serial number


Indicates the filter to be Displays the serial number 16
validated. entered in the Parameter
Input screen (Fig. 16.26).

1
Fig. 16.25 Test Filter Selection Screen
1

1 1
2
3
1
4
5
1

16

Fig. 16.26 Parameter Setting screen for stray light (test filter 2)

16

16

1491 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-33


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616
Key
No. Display Description
Operation

1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether stray light is validated or


not. Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No].

2 [Wavelength] Enter a wavelength at which to measure the stray light.

3 [Serial Enter the serial number of the filter. The number entered here will
1616 number] be saved as a validation parameter for the stray light and printed
out together with the validation result.

1616

1616

16

16

Fig. 16.27 [Setting serial No.] screen


16
Press the keys to move the cursor to the
desired character in the list. Then, press the key to
16 enter the selected character in the input filename column. After
you finish entering the serial number by repeating the same
procedure, press the [End] key to return to the
16 Parameter Setting screen (Fig. 16.26).
NOTE
16 If you press the [End] key without entering any serial
number, no serial number will be set.

4 [Good Enter the validity for the test filter. The date entered here is saved
16 THRU] as a validation parameter and used to automatically check to see
whether the validation expires or not when the validation is
performed. If a filter with expired validity is used, the validation
16
cannot be performed.
(^ "16.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products")
16 NOTE
The format for displaying the date is the same as specified in [8.
Utilities]/[6. Clock set] on the Mode screen.
16
5 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the validation result.
The tolerance input range is between 0.00 and 1.00 %.

16

16

16-34 UV-1800 SERIES 1492 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

No.
Key
Display Description
16
Operation

6 [Recomnd] This allows you to set the recommended values (default values)
when placing the following solution filters as test filters 1 to 4.
The recommended values for each validation are shown below.
Test Test Test Test
Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 4
Corresponding filter Sodium Sodium Potas- –
16
iodine nitrite sium
solution solution chloride
(10 g/l) (50 g/l) solution 16
(12 g/l)
Measurement λ 220 nm 340 nm 198 nm –
16
Tolerance 0.05 % 0.05 % 1% 0.05 %
(recommended value) Max. Max. Max. Max.
1
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic inspection
performed by Shimadzu. 1
– – Returns to the Test Filter Selection screen (Fig. 16.25).

„ Filter arrangement when using the multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240 1


When using the optional cell holder such as multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240, set the test filters as shown
in Fig. 16.23. 1

Cell 6: Test Filter 4 1


Cell 5: Test Filter 3

Cell 4: Test Filter 2 1

Cell 3: Test Filter 1


1
Cell 2: Shutter block

Cell 1: (None)
1
(Sample module front)

1
Fig. 16.28 Set positions for test filters

16

16

16

1493 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-35


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616 „ Validation flow


After the validation is started, carry out the validation process as instructed by messages displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The validation flow of the stray light using test filter 1 is shown below. If multiple test filters are to be
used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each filter.

[UV-1800 Operation] [Validation Procedure] [Multi-cell holder in use]


1616
(Start the validation.) (Moves to cell 1.)

1616 • Remove the standard filter,


The message appears. • Remove the standard filter, etc. used for the previous
etc. used for the previous validation.
1616 validation. • Set the test filter. (Fig. 16.28)
• Verify that nothing has been
set on the cell holder.
16 → Press the key.
Execute Auto Zero at the
measurement wavelength.
16 (Moves to cell 2.)
Insert the shutter block into the
cell holder.
16 The message appears*1. → Press the key.

16
Perform the measurement with the
light flux blocked
16 (Measurement of 0 %)
(Moves to cell 4.)
The message appears*1. Remove the shutter block from
16 the cell holder, and insert the
test filter 2 into the cell holder.
→ Press the key.
16
Measure the test filter 2.

16

Print out the result (Fig. 16.30).


16

Auto Print*2 (Fig. 16.31)


16
Returns to cell 1.

Proceed to the next validation.

*1 Not displayed when using the Multi-cell.


16
*2 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
Options")
16 Fig. 16.29 Validation flow of stray light

16-36 UV-1800 SERIES 1494 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

16

Indicates the stray light for


("Sample" - "0 %"). 16

16

16
Fig. 16.30 Validation Results screen for stray light

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below: 1

1
Evaluation result

Validation end time


1

Fig. 16.31 Auto print format for stray light


1
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the stray light values of all
tested "test filters" are within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
1

NOTE 1
The header is added to the above format when the result is actually printed out. (For further details
of the header, see 16.4.2.)
1

16

16

16

1495 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-37


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616 16.5.4 Resolution


For the validation of resolution, the absorbance spectrum of a toluene solution in hexane (0.02 %V/V)
is measured. The absorbance ratio between the maximum (peak) value near 269 nm and the
minimum (valley) value near 266 nm is obtained, and this value is evaluated.

1
1616 2 Serial number
Displays the serial number
3 entered in this Setting screen.
4
1616

1616

16

16
5
Fig. 16.32 Parameter Setting screen for resolution
16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16-38 UV-1800 SERIES 1496 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

No.
Key
Display Description
16
Operation

1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the validation is


performed or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and
[No].

2 [Serial number] Enter the serial number of the solution. The number
entered here will be saved as a validation parameter
for the resolution and printed out together with the 16
validation result.

16

16

Fig. 16.33 [Setting serial No.] screen


1
Press the keys to move the cursor
to the desired character in the list. Then, press the
key to enter the selected character in the 1
input filename column. After you finish entering the
serial number by repeating the same procedure, press
the [End] key to return to the Parameter 1
Setting screen (Fig. 16.32).
NOTE 1
If you press the [End] key without entering
any serial number, no serial number will be set.

3 [Good THRU] Enter the validity for the solution. The date entered 1
here is saved as a validation parameter and used to
automatically check to see whether the validation
expires or not when the validation is performed. If a
1
solution with expired validity is used, the validation
cannot be performed.
(^ "16.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation
1
Products")
NOTE 16
The format for displaying the date is the same as
specified in [8. Utilities]/[6. Clock set] on the Mode
screen.

4 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the measurement


result of resolution in a range between 1.0 and 2.0.
16

16

1497 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-39


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

5 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for resolution to the


recommended value (default value).
The recommended value is more than 1.5.
NOTE
Shimadzu recommends the value above for the
inspection tolerance.
1616
– – Returns to the [Settings of Semi-Auto items] screen
(Fig. 16.4).
1616
„ Solution arrangement when using the multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240
1616 When using the optional cell holder such as multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240, set the solution as shown in
Fig. 16.34.
16
Cell 6 (None)

16 Cell 5: (None)

Cell 4: (None)
16 Cell 3: Toluene-hexane solution (0.02 %V/V)

Cell 2: (None)
16
Cell 1: Hexane solution (blank)

16 (Sample module front)

Fig. 16.34 Set position for toluene-hexane solution


16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16-40 UV-1800 SERIES 1498 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

„ Validation flow 16
After the validation is started, carry out the validation process as instructed by messages displayed at
the bottom of the screen.

[UV-1800 Operation] [Validation Procedure] [Multi-cell holder in use]

(Start the validation.) (Moves to cell 1.)

• Remove the standard filter, 16


The message appears. • Remove the standard filter, etc. used for the previous
etc. used for the previous validation.
validation. • Set the toluene-hexane 16
• Verify that nothing has been solution and the blank. (Fig.
set on the cell holder. 16.34)
→ Press the key. 16

Baseline Correction 1

1
The message appears*1. • Insert the toluene-hexane (Moves to cell 3.)
solution into the
measurement side cell
holder, and the hexane
1
solution into the reference
Measure toluene-hexane solution. side cell holder.
→ Press the
1
key.

Print out the result (Fig. 16.36). 1

Auto Print*2 (Fig. 16.37) 1

Returns to cell 1.
Proceed to the next validation. 1

*1 Not displayed when using the Multi-cell. 1


*2 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
Options")
1
Fig. 16.35 Validation flow of resolution

16

16

16

1499 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-41


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616

Indicates the valley


wavelength and Abs (A)
Indicates the absorbance
obtained from the absorbance
ratio (B/A).
spectrum.

1616
Indicates the peak
wavelength and Abs (B)
1616 obtained from the
absorbance spectrum.

1616 Fig. 16.36 Validation Results screen for resolution

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below.
16

16

Evaluation result
16 Validation end time

16

Fig. 16.37 Auto print format for resolution


16
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item.
If the absorbance ratio obtained from the measurements is within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If
16
not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.

16

16

16

16

16

16

16-42 UV-1800 SERIES 1500 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

16.5.5 WL Accuracy 16
In the validation of wavelength accuracy, the optical filter for wavelength calibration is measured, and
then the deviation from the absorption peak wavelength (for calibrated filter) or the reference
wavelength indicated on the filter is used to evaluate the validation result.
Up to two types of calibrated filters can be used for the validation.
If you enter the item number of each filter on the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig. 16.38) with
numeric keys, the screen appears for setting the validation parameters for the filter (Fig. 16.39). Press
the key to return to the Validation Options screen for the semi-auto items (Fig. 16.4). 16

16
Highlighted row Serial number
Indicates the filter to be Displays the serial number
validated. entered in the Parameter
Setting screen (Fig. 16.39). 16

Fig. 16.38 Standard Filter Selection screen 1

1
2 1

1
3
4 1
5

16
6

Fig. 16.39 Parameter Setting screen for wavelength accuracy (standard filter 1)

16

16

1501 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-43


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the wavelength


accuracy is validated or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No].

2 [Wavelength] Enter the calibrated absorption peak wavelength. A


maximum of 15 wavelengths may be entered as
validation wavelengths. For example, if you want to
1616 validate 12 wavelengths, enter 0 when inputting the 13th
wavelength, and then press the key. All of the
13th and subsequent wavelengths will be displayed (set)
1616 as 0.0, and only the entered 12 wavelengths will be used
for the validation.

3 [Serial Enter the serial number of the filter. The number entered
1616
number] here will be saved as a validation parameter for the
photometric accuracy and printed out together with the
validation result.
16

16

16

16

16 Fig. 16.40 [Setting serial No.] screen

Press the keys to move the cursor to


16 the desired character in the list. Then, press the
key to enter the selected character in the input filename
column. After you finish entering the serial number by
16 repeating the same procedure, press the [End]
key to return to the Parameter Setting screen (Fig.
16.39).
16
NOTE
If you press the [End] key without entering any
serial number, no serial number will be set.
16
4 [Good Enter the validity for the standard value of the filter. The
THRU] date entered here is saved as a validation parameter and
16 used to automatically check to see whether the validation
expires or not when the validation is performed. If a filter
with expired validity is used, the validation cannot be
performed.
(^ "16.4.1 Monitoring Validity of Validation Products")
NOTE
16
The format for displaying the date is the same as
specified in [8. Utilities]/[6. Clock set] on the Mode screen
(Fig. 2.1).
16

16-44 UV-1800 SERIES 1502 OF 4699


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

No.
Key
Display Description
16
Operation

5 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the validation result


of wavelength accuracy in a range between 0.1 and 9.9.
NOTE
To define tolerances, the calibration accuracy (i.e.,
inaccuracy) of the standard filter must be considered.
For example, when filter accuracy is ± 0.3 nm and when
checking whether the instrument wavelength accuracy
falls within ± 0.3 nm, define the tolerance as "within
16
± 0.6 nm".
Note that tolerances cannot be defined for each
reference wavelength. When using a different accuracy 16
filter for each reference wavelength, add the largest
accuracy value among the reference wavelengths to be
inspected. 16
6 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for wavelength accuracy to the
recommended value (default value). The recommended
value is within ± 0.5 nm. 1
NOTE
The value above is the tolerance for the shipping
1
inspection performed by Shimadzu.

– – Returns to the Standard Filter Selection screen (Fig.


16.38). 1

„ Filter arrangement when using the multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240


1
When using the optional cell holder such as multicell (6-cell) or CPS-240, set the standard filters as
shown in Fig. 16.41.
1
Cell 6: (None)

Cell 5: (None)
1

Cell 4: Standard Filter 2


1
Cell 3: Standard Filter 1

Cell 2: (None)
1
Cell 1: (None)

(Sample module front) 1

Fig. 16.41 Set positions for standard filters


16

16

16

1503 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-45


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

1616 „ Validation flow


After the validation is started, carry out the validation process as instructed by messages displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The validation flow of the wavelength accuracy using standard filter 1 is shown below. If multiple
standard filters are to be used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each filter.

[UV-1800 Operation] [Validation Procedure] [Multi-cell holder in use]


1616 (Start the validation.) (Moves to cell 1.)

1616 The message appears. • Remove the standard filter, • Remove the standard filter,
etc. used for the previous etc. used for the previous
validation. validation.
1616 • Verify that nothing has been • Set the standard filter. (Fig.
set on the cell holder. 16.41)
→ Press the key.
16 Baseline Correction

16
Insert the standard filter 1 into
1
The message appears* . the cell holder.
16 → Press the key. (Moves to cell 3.)

16 (1) Measure the validation


wavelength*2.

16
(2) Display the result (Fig. 16.43).
16

16 (3) Print out the waveform (screen


hard copy)*3. (Fig. 16.42)

16
Perform (1) to (3) for each validation
16 wavelength.

16
Print out the result*3 (Fig. 16.44).

Proceed to the next validation. (Returns to cell 1.)

16 *1 Not displayed when using the Multi-cell.


*2 Spectrum measurement is performed within the range of 10 nm of the specified validation wavelength.
*3 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
16 Options")

Fig. 16.42 Validation flow of wavelength accuracy


16-46 UV-1800 SERIES 1504 OF 4699
16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

16

16

16

16
Fig. 16.43 Validation Results screen for wavelength accuracy

16

16

16

1505 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-47


16.5 Semi-Auto Validation Item Details

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below:
1616

Screen hard copy


1616 The spectrum at each
validation wavelength is
printed out in the format
of screen hard copy.
1616
Note) When a
commercially available
printer is used, the
1616 printout is ejected after
two spectra are printed
on A4 size paper.

16

16

16

16 Evaluation result

16
Validation end time
Result list
16

16

16 Fig. 16.44 Auto print format for wavelength accuracy

The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations at all the

16 validation wavelengths are within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.

16

16

16

16-48 UV-1800 SERIES 1506 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details
16.6

16.6.1 Noise Level 16


In the validation of noise level, the time changes around the absorbance of 0 Abs at the wavelength
specified for each model are measured for 1 minute, and the deflection of the absorbance at that time
is defined as noise level (P-P). The RMS value is obtained from the measurement for 1 minute and
then both of these values are evaluated.
For this validation, the noise level of up to four wavelengths can be validated.
If you enter the item number of validation wavelength on the Validation Wavelength Selection screen
(Fig. 16.45) with numeric keys, the screen appears for setting the parameters for the validation at the 16
wavelength (Fig. 16.46). Press the key to return to the Validation Options screen for the
auto-validation items (Fig. 16.4).
16

16
Highlighted row Validation wavelength
Indicates the filter to be Displays the wavelength
validated. entered in the Parameter
Setting screen (Fig. 16.46). 1

Fig. 16.45 Validation Wavelength Selection screen for noise level 1

1
1
2 1
3

16

Fig. 16.46 Parameter Input screen for noise level (noise level 1)
16

16

1507 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-49


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

1616 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the validation is performed


or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No].

2 [Wavelength] Enter a wavelength at which to measure noise level.

3 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the measurement


1616 result of noise level in a range between 0.01 and 9.99 (mAbs). In
the validation of noise level, both of the P-P (maximum noise
width) value and the RMS value are evaluated. Therefore, the
1616 tolerances for both values need to be entered.

4 [Recomnd] This allows you to set the recommended values (default values)
when measuring at the following wavelengths as noise level 1 to
1616 4.
The recommended values for each noise level are shown below.
16 Noise Noise Noise Noise
level 1 level 2 level 3 level 4
Validation 700 nm 500 nm 340 nm –
16
(P-P) (P-P) (P-P) (P-P)
0.30 0.60 2.4 2.4
16 Tolerance mAbs mAbs mAbs mAbs
(recommended value) (RMS) (RMS) (RMS) (RMS)
0.05 0.1 0.4 0.4
16 mAbs mAbs mAbs mAbs

NOTE
16
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic inspection
performed by Shimadzu.
16 – – Returns to the Validation Wavelength Selection screen (Fig.
16.45).

16

16

16

16

16

16

16-50 UV-1800 SERIES 1508 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

„ Validation flow 16
The validation is automatically implemented.
The validation flow of the noise level 1 is shown below. If multiple validation wavelengths are to be
used for the validation, the following procedure is performed for each wavelength.

[UV-1800 Operation]

(Start the validation.) 16

Execute Auto Zero at the validation wavelength of noise level 1.


16

Perform the 1-minute time course measurement at the validation wavelength 16


of noise level 1.

1
Display the validation result of noise level 1.
(Fig. 16.48)
1

Auto print*1 (Fig. 16.49)


1

Proceed to the next validation. 1

*1 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
Options")
1

Fig. 16.47 Validation flow of noise level


1

16

Fig. 16.48 Validation Results screen for noise level 16

16

1509 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-51


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below.
1616

1616
Screen hard copy

1616

1616

16

16 Validation end time


Evaluation result

16

Fig. 16.49 Auto print format for noise level


16
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the maximum noise width
(P-P) at the validation wavelength and the RMS value obtained from the measurement result are
16
within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16-52 UV-1800 SERIES 1510 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

16.6.2 Baseline Flatness 16


In the validation of baseline flatness, the baseline is corrected without putting a sample in the sample
module. Immediately after the correction, the wavelengths are scanned. The curvature of the
spectrum obtained at that time is defined as baseline flatness, and this value is evaluated.

1
2
16
3

16

16

4 1
Fig. 16.50 Parameter Input screen for baseline flatness

No. Key Operation Display Description


1
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the
validation is performed or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] 1
and [No].

2 [Scan range] Enter the wavelength range in which baseline


1
flatness is to be measured.
The input range is between 190 and 1100.

3 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance (range) used to evaluate the 1


measurement result of baseline flatness in a
range between 0.1 and 9.9.
1
4 [Recomnd] Resets the validation wavelength and tolerance
for baseline flatness to the recommended
values (default values). 1
The recommended tolerance value is within 1
mAbs.
NOTE 16
The values above are the tolerances for the
periodic inspection performed by Shimadzu.

– – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen


(Fig. 16.4).
16

16

1511 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-53


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

1616 „ Validation flow


The validation is automatically implemented.
The validation of baseline flatness must be performed when the UV-1800 is in a stable state.
Therefore, unless at least one hour has elapsed after the power has been turned ON, you are
prompted to select either forcibly performing the validation or postponing it until one hour elapses.
To select [Yes] or [No], move the cursor with the keys, and confirm with the
key.
1616

1616

1616
Fig. 16.51 Selection screen for validation execution

16 [Yes]: The validation of the baseline flatness is started with the current status.
[No]: The UV-1800 displays a message that the validation is currently on hold, and the validation

16 automatically starts one hour after the power has been turned ON.

The validation flow of the baseline flatness is shown below.


16

[UV-1800 Operation]
16
(Start the validation.)

16 Correct the baseline at validation wavelength (range).

16
Measure the spectrum at validation wavelength (range).

16
Display the validation result of baseline flatness. (Fig. 16.53)

16
Auto print*1 (Fig. 16.54)

16
Proceed to the next validation.

16
*1 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
Options")

Fig. 16.52 Validation flow of baseline flatness

16

16

16-54 UV-1800 SERIES 1512 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

16

16

16

16
Fig. 16.53 Validation Results screen for baseline flatness

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below. 1

1
Screen hard copy

Validation end time


Evaluation result 1

1
Fig. 16.54 Auto print format for baseline flatness

The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the curvature of the 16
baseline is within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.

16

16

1513 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-55


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

1616 16.6.3 Baseline Stability


In the validation of baseline stability, the time changes around absorbance of 0 Abs are measured and
then the measured change per hour is defined as baseline stability. The value for baseline stability is
evaluated.
In this validation, two wavelengths can be validated (Fig. 16.55).
If you press one of the numeric keys corresponding to the item numbers, the Parameter Input screen
for the item (Fig. 16.56) is displayed. Press the key to return to the Validation Options screen
1616 for the auto-validation items (Fig. 16.4).

1616

1616

16

16

16

16 Fig. 16.55 Validation Wavelength Selection screen

16

1
16 2
3

16

16

16

16
4

Fig. 16.56 Parameter Input screen for baseline stability (baseline stability 1)

16

16

16-56 UV-1800 SERIES 1514 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

No.
Key
Display Description
16
Operation

1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the validation is performed


or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No].

2 [Wavelength] Enter the wavelength at which to measure baseline stability.


The input range is between 190 and 1100 (nm).

3 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the measurement result of 16


baseline stability in a range between 0.1 and 9.9 (mAbs/H).

4 [Recomnd] This allows you to set the recommended values (default values)
when measuring at the following wavelengths as baseline
16
stability 1 to 2.
The recommended values for each baseline stability are shown
below.
16

Baseline Baseline
Stability 1 Stability 2 1
Validation 700 nm 340 nm
Tolerance Within Within 1
(recommended value) 1.0 mAbs/H 1.0 mAbs/H

NOTE 1
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic inspection
performed by Shimadzu.
1
– – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen (Fig. 16.4).

„ Validation flow 1
The validation is automatically implemented.
The validation of baseline stability must be performed when the UV-1800 is in a stable state.
1
Therefore, unless at least one hour has elapsed after the power has been turned ON, you are
prompted to select forcibly performing the validation or holding it until one hour elapses.
To select [Yes] or [No], move the cursor with the keys, and confirm with the 1
key.
1

16
Fig. 16.57 Selection screen for validation execution

[Yes]: The validation of the baseline stability is started with the current status.
[No]: The UV-1800 displays a message that the validation is currently on hold, and the validation
automatically starts one hour after the power has been turned ON. 16

16

1515 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-57


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

The validation flow of the baseline stability is shown below.


1616

[UV-1800 Operation]

(Start the validation.)

Execute Auto Zero at the validation wavelength of baseline stability 1

1616
Perform the 1-minute time course measurement at the validation wavelength
of baseline stability 1
1616
Display the validation result of baseline stability 1 (Fig. 16.59)
1616

Auto print*1 (Fig. 16.60)


16

Proceed to the next validation.


16

*1 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
16 Options")

Fig. 16.58 Validation flow of baseline stability


16

16

16

16

16

16

Fig. 16.59 Validation Results screen for baseline stability


16

16

16

16-58 UV-1800 SERIES 1516 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below.
16

16
Screen hard copy

16

16

Evaluation result 1
Validation end time

1
Fig. 16.60 Auto print format for baseline stability

The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the curvature of the 1
baseline is within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.

16

16

16

1517 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-59


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

1616 16.6.4 Resolution D2


In the validation of resolution, emission lines radiated from the deuterium (D2) lamp used as the light
source for the UV-1800 are measured. The half-value width (spectrum bandwidth) of the obtained
spectral waveform for the emission lines is defined as the resolution, and this value is evaluated.

1
1616 2

1616

1616

16

16
3

Fig. 16.61 Parameter Input screen for resolution D2


16
No. Key Operation Display Description

16 1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the


validation is performed or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes]
16 and [No].

2 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the


measurement result of resolution in a range
16
between 0.01 and 0.50 (nm).

3 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for resolution to the


16 recommended value (default value).
The recommendation value is 1.0 nm ± 0.20
max.
16
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the
16 periodic inspection performed by Shimadzu.

– – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen


(Fig. 16.4).
16

16

16

16-60 UV-1800 SERIES 1518 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

„ Validation flow 16
The validation is automatically implemented.
The validation flow of the resolution D2 is shown below.

[UV-1800 Operation]

(Start the validation.)

Measure the spectrum at 660 ~ 650 nm.


16

16
Display the validation result of the resolution (spectrum bandwidth).
(Fig. 16.63)
16
Auto print*1 (Fig. 16.64)
1

Proceed to the next validation.


1
1
* Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
Options")
1
Fig. 16.62 Validation flow of resolution D2

1
Fig. 16.63 Validation Results screen for resolution D2
16

16

16

1519 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-61


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below:
1616

1616
Screen hard copy

1616

1616

16

16 Evaluation result
Validation end time

16
Fig. 16.64 Auto print format for resolution D2

The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the resolution obtained from
16
the spectrum for the measured emission lines is equal to or less than the tolerance, [Pass] is printed
out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16-62 UV-1800 SERIES 1520 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

16.6.5 Wavelength Accuracy D2 16


In the validation of wavelength accuracy, emission line radiated from the deuterium (D2) lamp used as
the light source for the UV-1800 is measured, and then the deviation from the emission line
wavelength is used to evaluate the validation result.

1
2 16
3

16

16

1
4

Fig. 16.65 Parameter Input screen for wavelength accuracy D2


1

Key
No. Display Description
Operation 1
1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the photometric
accuracy D2 is validated or not. 1
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes] and [No].

2 [Wavelength] Emission lines at 486.0 and 656.1 nm are radiated from


the D2 lamp. Select which emission line is used or 1
whether both emission lines are used or not.
To select the validation wavelength, move the cursor to
the desired wavelength with the keys, 1
and confirm with the key.

Fig. 16.66 [Test wavelength] Selection screen


16

16

16

1521 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-63


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

1616 No.
Key
Display Description
Operation

3 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the validation result


of accuracy D2 in a range between 0.1 and 9.9 (nm).

4 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for wavelength accuracy D2 to the


recommended value (default value).
The recommended value is within ± 0.3 nm.

1616 NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the periodic
inspection performed by Shimadzu.
1616 5 – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen (Fig. 16.4).

„ Validation flow
1616
The validation is automatically implemented.
The validation flow of the wavelength accuracy using D2 lamp (only for 656.1 nm) is shown below.
16

[UV-1800 Operation]
16
(Start the validation.)

16 Measure the spectrum in a range between 660 ~ 650 nm.

16 Display the validation result at the emission line of 656.1 nm.


(Fig. 16.68)

16
Print out the waveform (screen hard copy) *1 (Fig. 16.69)
16
Measure the spectrum in a range between 490 ~ 480 nm.
16

Display the validation result at the emission line of 486.0 nm.


16

Print out the waveform (screen hard copy) *1 (Fig. 16.69)


16

Print out the result*1 (Fig. 16.69)


16

Proceed to the next validation.

*1 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
16 Options")

Fig. 16.67 Validation flow of wavelength accuracy with D2


16

16-64 UV-1800 SERIES 1522 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

16

16

16

16
Fig. 16.68 Validation Results screen for wavelength accuracy with D2 (in progress)

16

16

16

1523 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-65


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below:
1616

1616
Screen hard copy

1616

1616

16

16

16

16

16

16

16
Evaluation result
Validation end time

16

16 Fig. 16.69 Auto print format for wavelength accuracy with D2

The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations at all the
16
validation wavelengths are within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.

16

16

16-66 UV-1800 SERIES 1524 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

16.6.6 Wavelength Repeatability D2 16


In the validation of wavelength repeatability, the mean value is obtained from the detected
wavelengths at which the same emission lines as those radiated from the UV-1800 light source
deuterium (D2) lamp (656.1 nm. 486.0 nm) have been measured three times, and then the deviation
of the measured values from that mean value is used to evaluate the results.

1 16
2

16

16

1
3
1
Fig. 16.70 Parameter Input screen for wavelength repeatability D2

1
No. Key Operation Display Description

1 [Inspection] Select [Yes] or [No] to specify whether the 1


validation is performed or not.
Each pressing of the key toggles between [Yes]
and [No]. 1
2 [Tolerance] Enter the tolerance used to evaluate the
measurement result of wavelength repeatability 1
D2 in a range between 0.1 and 9.9.

3 [Recomnd] Resets the tolerance for wavelength


repeatability to the recommended value (default 1
value).
The recommended value is within ± 0.2 nm.
1
NOTE
The values above are the tolerances for the
periodic inspection performed by Shimadzu. 16
– – Returns to the [Setting of Auto items] screen
(Fig. 16.4).

16

16

1525 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-67


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

1616 „ Validation flow


The validation is automatically implemented.
The validation flow of the wavelength repeatability is shown below.

[UV-1800 Operation]

(Start the validation.)

1616 (1) Measure the spectrum at 660 ~ 650 nm.

1616
(2) Detect the peak wavelength.

1616
(3) Measure the spectrum at 490 ~ 480 nm.

16
(4) Detect the peak wavelength.

16
Repeat steps (1) through (4) another two times. (Fig. 16.72)

16
Auto print*1 (Fig. 16.73)
16
Proceed to the next validation.
16
*1 Auto print is performed only when [Settings] / [1. Auto print] is set to "ON". (^ "16.3.3 Validation
Options")
16
Fig. 16.71 Validation flow of wavelength repeatability

16

16

16

16

16
Fig. 16.72 Validation Results screen for wavelength repeatability
16

16-68 UV-1800 SERIES 1526 OF 4699


16.6 Auto Validation Item Details

The format of the validation result that is printed out after the validation is shown below:
16

Evaluation result
Validation end time

Measured value 16

16

Fig. 16.73 Auto print format for wavelength repeatability


16
The evaluation result is printed out next to the title of the validation item. If the deviations at all the
validation wavelengths are within the tolerance, [Pass] is printed out. If not, [>>Fail<<] is printed out.
1

1
16.6.7 Initialization Record
Every time the UV-1800 is turned ON, it is initialized and various self-diagnostics are performed. (See
1
"1.1 Application of Power".)
If the validation is started when the parameter [Print init. status] is set to [ON] in the Validation Settings
screen (Fig. 16.6), the results of the initialization and various self-diagnostics that have been 1
performed when the power is turned ON can be printed out.
1
Evaluation result
Validation end time
1

Fig. 16.74 Auto print format for initialization record


1

16

16

16

1527 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 16-69


17
17 PC Control

17

17

Chapter 17 PC Control
17

17

PC Control Mode is the mode in which the UV-1800 is controlled by an external personal computer (PC). When
this mode is selected, you can control the UV-1800 using the packaged UVProbe software or an arbitrarily 17
created control program.

CONTENTS 17
17.1 Connecting to a PC ......................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.2 Controlling with UVProbe Software ................................................................................................. 17-6 17
17.3 Controlling with External Commands............................................................................................. 17-12

17

17

17

17

17

17

1528 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-1


17.1 Connecting to a PC
17.1

To control the UV-1800 from an external computer, a device driver "Virtual COM port driver" must be
1717
installed on the computer.

NOTE
To install the "Virtual COM port driver", it is required to use the UVProbe Installation CD that is
packaged with the instrument.

If the driver is installed, the computer recognizes the UV-1800 as a COM port device, even though
1717 they are physically connected between USB ports. Therefore, to control the UV-1800, you need to
refer to the COM port No., which is indicated as "UV-1800 Series" in [Ports (COM & LPT)] on the
device manager.
1717
The following describes the procedures for installing the "Virtual COM port driver" and verifying the
COM port No. used for the PC Control.
1717
1 Set the UV-1800 to the PC Control mode.

1717 In the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1), switch the UV-1800 to the PC Control mode by pressing the
[PC Ctrl] key.

1717

1717

1717

17

17
Fig. 17.1 PC Control Mode screen

17
2 Connect a USB cable.

Plug one end of a USB cable into the USB connector which is situated on the left side of the UV-
17 1800 (refer to "Fig. 1.3" in the System User’s Guide) and the other end into the USB connector on
your computer.

17
NOTE
For the connection between the UV-1800 and PC, use a USB cable capable of USB 1.1 transfer.
17

17-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1529 OF 4699


17.1 Connecting to a PC

3 Install the "Virtual COM port driver".


When you connect the UV-1800 to the computer on which the "Virtual COM port driver" is not
17
installed, the operating system will prompt you to install the driver.

1) First, the screen appears asking whether or not Windows can connect to Windows Update.
Select "No, not this time", and click [Next].

17

17

17

17

17

17
2) When the screen to select the installation method is displayed, insert the UVProbe
Installation CD to the drive. Verify that "Install the software automatically (Recommended)" is
selected, and click [Next].
17

17

17

17

17

17

17

1530 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-3


17.1 Connecting to a PC

3) The alerting message "This software has not passed windows logo testing." appears. Click
1717
"Continue Anyway".

1717

1717

1717

1717

NOTE
The message "This software has not passed…" appears when you have attempted to install a
1717 driver which has not been tested by Microsoft. Since Shimadzu has already completed the
performance validation of this driver, there is no problem with continuing the installation process by
clicking the [Next] button.
1717
4) After the installation is completed, "Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard" appears.
Click the [Finish] button.
1717

17

17

17

17

17

17

17-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1531 OF 4699


17.1 Connecting to a PC

4 Verify the COM port No. on the device manager screen.


17
In the operating system, select [Control Panel] - [System]. From the opened [System Property],
select [Hardware] tab and click [Device Manager…]. Verify the port No. indicated as "UV-1800
Series" in [Ports (COM & LPT)] on the device manager, which will be used for the later setting.

(In the example shown in Fig. 17.2, "COM 3" will be the COM port to control the UV-1800.)

17

17

17

17

17

17

Fig. 17.2 Device Manager window 17

17

17

17

17

17

17

1532 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-5


17.2 Controlling with UVProbe Software
17.2

You can control the UV-1800 simply using the UVProbe software that is packaged with the instrument.
1717

17.2.1 UVProbe Installation and Instrument Addition


First, install the UVProbe and then add the instrument information to the UVProbe.

1 Install the UVProbe software.

For details on the installation of the UVProbe software, refer to "UVProbe Tutorial" (Instruction
1717 manual) that are supplied with the instrument.

1717 2 Add and configure an instrument.

The information selected or entered here (except COM port No.) will be recorded as file
1717 information in all data files which will be measured or acquired using the UVProbe software.

1) Double click the UVProbe icon on the desktop to launch the UVProbe software.
1717
2) From the [Instrument] menu of the UVProbe, select [Add]. The Add Instrument Wizard is
started.

1717

1717

1717 3) Follow the instructions displayed in the Add Instrument Wizard. Select or enter the
instrument information, and click the [Next] button to proceed to the next screen. Finally,
click the [Finish] button to confirm the information you have entered or selected.
17

17

17
1 Instrument model selection
screen
17 Select (click) "Shimadzu
UV-1800 Series".

17

17
2 Click the [Next] button.

17-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1533 OF 4699


17.2 Controlling with UVProbe Software

17

3 Instrument name* input screen


Enter "UV-1800" or any given name.
*If you use multiple analytical instruments and
have assigned specific names such as [UV-1],
[UV-2] for discrimination purposes, those
names can also be specified here.

17
4 Click the [Configure] button.

17

17

17

5 Communication port selection screen


17
Select the COM port No. you have checked in "17.1 Connecting to a
PC".
17

17
6 Click the [OK] button.

7 Click the [Next] button.


17

17

17
8 Model name and serial No. input screen
Enter the model name and serial number
17
printed on the serial number sticker affixed to
the side of the instrument.
17

17
9 Click the [Finish] button.

1534 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-7


17.2 Controlling with UVProbe Software

1717 17.2.2 UVProbe Startup and Communication Establishment


The following describes the operation procedure from starting up the UVProbe to the establishment of
communication with the UV-1800.
For details on the other procedures for operating the UVProbe, refer to "UVProbe Tutorial" (Instruction
manual).

1 Set the UV-1800 to the PC Control mode.

1717 1) Turn ON the power switch located on the right side of the UV-1800.
2) After the instrument initialization has completed, the [Mode menu] screen (Fig. 2.1) will be
displayed.
1717 3) Press the [PC Ctrl] key to switch the UV-1800 to the PC Control mode.

1717

1717

1717

1717

1717 Fig. 17.3 PC Control Mode screen

17

17

17

17

17

17

17-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1535 OF 4699


17.2 Controlling with UVProbe Software

2 Start up the UVProbe and open the desired measurement module screen (for here,
Spectrum module).
17

1) Double click the UVProbe icon on the desktop to launch the UVProbe software.

2) The basic window is displayed. From the menu bar, Select [Window] - [Spectrum].

17

17

17

17

17

17
3) The measurement window for the Spectrum module is displayed.

The measurement module (UVProbe- [Spectrum]) is displayed in the title bar. 17

17

17

17

17

17

17

[Instrument Control [Connect] button


Button] bar

Fig. 17.4 Spectrum Module Measurement screen

1536 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-9


17.2 Controlling with UVProbe Software

1717 3 Establish the communication with the UV-1800.

1) Click [Connect] on the [Instrument] bar to connect the UV-1800 to the computer.
2) When the communication with the UV-1800 is established, the [Connect] button changes to
[Disconnect] button and the [Instrument Status] bar starts indicating the current wavelength
and photometric value.
To disconnect the communication, click the [Disconnect] button.

1717

1717

1717

1717

1717

1717
[Instrument Status] bar [Disconnect] button

1717 Fig. 17.5 Spectrum Module Measurement screen (When communication is established)

17
4 Exit the PC Control mode.

Press the key on the UV-1800 in the screen shown in Fig. 17.6 to return to the [Mode
menu] screen (Fig. 2.1).
17

17

17

17

17

Fig. 17.6 PC Control Mode screen

17-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1537 OF 4699


17.2 Controlling with UVProbe Software

17
NOTE
When attempting to exit the PC Control mode, the current user's password is prompted if the
security function is ON (Fig. 17.7) (^ "15.2 Security Functions"). If the function is ON, no one
except the current user can shutdown the communication to directly control the UV-1800 without
permission.
This function prevents users from changing system status such as baseline correction record, etc.
without leaving instrument history (^ "A.1.2 Common Screen Frame"), when managing history
information with the UVProbe software (standard accessory).
17

17

17

17

17

17
Fig. 17.7 PC Control Mode Exit screen (Only when the security function is ON)

17.2.3 Precautions When Controlling the UV-1800 from UVProbe 17

„ The Minimum Resolution of Measured Data


The UV-1800 handles its obtained data in floating-point form. 17
However, when the UVProbe software controls the UV-1800 to acquire data, the resolution is limited
as follows since photometric values are transmitted in fixed-point form.
17
. 0.00152587 %
• Transmittance: Minimum resolution =.
• Absorbance: Minimum resolution = . 0.0000152587 Abs
.
17
„ Data Accumulation Time
For the UV-1800, you can specify data accumulation time for data acquisition in the Utilities Menu 17
screen (^ "14.1.5 Setting Data Accumulation Time").

However, when controlling the UV-1800 from the UVProbe software, the data accumulation time 17
specified in the Utilities Menu screen is ignored and the value is fixed to the minimum value
[0.05 msec].
17

NOTE
For spectrum measurements, the accumulation time is determined depending on "Scan speed"
specified as measurement parameters, as is the case with the UV-1800 operation (^ "6.1
Measurement Parameter Configuration Screen").

1538 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-11


17.3 Controlling with External Commands
17.3

You can also control the UV-1800 from the computer using a control program besides the UVProbe
1717
software.

17.3.1 Receiving Commands and Protocol


When you select the [PC Ctrl] key in the [Mode menu] screen, the following screen is
displayed. It becomes possible to communicate with PC via the USB interface.

1717

1717

1717

1717

1717 Fig. 17.8 PC Control Mode screen

The exchange of signals (communication) with the PC must be performed with one being the
"speaker" and the other the "listener". In this case, the speaker will be referred to as the master and
1717
the listener as the slave.
The exchange of signals is performed under a set procedure (protocol). These signals comprise not
only commands and data, but also codes for the control of the procedure (control codes). The control
1717
codes shown in the table below are used in the exchange of signals between the UV-1800 and a PC.

Table 17.1 Control Codes


17
Control Code
Direction Function
(Hexadecimal)
17
ENQ ($05) Master to Slave Enquiry code sent when you wish to send commands or
(Enquiry) data. In particular, the first ENQ of a series of
17 transactions also indicates the start of communication.

EOT ($04) Master to Slave Code for announcing the end of communication. Use this
(Enquiry) when there are no more data to be sent.
17
ESC ($1B) Bi-directional Code sent when you wish to interrupt communication.
(Escape)
17
ACK ($06) Slave to Master Code returned from receiving side in affirmative
(Enquiry) response to a command, data, or code which has been
17 sent.

NAK ($15) Slave to Master Code returned from receiving side in negative response
(Negative Acknowledge) to a command, data, or code which has been sent.

NUL ($00) Master to Slave Code for recognizing the end of a variable-length signal,
such as a command or data, etc. This is also called the
terminator.

17-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1539 OF 4699


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

The types of commands sent from the PC to the UV-1800 can be generally classified as follows
17
according to the direction of the data flow.
a. Write command........ Sets the status of the UV-1800.
b. Read command........ Recognizes the status of the UV-1800.
The procedures for these commands have several types. A time chart is shown below. In the figure,
the "——" mark indicates the master. Please note that the master and slave roles alternate in the
communication process.

a. Write command .......Protocol A


17
PC
ENQ

COMMANDS

ACK
NUL
17

EOT
ACK

ACK
Write
UV-1800
Status
17

Time to send one code


17
b. Read command .......Protocol B, Protocol B'

Time

PC
COMMANDS
ENQ

17
ACK

ACK

ACK
NUL

17
ENQ
ACK

ACK

EOT
Read DATA
NUL

UV-1800 Status

There are also repeating commands in this portion. 17


This is Protocol B'.

17
The write command in a) is protocol A; the type in which data are received only once from the external
computer at the read command in b) is protocol B;, and when there are multiple data received it is
called protocol B'.
17

17

17

17

17

1540 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-13


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

1717 17.3.2 Example of Programming


This section further details the three transmission procedures, protocol types A, B, and B' described in
the previous section, so that they can be used for your programming purpose.
N in the text stands for repetition count and is assumed to be 5 in this example.
In the flow chart, repetition count and time-out checks are omitted.

„ Protocol type A
(1) Establishment of communication link 1 in flowchart 1
1717 Before transmitting a command, the master station (PC in this example) issues the ENQ code to
a subordinate station (the UV-1800 in this example) to prompt it to receive the command data.
The subordinate station returns ACK to notify the master station that it is ready to receive the
1717 command data.
<Error handling>
• If NAK is returned in response to the transmission of ENQ, ENQ is retransmitted. If NAK is still
1717
returned after this retry has been made N times (5 times in this example), the master station
determines that there is an error at the subordinate station and ends the retries.
1717 • If any code other than ACK and NAK is returned, the master station ignores it and waits for the
next reply.
• If there is no reply for a given time, the master station retransmits ENQ. If no reply is received
after the Nth retransmission, the master station determines that there is an error at the
subordinate station and ends the retransmission.
(2) Transmission of command data 2 in flowchart 1
1717 If the communication link is established successfully, the master station (PC in this example)
transmits the command data. When the subordinate station (the UV-1800 in this example)
receives the command data successfully, it returns ACK to the master station. At this point, the
1717
master station and the subordinate station change over to each other.
<Error handling>
1717 • If NAK is returned in response to the transmission of the command data, the previously
transmitted data is retransmitted. If NAK is still returned after the Nth retransmission, the
master station determines that an error has occurred at the subordinate station, and ends the
17 retransmission.
• If any code other than ACK and NAK is received, the master station ignores it and waits for the
next reply.
17 • If there is no reply for a given time, the master station retransmits ENQ. If no reply is received
after the Nth retransmission, the master station determines that an error has occurred at the
subordinate station and ends the retransmission.
17 (3) Ending 3 in flowchart 1
When the master station (the UV-1800 in this example) processes the command data and
17 finishes this processing, it transmits EOT to the subordinate station (PC in this example).
The subordinate station waits until EOT is transmitted, and then returns ACK to end the
communication.
17

17

17-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1541 OF 4699


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

Flowchart 1
17
Start

ENQ has been transmitted.

1 character has been received.


No
1

Has ACK been received?


No
Has NAK been received?
Yes
17
Yes

Has a command character string been transmitted? 17

1 character has been received.


No 17
2

Has ACK been received? Has NAK been received?


No Yes 17
Yes
1 character has been received.

3 Has EOT been received? 17


No

Yes
17
ACK has been transmitted.

End
17

17

17

17

17

17

17

1542 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-15


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

1717 „ Protocol types B and B'


(1) Establishment of communication link
This is the same as in protocol type A.

(2) Transmission of command data


This is the same as in protocol type A.

(3) Reception of answered-back data 1 in flowchart 2


When the master station (the UV-1800 in this example) processes the command data and
1717 finishes this processing, it issues the ENQ code to prompt the subordinate station (PC in this
example) to receive the data. The subordinate station waits until ENQ is received, and then
returns ACK to notify the master station (the UV-1800 in this example) that it is ready to receive
1717 the data. Receiving this ACK, the main station (the UV-1800 in this example) starts sending the
data.
In the case of protocol B', there are multiple data sets involved. Therefore, each time the
1717 subordinate station (PC in this example) receives data, it transmits ACK to notify the master
station (the UV-1800 in this example) that it has received the data.
1717 <Error handling>
• If no answered-back data is transmitted for a given time, ENQ is retransmitted. If no data is
returned after the Nth retransmission, the master station (the UV-1800 in this example)
determines that an error has occurred at the subordinate station and ends the retransmission.
• If the next character is not received for a given time when character string data is being
received on a character basis, NAK is immediately returned.
1717 (4) Abortion of data reception 2 in flowchart 2
When the subordinate station (PC in this example) is receiving multiple data sets using protocol
type B', it transmits ESC rather than ACK if it wants to abort the data reception.
1717
The master station (the UV-1800 in this example) aborts the data transmission and closes the
communication link. If the master station (the UV-1800 in this example) becomes unable to
1717 transmit data due to any error that has occurred during the data transmission, it transmits ESC
rather than the data to close the communication link.

(5) Ending 3 in flowchart 2


17
When the master station (the UV-1800 in this example) finishes transmitting all the data, it sends
EOT. Receiving EOT, the subordinate station (PC in this example) determines that the data
17 reception has been finished, and then sends ACK to ends the communication.

17

17

17

17

17-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1543 OF 4699


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

Flowchart 2
17
Start

ENQ has been transmitted.

1 character has been received.


No

Has ACK been received?


No
Has NAK been received?
Yes 17
Yes

Has a command character string been transmitted? 17

1 character has been received.


No 17

Has ACK been received? Has NAK been received?


No Yes 17
Yes

1 character has been received.

1 Has ENQ been received? 17


No

Yes
17
ACK has been transmitted.

Data has been received.


No 17

3 Has EOT been received?


No
Has ESC been received? 17

Yes
Yes 2
Has ACK been received?
17

17
End

17

17

17

1544 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-17


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

1717 17.3.3 Explanation of Commands and Data


The commands which can be sent from an external computer are made up of the following elements.

• Command code

Commands • Parameter

• Terminator

A command code consists of a single lower-case alphabetic code. The number of a parameter
1717 depends on the command code. Commands can be divided into those with no parameter, those with
only one parameter, and those with multiple parameters. When there are multiple parameters, it is
necessary to separate the parameters with a symbol (delimiter). The symbol "," (comma) is used as
1717 the delimiter. Since all parameters are sent as ASCII text, if you wish to set the number 15, this would
be expressed in hexadecimal as $31, $35. NUL is used as the terminator.
Data which is sent from the UV-1800 have the following structure.
1717
• Data code ("d" command only)

Data • Parameter
1717
• Terminator

Only "d" command has a Data Code "d"; any other commands have no Data Code. There is only one
parameter, reflected by a text string. If the parameter is 10.36, it would be expressed in hexadecimal
as $31, $30, $2E, $33, $36. NUL is used as the terminator.
1717
CAUTION
1717 Do NOT send communication commands from the PC unless using standard UVProbe software
during the initialization of the UV-1800 (Fig. 1.1). If you do, it is most likely that the photometer
initialization will not finish correctly.
1717 In case you wish to externally control the UV-1800 using software other than UVProbe (optional),
make sure to send commands only after confirming the end of initialization and entering the
[PC Ctrl] key from the [Mode menu] screen.
17

17.3.4 Programming with Visual Basic


17 This section describes the programming method using Visual Basic*. You will define the Windows API
functions on Visual Basic, and by calling up the functions, you can control the UV-1800 from the
external computer.
17 Note that the UV-1800 cannot be controlled from the SerialPort class newly added in Visual Basic
MSComm control and in .NET Framework 2.0.
This chapter assumes readers have basic knowledge of Visual Basic, and use Visual Basic Ver.6.0,
17
Visual Basic .NET 2005 and 2003 as their development environment.

17 „ Programming with Visual Basic Ver.6.0

1 Defining the API Functions


Define the four Windows API functions (CreateFile, WriteFile, ReadFile, and CloseHandle)
17 required for the UV-1800 external control as described below.
(In Visual Basic Ver.6.0, you can import the definitions of API functions from the bundled "API
viewer" software. For the detailed procedure, refer to the Microsoft help services.)

17-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1545 OF 4699


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

17
'Start Communication: Define CreateFile
Public Declare Function CreateFile Lib "kernel32" Alias "CreateFileA" ( _
ByVal lpFileName As String, _
ByVal dwDesiredAccess As Long, _
ByVal dwShareMode As Long, _
ByVal lpSecurityAttributes As Long, _
ByVal dwCreationDisposition As Long, _
ByVal dwFlagsAndAttributes As Long, _
17
ByVal hTemplateFile As Long _
) As Long
17
'Send command: Define WriteFile
Public Declare Function WriteFile Lib "kernel32" ( _
ByVal hFile As Long, _ 17
lpBuffer As Any, _
ByVal nNumberOfBytesToWrite As Long, _
lpNumberOfBytesWritten As Long, _ 17
ByVal lpOverlapped As Long _
) As Long

'Receive data: Define ReadFile


Public Declare Function ReadFile Lib "kernel32" ( _
ByVal hFile As Long, _ 17
lpBuffer As Any, _
ByVal nNumberOfBytesToRead As Long, _
lpNumberOfBytesRead As Long, _ 17
ByVal lpOverlapped As Long _
) As Long
17
'End communication: Define CloseHandle
Public Declare Function CloseHandle Lib "kernel32" ( _
ByVal hObject As Long _ 17
) As Long

17
* Microsoft® is a registered trademark. Visual Basic and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
17

17

17

17

1546 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-19


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

1717 2 Using the API Functions


You can externally control the UV-1800 using the defined API functions as follows:

1) Starting Communication
Start communication using the CreateFile function.

Example) Start communication through the COM1 port.

Dim hCom As Long


1717 Dim strComPort As String
strComPort = "COM1"

1717 'Start communication:


hCom = CreateFile( strComPort, _
GENERIC_READ Or GENERIC_WRITE, _
1717 0, 0, OPEN_EXISTING, _
0, 0 )

1717
2) Sending Command
Send a command to the UV-1800 using the WriteFile function.

Example) Send ENQ($05).


1717
Dim bRet As Boolean
Dim lBytesWritten As Long
1717
'Send command:
bRet = WriteFile( hCom, &H5, 1, lBytesWritten, 0 )
1717
3) Receiving data
17 Receive data from the UV-1800 using the ReadFile function.

Example) 1 character is received.


17
Dim bRet As Boolean
Dim lBytesRead As Long
17 Dim wDataReadAry(100) As Byte

'Receive data:
17 bRet = ReadFile( hCom, wDataReadAry(0), 1, lBytesRead, 0 )

17 4) Ending communication
End the communication using the CloseHandle function.

17
Example) End the existing communication.

'End communication:
CloseHandle ( hCom )

17-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1547 OF 4699


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

„ Programming with Visual Basic .Net (2005 and 2003) 17


1 Defining the API Functions
Define the four Windows API functions (CreateFile, WriteFile, ReadFile, and CloseHandle)
required for the UV-1800 external control as described below.

'Start Communication: Define CreateFile


Public Declare Auto Function CreateFile Lib "kernel32.dll" ( _
ByVal lpFileName As String, _
ByVal dwDesiredAccess As Int32, _ 17
ByVal dwShareMode As Int32, _
ByVal lpSecurityAttributes As IntPtr, _
ByVal dwCreationDisposition As Int32, _ 17
ByVal dwFlagsAndAttributes As Int32, _
ByVal hTemplateFile As IntPtr _
) As IntPtr 17

'Send command: Define WriteFile


Public Declare Auto Function WriteFile Lib "kernel32.dll" ( _ 17
ByVal hFile As IntPtr, _
ByVal lpBuffer As Byte(), _
ByVal nNumberOfBytesToWrite As Int32, _
ByRef lpNumberOfBytesWritten As Int32, _
ByVal lpOverlapped As IntPtr _
) As Boolean 17

'Receive data: Define ReadFile


Public Declare Auto Function ReadFile Lib "kernel32.dll" ( _ 17
ByVal hFile As IntPtr, _
ByVal lpBuffer As Byte(), _
ByVal nNumberOfBytesToRead As Int32, _
17
ByRef lpNumberOfBytesRead As Int32, _
ByVal lpOverlapped As IntPtr _
) As Boolean
17

'End communication: Define CloseHandle


17
Public Declare Auto Function CloseHandle Lib "kernel32.dll" ( _
ByVal hObject As IntPtr _
) As Boolean
17

17

17

17

1548 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-21


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

1717 2 Using the API Functions


You can externally control the UV-1800 using the defined API functions as follows:

1) Starting Communication
Start communication using the CreateFile function.

Example) Start communication through the COM1 port.

Dim hCom As IntPtr


1717 Dim strComPort As String
strComPort = "COM1"

1717 'Start communication:


hCom = CreateFile( strComPort, _
GENERIC_READ Or GENERIC_WRITE, _
1717 0, IntPtr.Zero, OPEN_EXISTING, _
FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, IntPtr.Zero )

1717
2) Sending Command
Send a command to the UV-1800 using the WriteFile function.

Example) Send ENQ($05).


1717
'Define the object that converts Unicode strings to ASCII strings(for Visual Basic
.Net 2005*):
1717 Dim oEnc As System.Text.Encoding _
=System.Text.Encoding.GetEncoding ("windows-1252")

1717 Dim bRet As Boolean


Dim byBuffer () As Byte
Dim nBytesWritten As Int32
17
'Obtain the ASCII string:
byBuffer = oEnc.GetBytes(Chr (&H5))
17
'Send command:
bRet = WriteFile( hCom, byBuffer, byBuffer.Length, nBytesWritten, IntPtr.Zero )
17

* For Visual Basic .Net 2003, define the object that converts Unicode strings to ASCII strings as
17 follows:
Dim oEncoder As System.Text.ASCIIEncoding
Dim oEnc As System.Text.Encoding = oEncoder.GetEncoding ("windows-1252")
17

17

17-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1549 OF 4699


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

3) Receiving data
17
Receive data from the UV-1800 using the ReadFile function.

Example) 1 character is received.

Dim bRet As Boolean


Dim byBuffer() As Byte
Dim nBytesRead As Int32

'Receive data: 17
bRet = ReadFile( hCom, byBuffer, 1, nBytesRead, IntPtr.Zero )

17

4) Ending communication 17
End the communication using the CloseHandle function.

17
Example) End the existing communication.

'End communication:
CloseHandle ( hCom )

17

17
17.3.5 Command List
The terminator symbol has been omitted from the command format places in the command list. When 17
sending to the UV-1800, send a terminator code (NUL) appearing right after the content shown in the
table as the actual command. The symbols "n" and "m" in the command format indicate parameters.
The protocol types are A, B, and B' and correspond with the time chart in the table. 17

17

17

17

17

17

1550 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-23


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

Table 17.2 Command List


1717
Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes

a A Measure Performs wavelength scan. The measured data are


stored in the continuous data memory area in the UV-
1800. Use the f command when retrieving data.

cn A Baseline correction Performs baseline correction. The parameter n


corresponds with the baseline number as shown
below.
1717
n = 0: baseline correction
n = 1: instrument baseline correction
This corrects the baseline every 1.0 nm over the
1717
domain set by the scan range h command. The
instrument baseline is corrected for the entire
wavelength range at 0.1 nm intervals.
1717
d B Data output trigger Outputs the current data. When this command is sent,
the UV-1800 performs one measurement and outputs
1717 the data as shown below.
dk
The parameter k is the current data and is formatted
as shown below, according to the measurement mode.
Abs: ±x.xxxy
Not Abs: ±xxx.xy
1717 The sign of the parameter is output only if the
parameter is negative, while a space is output if the
parameter is positive. In addition, y is output if
1717 "Decimal Display" of "Utilities" is set to "Abs (4) %T
(2)".

1717 hn, m A Scanning range Sets the scanning range. The parameters n and m
correspond with the start wavelength and end
wavelength. Use the symbol "," (comma) as the
17 delimiter between the parameters.
190 ≤ n,m ≤ 1100
n-m ≥ 10
17
jn A Scanning speed Sets the scanning speed. The parameter n
corresponds with the speed number as shown below.
17 n = 1: Fast
n = 2: Medium
n = 3: Slow
17 n = 4: Very Slow

In A Light source switching Switches the light source position. The parameter n
corresponds with the light source position as shown
17 below.
n = 0: WI lamp
n = 1: D2 lamp
17 n = 2: Optional lamp
This command is valid only if the measurement mode
is "Energy".

17-24 UV-1800 SERIES 1551 OF 4699


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes 17


vn A Measurement mode Sets the measurement mode. The parameter n
corresponds with the mode number as shown below.
n = 1: %T
n = 2: Abs
n = 3: Energy

wn A Wavelength setting Sets the wavelength. The parameter n uses the value
(go to λ) which is 10 times the wavelength being set. To set a
wavelength of 500.0 nm, set 5000. n must meet the 17
following condition.
1900 ≤ n ≤ 11000
17
x A Auto zero Performs auto-zeroing (sets the absorbance under the
current conditions at zero, or the current transmittance
at 100 %). 17
y A WI lamp ON/OFF Controls the ON/OFF of the WI light source lamp. The
parameter n corresponds with the lamp illumination
17
status as shown below.
n = 0 : OFF
n = 1 : ON

z A D2 lamp ON/OFF Controls the ON/OFF of the D2 light source lamp. The
parameter n corresponds with the lamp illumination
status as shown below. 17
n = 0 : OFF
n = 1 : ON
17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

1552 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-25


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

1717 Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes

fn B' Transfer file data Retrieves data which have been stored in the memory
of the UV-1800 by the measure command a. The
parameter n is the number of data points that you wish
to retrieve, and allows you to retrieve n pieces of data
from the start of the file (in the case of a spectrum,
from the long wavelength end). If you set the
parameter to a number which is greater than the
1717 number of data points saved in memory, processing
will end at the point where you run out of data. N
meets the following condition.
1717 1 ≤ n ≤ 2001
The data will be output as follows.
k
1717 For the data which is sent, it is necessary to send an
ACK response for each piece of data. The parameter k
is a pairing of the wavelength at the time of
1717 measurement and the data. The format is as follows,
depending on the measurement mode at the time (Top
is Abs, bottom is not Abs).
zzzz.z ∆∆±x.xxxy

zzzz.z ∆∆±xxx.xy
z is the wavelength, x and y are the measurement data
1717
and ∆ represents "space" data. The sign of the
parameter is output only if the parameter is negative,
while a space is output if the parameter is positive. In
1717
addition, y is output if "Decimal Display" of "Utilities" is
set to "Abs (4) %T (2)".
1717 Nx, y, z A Syringe sipper control Controls the syringe sipper. The parameters x, y, and z
correspond with the suction speed, operation mode,
and capacity, as shown below. Use a "," (comma) as
17 the delimiter between the parameters.
Suction speed (ml/sec)
x = 1 : 1.2
17 x = 2 : 0.6
x = 3 : 0.3
x = 4 : 0.2
17 x = 5 : 0.1
Operation mode
y = 0 : Initialization
17 y = 1 : Suction
y = 2 : Discharge (discard)
y = 3 : Discharge (return)
17 y = 4 : Cancel initialization
Capacity (ml)
0 ≤ z ≤ 1000 (x 0.01 ml)
17
This command is valid only if the syringe sipper is
connected to the UV-1800 sample compartment.

17-26 UV-1800 SERIES 1553 OF 4699


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes 17


Sn A Syringe sipper lamp Controls the ON/OFF of the syringe sipper indication
ON/OFF lamp. The parameter n corresponds with the lamp
illumination status as shown below.
n = 0 : OFF
n = 1 : ON
This command is valid only if the syringe sipper is
connected to the UV-1800 sample compartment.

o A Sipper suction Executes the sipper suction operation. The settings 17


done on the UV-1800 are used for the sipper
parameters at the Spectrum mode, such as pump
speed and sip time, etc. This command is valid only if 17
a sipper 160 is connected to the sample compartment
module.
17
p A Sipper purge Executes the sipper purge operation. The settings
done on the UV-1800 are used for the sipper
parameters at the Spectrum mode, such as pump 17
speed and purge time, etc. This command is valid only
if a sipper 160 is connected to the sample
compartment module.

qn A Move cell position Moves the cell position of the Multicell Sample
Compartment, MMC-1600 or CPS-240. Parameter n
17
decides the direction.
n = 1: Move 1 cell forward
n = 2: Move to the cell 1 (Multicell/MMC-1600) 17
Move 1 cell backward (CPS-240)
This command is valid only if a Multicell Sample
Compartment, MMC-1600 or CPS-240 is connected to 17
the sample compartment module.

q B Check cell position Checks the cell position in the Multicell Sample
Compartment, MMC-1600 or CPS-240. 17
When this command is executed, data are returned
from the UV-1800 as follows.
k 17
The parameter k corresponds with the cell position
number as follows.
1 ≤ k ≤ 16
17
This command is valid only if a Multicell Sample
Compartment, MMC-1600 or CPS-240 is connected to
17
the sample compartment module.

17

17

1554 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 17-27


17.3 Controlling with External Commands

1717 Command Protocol Name Processing Content and Usage Notes

r B Check ASC nozzle Checks the nozzle condition in the auto-sample


changer ASC-5 (optional). If this shows that the nozzle
is lowered, the sample suction operation can begin.
When this command is executed, data are returned
from the UV-1800 as follows.
k
The parameter k corresponds with the nozzle status
1717 number as follows.
0 = nozzle is raised
1 = nozzle is lowered
1717 This command is valid only when the ASC-5 is
connected.

mn A Option initialization Executes the initialization of option unit connected to


1717 the sample compartment.
n = 0: initialization (standard cell)
n = B: Multicell Sample Comparment (6 cell)
1717 n = C: CPS-240
n = D: MMC-1600 (8 cell)
n = E: MMC-1600 (16 cell)

1717

1717

1717

17

17

17

17

17

17

17-28 UV-1800 SERIES 1555 OF 4699


18
18 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation)

18

18

Chapter 18 Sample Module


Control (Multi-cell, Sipper
Operation) 18

18

CONTENTS
18
18.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation) .................................................................... 18-2
18.2 Multi-cell Holder ............................................................................................................................... 18-4 18
18.3 Sipper 160 ....................................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.4 Syringe Sipper ............................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.5 Blank Correction Function ............................................................................................................. 18-12 18

18

18

18

18

18

18

1556 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 18-1


Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper
18.1 18.1

Operation)
When you call up the Sample Control screen from the Measurement Parameter Configuration screen
1818
in the different modes, you can set the measurement parameters for the sample module.

1 Press the [SmplCmpt] key to display the


Sample Compartment Control screen (Fig. 18.1).

1818

1818

1818
Fig. 18.1 Sample Compartment Control
screen (When standard cell is selected)
1818

2 If you wish to change the sample module, press the


[Sample module] key. The Sample Module
Selection screen will be displayed (Fig. 18.2). Cursor

1818

1818

1818 Fig. 18.2 Sample Module Selection screen

18
3 To select the sample module, move the cursor to the
desired module with the keys, and
18 confirm with the key.

18

18

18

18

18-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1557 OF 4699


18.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper Operation)

The following 5 accessories can be mounted in place of the standard sample module and operated
18
along with the main instrument.

Accessory Name
Sample Module Description
(Optional)

[6 cell] Multicell Sample The cell holder can hold up to six 10 mm square cells.
Compartment ^ "18.2 Multi-cell Holder"

[8 cell] MMC-1600/C A micro multi-cell holder capable of handling 8 or 16 position


18
[16 cell] micro multi-cell holder
^ "18.2 Multi-cell Holder"

[CPS-240] CPS-240A/B 6-position Micro Multi-cell equipped with temperature control


18
function
^ "18.2 Multi-cell Holder" 18
[Sipper 160] Sipper 160L/C/U/T Performs measurements while drawing sample into a flow cell
using a peristaltic pump). 18
^ "18.3 Sipper 160"

[Syringe sipper] Syringe Sipper N/CN Performs measurements while drawing sample into a flow cell
using a syringe.
^ "18.4 Syringe Sipper"
18
Refer to "Chapter 4 Replacing the Sample Compartment Parts" in the System User's Guide for the
instructions for mounting the various accessories. 18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

1558 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 18-3


18.2 Multi-cell Holder
18.2

When using the Multicell Sample Compartment, MMC-1600, and CPS-240, multiple samples can be
1818
measured sequentially.

NOTE
To connect the CPS-240 to the UV-1800, "USB ADAPTOR for CPS (P/N 206-25234-91)" is
separately required.

However, the availability of sequential measurement varies, and also a use limitation exists according
1818 to the measurement mode. Check the following table to learn the variations:

1818 Sequential
Measurement Mode Remark
Measurement

Photometric
1818
measurement

(One-wavelength)
1818
^Chapter 4

Photometric The motion in the sequential measurement differs


measurement depending on the set value for the function
(Multi-wavelength) switching samples for each measurement
1818 ^Chapter 5 wavelength.
(^"5.2.2 Changing Sample")

1818 Spectrum mode • The blank correction function (reagent blank


^Chapter 6 correction, cell blank correction) is not available.
(^"18.5 Blank Correction Function")
1818 • Only the data for the last cell can be saved or
printed after measurement. However, if the auto
print function is enabled, the measurement result
18 can be printed for each cell.
(^"6.1 Measurement Parameter Configuration
Screen" [Auto-Print])
18
Quantitation mode When performing a repeated measurement, the
^Chapter 7 sequential measurement of multiple cells is not
18
available.

Kinetics measurement When performing background correction (BG


18
^Chapter 8 correction: ON), the sequential measurement of
multiple cells is not available.
18 (^"8.2 Measurement Parameter Configuration
Screen")

Kinetics rate
measurement × –

18 ^Chapter 9

18-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1559 OF 4699


18.2 Multi-cell Holder

Measurement Mode
Sequential
Remark
18
Measurement

Time scan mode



^Chapter 10

Multi-component
quantitation mode × –
^Chapter 11
18
Bio-method mode When performing a repeated measurement, the
^Chapter 12 sequential measurement of multiple cells is not
available. 18

When you select [6 cell], [8 cell], [16 cell] or [CPS-240] in the Sample Module screen (Fig. 18.2), the
Sample Compartment Control screen (Fig. 18.3) will be displayed. 18

To use the 6-position Multi-cell holder and MMC-1600, it is necessary to initialize them (i.e., to detect
the origin of the cell position) when they are installed on the UV-1800. 18
To perform the initialization, verify that the 6-position Multi-cell holder or MMC-1600 is mounted to the
sample compartment, and press the key.

18
NOTE
• The initialization of CPS-240 is executed independently when the designated controller power is
turned ON. 18
• Before the initialization, check to be sure that the name of the cell holder mounted to the
instrument is displayed in [1. Sample module] in Fig. 18.3.
• When the MMC-1600 is connected, be sure to perform the initialization with the micro multi-cells 18
mounted to the cell holder.

18

18

18

18

18

18

1560 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 18-5


18.2 Multi-cell Holder

1818

1818

1818

1818
(When the cell position is not initialized)

1818

1 The sample module selected


in Fig. 18.2 is displayed.
2
1818 3
4

1818

1818

18
5 6 7 8

18 (When the cell position is initialized)

Fig. 18.3 Sample Compartment Control screen


18 (When 6-/8-/16-position Micro Multi-cell holder, or CPS-240 is selected)

18
Key
No. Display Description
Operation
18 1 [Sample module] Changes the sample module being used.
^ "18.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper
Operation)"

2 [Drive cell No.] Enters the number of cells being used.


18

18-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1561 OF 4699


18.2 Multi-cell Holder

No.
Key
Display Description
18
Operation

3 [Reagent blank Indicates that the sample being used as the reagent
corr. (cell 1)] blank has been placed in the cell position 1. Enter the
key to switch the display between [YES] and
[NO].

4 [Cell blank corr.] Sets whether or not to perform cell blank correction on
the measurement results. 18
Enter the key to switch the display between
[YES] and [NO]. 18
If [YES] is set, [Cell Blk] appears.
Note that the cell blank correction function is not
18
available in the Spectrum mode.

5 [Initial] Detects the origin of the cell position.


18
When CPS-240 is selected, [Initial] is not displayed.

NOTE
To detect the origin of the CPS-240 cell holder, turn
ON the designated controller power.

6 [Cell 1] Moves cell 1 (the cell inserted into the front-most cell
18
holder) into the measurement light path.

7 [CellMove] Moves to the next cell. If cell 6 is currently in the light 18


path, the holder will move to cell 1 when you press this
key. 18
8 [CellBLK.] Acquires and saves absorbance (transmittance) at
each cell (cell position). The cell blank correction is 18
performed using the saved data by this function (^
18.5 Blank Correction Function).
18
When [4. Cell blank corr.] is set to [ON], be sure to
perform the cell blank correction after placing the cells
to be used. 18

– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration


screen (Fig. 18.1). 18

18

18

1562 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 18-7


18.3 Sipper 160
18.3

When you select [Sipper 160] in the Sample Module Selection screen (Fig. 18.2), the Sample
1818
Compartment Control screen (Sipper 160) (Fig. 17.4) will be displayed.

1
2
3
1818 4
5
6
1818

1818

1818 7
Fig. 18.4 Sample Compartment Control screen (Sipper 160)

Key
1818 No. Display Description
Operation

1 [Sample module] Changes the sample module being used.


1818 ^ "18.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper
Operation)"
1818 2 [Pump speed] Sets the pump rotation speed.
If you select [Pump speed], the screen for selecting the
18 pump rotation speed will appear. Move the cursor to

the desired pump rotation speed with the


18
keys, and confirm with the key.

18

18

18 Fig. 18.5 Pump Speed Selection screen

Select the pump speed from Fast/Medium/Slow/Halt.


Select [Halt] when using the electromagnetic valve.

3 [Sipping time] Sets the time that the sample will be aspirated. The

18 input range is 0.0 to 64.0 seconds.

4 [Dwell time] Sets the time interval between aspiration of a sample


and measurement. Input range is 0.0 to 64.0 seconds.

18-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1563 OF 4699


18.3 Sipper 160

No.
Key
Display Description
18
Operation

5 [Purge time] Sets the time after measurement is completed that the
sample will be purged. The input range is from -64.0 to
64.0 seconds. When set to a negative value, the pump
will reverse to purge the sample. To suction and
retrieve the sample which has already been measured,
enter a negative value. 18
6 [No. of rinses] Sets the number of times that the inside of the flow cell
will be rinsed before measurement. The sip-purge 18
operation will be repeated up to the number of times
set here. Measurement is not performed during this
18
operation. Input range is from 0 to 4 times.

7 [Manu. Sip] This key switches the manual suction function ON/
18
OFF. Each time you press this key, the function toggles
between [ON] and [OFF]. Manual sipping draws the
sample while the sipper lever is pressed, regardless of
the sipping time setting, and no measurement is
performed. 18
– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration
screen. 18
* When using the auto sample changer ASC-5 (option) for link measurement, refer to the manual
for ASC-5. 18

To connect the ASC-5 to the UV-1800, "USB ADAPTOR for ASC (P/N 206-25235-91)" is separately
required. 18

18

18

18

18

18

1564 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 18-9


18.4 Syringe Sipper
18.4

When you select [Syringe sipper] in the Sample Module screen (Fig. 18.2), the Sample Compartment
1818
Control screen (syringe sipper) (Fig. 18.6) will be displayed.

1
2
3
4
1818 5
6
7
1818

1818

1818 8
(Before Initialization)

1818 1
2
3
1818 4
5
6
1818 7

18

18
8 9

18 (After Initialization)
Fig. 18.6 Sample Compartment Control screen (syringe sipper)

18
Key
No. Display Description
18 Operation

1 [Sample module] Changes the sample module being used.


^ "18.1 Sample Module Control (Multi-cell, Sipper
Operation)"

18

18-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1565 OF 4699


18.4 Syringe Sipper

Key 18
No. Display Description
Operation

2 [Pump speed] Selects the pump operating speed from 5 steps: 1.2/
0.6/0.3/0.2/0.1 ml/sec.
If you select [Pump speed], the screen for selecting the
pump operating speed will appear. Move the cursor to
the desired pump operating speed with the

keys, and confirm with the key. 18

18

18

18
Fig. 18.7 Pump Speed Selection screen

3 [Sip volume] Sets the sample sipping volume in the unit of ml. Input
range is from 0.00 to 10.00 ml.

4 [Dwell time] Sets the time from sample sipping to measurement 18


start in the unit of second. Input range is from 0.00 to
9.99 seconds.
18
5 [Purge volume] Sets the sample purge volume after measurement in
the unit of ml. Input range is from 0.00 to 10.00 ml.
18
6 [No. of rinses] Sets the number of times that the inside of the flow cell
will be rinsed before measurement. The sip and purge
operation will be repeated up to the number of time set 18
here. Measurement is not performed during this
operation. Input range is from 0 to 4 times.
18
7 [Sample Selects the direction in which the sample is purged
recovery] after measurement, the drain nozzle side or the
sipping nozzle side. The key is used to
18
toggle between [Return] (ON) and [Discharge] (OFF).

8 [Initial] Starts initializing the syringe pump. When the unit is


18
connected after turning ON the power, the accessories
must be initialized. If they have not been initialized, the 18
set capacity of sample may not be sipped or drained.

9 [Sip] Suctions/discharges sample at the volume specified in


[3. Sip. volume] in the Sample Compartment Control
screen (Fig. 18.6).

– – Returns to the Measurement Parameter Configuration 18


screen.

1566 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 18-11


18.5 Blank Correction Function
18.5

When connecting 6-position Micro Multi-cell, MMC-1600, or CPS-240, and using the blank correction
1818
function (reagent blank correction, cell blank correction), you can obtain already-corrected values as
measurement results.

NOTE
The blank correction function is not available in the Spectrum mode.

1818 Current absorbance


transmittance)

1818
Corrected value

1818

1818

1818
Fig. 18.8 Measurement with blank correction (E.g. Photometric (one-wavelength))

The following explains about each type of the blank corrections.


1818

„ Reagent blank correction


1818 Using the sample placed in cell position 1 as a blank, the cells in the other positions (2-16) are
measured. In other words, after the samples in cell positions 2 through 16 have been measured,
the measured value for the sample in cell position 1 is subtracted from the various measured
18
values.
Because of this, even if time changes occur in the blank sample or drift develops due to the
18 increasing temperature of the instrument, accurate data can be acquired by canceling these
fluctuating factors.

18

18

18

18

18-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1567 OF 4699


18.5 Blank Correction Function

Measurement data 18

Absorbance Transmittance
(Abs) (%T)

Corrected value: (A3–A1) (T3/T1×100) A3 Cell 3


(T3)

A2 Cell 2
Corrected value: (A2–A1) (T2/T1×100)
(T2) 18

A1 18
Corrected value: (A1–A1) (T1/T1×100)
(T1)
Cell 1

• For Abs: The measured value at Cell 1 (blank) is subtracted from the absorbance at each cell. 18
• For %T: The transmittance at each cell is divided by the measured value at Cell 1 (blank).

18
Fig. 18.9 Calculation for Reagent Blank Correction

„ Cell blank correction


Even though cells are constructed in the same manner, there are naturally going to be slight
optical differences. In cell blank correction, at first, blank samples are placed in a square cells
and the measured values (cell blank values) in that condition are recorded. Then, when an 18
unknown sample is measured and those results are displayed, the previously recorded blank
measured value is canceled from the various measurement results. Thus, the measured value of
only the sample is obtained. 18

Measurement data
18
Absorbance Transmittance
(Abs) (%T)
Cell 3 18
Corrected value: (A3–a3) (T3/ t3×100) A3
(T3) a3(t3)

18
A2 Cell 2
Corrected value: (A2–a2) (T2/ t2×100) a2(t2)
(T2)
Cell blank value 18

A1 Cell 1
Corrected value: (A1–a1) (T1/ t1×100)
(T1) a1(t1)
18

• For Abs: Each cell blank value (absorbance) is subtracted from the measured value at each cell.
• For %T: The measured value at each cell is divided by each cell blank value (transmittance). 18

Fig. 18.10 Calculation for Cell Blank Correction

18

1568 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES 18-13


18.5 Blank Correction Function

1818 „ Reagent blank correction + Cell blank correction


If both blank correction methods are enabled, the cell blank correction is executed for each cell,
and the reagent blank correction is executed using the Cell 1 sample value on the measured
values of the other cell positions.

Measurement data

Absorbance Transmittance
(Abs) (%T)
1818 A3 Cell 3
Corrected value: (A3–a3)–(A1–a1) {(T3/ t3)/(T1/ t1)}×100 a3(t3)
(T3)

1818
A2 Cell 2
Corrected value: (A2–a2)–(A1–a1) {(T2/ t2)/(T1/ t1)}×100 a2(t2)
(T2)
1818
A1 Cell 1
Corrected value: (A1–a1)–(A1–a1) {(T1/ t1)/(T1/ t1)}×100 a1(t1)
(T1)
1818
Cell blank correction Cell blank value

Reagent blank correction

1818 • The cell blank correction and reagent blank correction are performed on each cell.

1818 Fig. 18.11 Calculation for Reagent Blank Correction + Cell Reagent Blank Correction

1818

18

18

18

18

18

18

18-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1569 OF 4699


A
Appendix A UVProbe Basic Operation

Appendix A UVProbe Basic


Operation

The UV-1800 can be controlled using the packaged UVProbe software.


This appendix describes the basic operation of the UVProbe software. For details on the functions and
operation procedure of the UVProbe, refer to the UVProbe Tutorial or the UVProbe Help function.

CONTENTS

A-1 UVProbe Overview ............................................................................................................................ A-2


A-2 Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................. A-9
A-3 Measurement Procedure ................................................................................................................. A-17
A-4 Peak Pick......................................................................................................................................... A-27
A-5 Print Out .......................................................................................................................................... A-32

1570 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-1


A-1 A-1 UVProbe Overview

A A.1.1 Module Configuration


The UVProbe software consists of three
measurement modules and one report generation
A
module.

You can switch between these modules by


selecting them from the [Window] menu.

Fig. A-1

[Spectrum Module]
Scans within the specified wavelength range and records
photometric value at each sampling pitch.

^ "UVProbe Tutorial"
/"Chapter 2 The Spectrum Module, Lesson 1"

[Photometric Module]
Measures photometric values at single or multiple
wavelengths (Photometric measurement). This module is
also equipped with a quantitation function using various
calibration methods (i.e., Multi-point calibration method,
one point calibration method, and K-factor method).

^ "UVProbe Tutorial"
/"Chapter 3 The Photometric Module, Lesson 2"

[Kinetics Module]
Measures time course change of photometric values at
fixed wavelength (Time course measurement). The activity
value can also be calculated in this module.
A
^ "UVProbe Tutorial"

A /"Chapter 4 The Kinetics Module, Lesson 3"

A-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1571 OF 4699


A-1 UVProbe Overview

[Report Generator]
A
Allows you to freely create layouts of various objects such
as measurement data and graphs on reports. You can
A
register the created layout as a separate user template and
use it as a printout.
A
^ "UVProbe Tutorial"
/"Chapter 5 The Report Generator, Lesson 4" A

A.1.2 Common Screen Frame

Menu Standard Tool

Instrument Status Window


Displays the current wavelength and photometric value in real time.
Also displays a calculated value of a simple operation using measured
photometric values.

Output Window
• "Output" displays various messages from the system (e.g. during print process).
• "Instrument history" displays the content and time of executed instrument
initialization, time of baseline correction, etc.

Fig. A-2 A

1572 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-3


A-1 UVProbe Overview

A A.1.3 Data File Structure


The data files created in the spectrum module and kinetics module are hierarchically structured (such
as "File" - "Storage" - "Data set"), allowing you to manage multiple data by only using a single file.
A

For example, if you perform derivative processing on spectrum data acquired from measurement,
A
both the measured data (raw data) and its converted data are stored in the same file, allowing easy
data management.
A
Created on measurement

File

Storage

Data set 1 (Raw data)

Data set 2 (Converted data)

Fig. A-3

NOTE
For example, the following naming convention may be useful for easy measurement data
management.
• Use "sample name" for the file name (e.g. Glass_plate).
• Use "date and time" for the storage name (e.g. 20020830).
• Use "data status" for the data set name. ("RawData" is set as default name.)

A-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1573 OF 4699


A-1 UVProbe Overview

A.1.4 Help Functions A


The UVProbe software is equipped with various help functions enabling you to understand its features
and operation procedures as you use the software.
A
„ Pop-up Helps
The pop-up helps display explanations of screen elements such as buttons.
A

1 Right-click the mouse near the item you wish to have


explained. A

2 Click the displayed "What's This?" button.

3 The pop-up help for the item is displayed.

Fig. A-4

1574 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-5


A-1 UVProbe Overview

A „ Help Topics
Select "Help Topics" from the [Help] menu to
display the [UVProbe Help] window.
A

Fig. A-5
A
-Contents-

1 Click the [Contents] tab.

2 Select the item you wish to have 3 The explanation of the selected item is
explained. displayed.

Fig. A-6

A-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1575 OF 4699


A-1 UVProbe Overview

-Keyword-
A

1 Click the [Index] tab. 2 Enter the keyword related to the item you wish to
have explained.
A

3 The item including the entered keyword is 5 The explanation of the selected
highlighted. item is displayed.
4 Select the item you wish to have explained.

Fig. A-7

1576 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-7


A-1 UVProbe Overview

-Search-
A

1 Click the [Search] tab. 2 Enter the word you wish to search.
A

3 Narrow down (click) the scope of


the search.

4 Select the item you wish to have


explained.

5 The explanation of the selected item is displayed.


The matched words are highlighted in the displayed text.

Fig. A-8

A-8 UV-1800 SERIES 1577 OF 4699


A-2 Basic Operation
A-2

A.2.1 UVProbe Startup/Shutdown A


„ Starting UVProbe
A
1 Click the UVProbe icon on the PC desktop.

A
2 If the software has been installed in security mode* or
GLP mode*, the User Login screen appears.
A
Enter the user ID and password registered to the
UVProbe, and click the [OK] button.

* For details on application modes, refer to the


UVProbe Tutorial "Chapter 1 Introduction".

NOTE Fig. A-9


The setting for the UV-1800 security function is not
linked to that for the UVProbe software security
mode. Be sure to complete the user registration and
passsword setting separately on the UVProbe
software.
^ "1.8 System Administration" in "Chapter 1
Introduction" of "UVProbe Tutorial"

3 The UVProbe software is started up.


For the procedure for establishing the connection
with the UV-1800, refer to "17.2.2 UVProbe Startup
and Communication Establishment".

Fig. A-10

1578 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-9


A-2 Basic Operation

A „ Shutting Down UVProbe

A 1 Click the [Disconnect] button to end the


communication with the UV-1800.
2

A 2 Click the "X" button on the upper right of the UVProbe


window to close it.

1
Fig. A-11

A-10 UV-1800 SERIES 1579 OF 4699


A-2 Basic Operation

A.2.2 Open/Close Data Files A


„ Opening Data Files
A
1 Select [Open] from the [File] menu.

1
A

Fig. A-12

2 Select the folder where the desired file is located.

4 Select the desired file.

3 Select the type of the file to be loaded. 5 Click the [Open] button.

Fig. A-13

1580 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-11


A-2 Basic Operation

A „ Closing Data Files


FOR SPECTRUM/KINETICS MODULE

A
1 Select [Properties] from the [File] menu.

Fig. A-14

The red asterisk (*) mark indicates


that the data is not yet saved to the 2 Select the data file to close.
hard disk.

3 Click the [Delete] button. 4 Click the [Close] button.

Fig. A-15

A-12 UV-1800 SERIES 1581 OF 4699


A-2 Basic Operation

FOR PHOTOMETRIC MODULE


A
The photometric module does not have a function to close data files.
Therefore, simply open another data file or create a new data file to discard data existing in PC memory.
A
1 Select [New] on the [File] menu.

A
1
A

Fig. A-16

A.2.3 Change Graph Scales


In the UVProbe software, you can change graph axis scales directly on the graph.

1 Click the upper (or lower) limit value of


the axis scale.

2 When the upper (or lower) limit value is highlighted,


input the desired value and press the key.

Fig. A-17

3 Using a similar procedure, change the upper (or lower) limit of


the other axis scale.

A
Fig. A-18

1582 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-13


A-2 Basic Operation

A A.2.4 Change Graph Display Settings


From [Customize] on the graph shortcut menu, you can control the width and colors of graph lines as
well as the format and size of label fonts.
A

1 Right-click the mouse on the graph area to display its shortcut


A menu.

2 Select [Customize].

Fig. A-19

„ Changing Graph Line Colors

3 Click the [Line Colors] tab. 4 Select the data where you wish to change line
color.

5 Click the desired


color.

6 Click the [OK] button.

Fig. A-20

A-14 UV-1800 SERIES 1583 OF 4699


A-2 Basic Operation

„ Changing Graph Line Width A

3 Click the [Line Colors] tab. 4 Select the data where you wish to change line
width. A

5 Click the ST buttons to select the desired


line width (from 1 to 5*, default value: 1).
*The greater the value, the thicker the graph
line.
6 Click the [OK] button.

Fig. A-21

1584 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-15


A-2 Basic Operation

A „ Changing Axis Label Font

3 Click the [Appearance] tab. 4 Select "Axis Labels, and Graph Title".
A

5 Select the desired font, size, color, etc. 6 Click the [OK] button.

Fig. A-22

A-16 UV-1800 SERIES 1585 OF 4699


A-3 Measurement Procedure
A-3

This chapter briefly describes the UVProbe measurement flow and operation procedure using the spectrum
A
module as an example.
For the operation procedure involving other measurement modules, refer to the UVProbe Tutorial (instruction
manual).
A
Spectrum Module ^ "Chapter 2 The Spectrum Module, Lesson 1"
Photometric Module ^ "Chapter 3 The Photometric Module, Lesson 2"
A
Kinetics Module ^ "Chapter 4 The Kinetics Module, Lesson 3"

When measuring samples in the spectrum module, the measurement flow roughly consists of the following A
steps:

A.3.1 Create New Measurement Method (parameter)


^ A-18

A.3.2 Saving the Measurement Method


^ A-20

A.3.3 Baseline Correction


^ A-21

A.3.4 Set the sample


^ A-23

A.3.5 Start Measurement


^ A-24

A.3.6 Measurement Completion/ Save Data


^ A-25

1586 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-17


A-3 Measurement Procedure

A
A.3.1 Create New Measurement Method (parameter)
A
A.3.2 Saving the Measurement Method
A
A.3.3 Baseline Correction
A
A.3.4 Set the sample

A.3.5 Start Measurement

A.3.6 Measurement Completion/ Save Data

Click [Method] from the [Edit] menu to


display the [Spectrum Method] window.

Fig. A-23

„ [Measurement] Tab Parameters

1 Select the [Measurement] tab.


1 2

2 Enter the [Wavelength Range (nm)].

3 Use the [T] key to select [Scan Speed].

4 Select [Single].

5 Select the checkbox [Auto Sampling Interval].

4 3 5
Fig. A-24

A-18 UV-1800 SERIES 1587 OF 4699


A-3 Measurement Procedure

„ [Instrument Parameter] Tab. A


1
1 Select the [Instrument Parameters] tab.
A

2 Use the [T] key to select [Measuring Mode].


A
3 Press [OK]. 2
A

3
Fig. A-25

1588 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-19


A-3 Measurement Procedure

A
A.3.1 Create New Measurement Method (parameter)

A
A.3.2 Saving the Measurement Method
A
A.3.3 Baseline Correction
A
A.3.4 Set the sample

A.3.5 Start Measurement

A.3.6 Measurement Completion/ Save Data

Click [Save as] from the [File] menu to


display the [Save Spectrum File] window.

Fig. A-26

Save the parameters of the current measurement method.

The [Save Spectrum File] dialog box is displayed.

1 Enter the file name.


1 2

2 Press [T] and select [Method File (*.smd)] for the file
type.

3 Press [Save].

3
Fig. A-27

A-20 UV-1800 SERIES 1589 OF 4699


A-3 Measurement Procedure

A
A.3.1 Create New Measurement Method (parameter)

A
A.3.2 Saving the Measurement Method

A
A.3.3 Baseline Correction
A
A.3.4 Set the sample

A.3.5 Start Measurement

A.3.6 Measurement Completion/ Save Data

NOTE
• Perform baseline correction if the instrument is turned ON after long periods of disuse, and if
measurement conditions have been changed.
• When baseline correction is selected, the default correction range indicated will vary depending
on the measurement module that is being used. For the spectrum module, the wavelength range
specified by the measurement method is indicated as the default correction range. Refer to the
“UVProbe Tutorial” and the on-line help menu for details.

The system corrects the baseline so that the current 0 (zero) Abs line (100 % transmittance/
reflectance line) is leveled in the specified wavelength range.

1590 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-21


A-3 Measurement Procedure

A 1 Verify that no sample is placed in the sample


compartment.

A
2 Click [Baseline] on the [Instrument Control Button]
bar to display [Baseline Parameter] window.

A
3 Verify that the displayed correction range is the same
as the wavelength range specified in the
A "measurement method", and click the [OK] button.
3 2
Fig. A-28

4 The baseline correction initiates.


DO NOT open the sample compartment cover before The instrument is
being set up.
the baseline correction process is completed.

The instrument status is displayed in the instrument


status window.
Baseline correction
is ongoing.

Baseline correction
is completed.
(The instrument is
standing by.)

Fig. A-29

A-22 UV-1800 SERIES 1591 OF 4699


A-3 Measurement Procedure

A
A.3.1 Create New Measurement Method (parameter)

A
A.3.2 Saving the Measurement Method

A
A.3.3 Baseline Correction

A
A.3.4 Set the sample

A.3.5 Start Measurement

A.3.6 Measurement Completion/ Save Data

1 Open the sample compartment cover and insert the


cell with sample into the cell holder on the sample
side.

2 Then close the sample compartment cover.

Sample compartment cover

The arrow indicates the


direction of the beam
passing through the cell
holder.

Sample side cell holder

Fig. A-30

1592 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-23


A-3 Measurement Procedure

A
A.3.1 Create New Measurement Method (parameter)

A
A.3.2 Saving the Measurement Method

A
A.3.3 Baseline Correction

A
A.3.4 Set the sample

A.3.5 Start Measurement

A.3.6 Measurement Completion/ Save Data

Click [Start] on the [Instrument Control Button] bar.

[START] button

Fig. A-31

A-24 UV-1800 SERIES 1593 OF 4699


A-3 Measurement Procedure

A
A.3.1 Create New Measurement Method (parameter)

A
A.3.2 Saving the Measurement Method

A
A.3.3 Baseline Correction

A
A.3.4 Set the sample

A.3.5 Start Measurement

A.3.6 Measurement Completion/ Save Data

After measurement is completed, the [New Data Set] window (Fig. A-32) is displayed. Enter filename, data
storage name (^ A.1.3 Data File Structure), analyst name, and any comments as necessary. Then click the
[OK] button.

The procedure for entering file names is given in the following:

1 Click the [Browse] button to display the [New Filename] window (Fig. A-33).

Fig. A-32

1594 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-25


A-3 Measurement Procedure

A
2 Select the destination folder to save the data file.

3 Enter the file name. 4 Click the [Open] button to close the [New Filename]
window.
In the [File name] column of the [New Data Set]
window, the path of the folder specified in (2) and the
file name entered in (3) are displayed.

Fig. A-33

NOTE
Raw data saved by [New Data Set] is stored only in the memory and is lost upon exiting UVProbe.
Save this data to a disk by selecting [File] - [Save As], or [File] - [Save] to store the data on the
memory.

Click [Save] from the [File] menu.


To change the file name, select [Save As] from the [File] menu.

Fig. A-34

A-26 UV-1800 SERIES 1595 OF 4699


A-4 Peak Pick
A-4

The peak pick function automatically detects peaks and valleys on spectrum data and time course data (time
A
course change of photometric values), and displays the wavelength (time) and photometric values as tabulated
data (Peak Pick Table).
The peak pick operation is executed automatically when data is created after measurement, and the obtained
A
results are saved with the measured data.

Clicking [Peak Pick] on the [Operations]


A
displays the peak pick table.

Fig. A-35

"File" Tab Peak Pick Table


Click the tab to switch No: Point number that is picked.
between multiple data. P/V: Indicates whether the data is a peak (S) or valley (T).
Wavelength (nm):
Wavelength that corresponds to the peak or valley.
Abs: Absorbance, transmittance, reflectance, or energy that
corresponds to the peak or valley.
Description:
Enter notes and comments about the data directly into the
cell.

Shortcut Menu (Peak Pick Table)


If you right-click the mouse on the pane where the peak pick table is displayed, the shortcut menu
appears.

Fig. A-36 A

1596 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-27


A-4 Peak Pick

A A.4.1 Show/Hide Peak (Valley) Marks on Graph


Each click [Mark Peaks] (Mark Valleys) on the shortcut menu toggles between showing and hiding
labels and marks on the graph.
A

(Showing peak and valley marks) (Hiding peak and valley marks)

Fig. A-37

A.4.2 Show/Hide Peaks (Valleys) on Peak Pick Table


Each click [Show Peaks] (Show Valleys) on the shortcut menu toggles between showing and hiding
peak (valley) data on the peak pick table.

(Showing peak and valley data)

(Hiding valley data)

Fig. A-38

A-28 UV-1800 SERIES 1597 OF 4699


A-4 Peak Pick

A.4.3 Specify Peak Pick Threshold (Changing Parameters) A


By changing the peak pick parameters (Threshold, Points), you can control graph-displayed data so
that unnecessary peaks and noises will not be detected.
A

Threshold: Refers to the distance from a peak point to the line connected between two valley points
A
(or assumed valley points) neighboring the peak.

Points: When photometric values continuously increase and decrease at a number of data points A
more than that specified by [Points], the maximum value within the range is detected as a
peak.
If photometric values continuously decrease and increase at a number of data points
more than that specified, the minimum value within the range is detected as a valley.

Threshold

Data point

Fig. A-39

1598 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-29


A-4 Peak Pick

Select [Properties] on the shortcut menu to display the properties window to set peak pick parameters
A
(Threshold, Points).

A
[Pin] button
Click this button to operate other windows (graphs and
A tables) with the properties window open. Otherwise, the
properties window will be closed once you operate the
other windows.
A
Click [Properties].

(Peak Pick Properties window)

Fig. A-40

A-30 UV-1800 SERIES 1599 OF 4699


A-4 Peak Pick

„ Example of changing "Threshold" A

Threshold: 0.001 Threshold: Changed to 0.009


(Default value) A

Fig. A-41

„ Example of changing "Points"

Points: 4 Points: Changed to 5


(Default value)

Fig. A-42

1600 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-31


A-5 Print Out
A-5

A A.5.1 UVProbe Printing Function


Using the UVProbe "Report Generator", you can freely create layouts and print various graphs and
operation tables. The created layout can also be saved as a separate report file.
A

To add printed objects on the report, click the [Insert] menu or the object tool buttons.

For detailed functions and operation procedures for creating and editing report files, refer to the
UVProbe Tutorial "Chapter 5 the Report Generator" or the UVProbe help files.

Object Toolbar Report Editing Area


You can select items to be printed (Object) from Adjust the size and position of inserted objects
this tool bar. and perform other settings in this area.
Clicking a tool button inserts the corresponding
object on the report editing area.

Fig. A-43

A-32 UV-1800 SERIES 1601 OF 4699


A-5 Print Out

Fig. A-44

1602 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-33


A-5 Print Out

A A.5.2 Printing Procedure


This section describes the procedure for printing measured data directly from different modules using
pre-installed report files (Quick Print).
A
When the UVProbe software is installed, various report*1 files are also installed in the installation
folder*2.
A
Each of the report files is linked to the graph screens or data operation tables on each measurement
module.
A The following is the procedure for the Quick Print function, using as an example the report file "Spc
Point Pick.rpt" linked to the peak pick table in the spectrum module.
*1 These are print template files created on the UVProbe Report Generator. Titles, graph area, and table area have
already been arranged at arbitrary positions. These files can be edited with the Report Generator. For details, refer
to the UVProbe Tutorial "Chapter 5 The Report Generator".
*2 This refers to the folder where the UVProbe application files are installed. If you have not arbitrarily changed the
location at installation time, the report files are located in this folder at the following path:
[C:\Program Files\Shimadzu\UVProbe\Reports]

1 Open the peak pick table.

Fig. A-45
2 When multiple files are currently loaded, click the
[File] tab and select a peak pick table to be prited.
3

3 Right-click the mouse on the peak pick table to


display the shortcut menu.

4 Click [Print] to start the printing process.

Placing the mouse pointer on the tab


displays the filename.
A
Fig. A-46

A-34 UV-1800 SERIES 1603 OF 4699


A-5 Print Out

Linked to the file name Text Print date and time


of the selected data.

Linked to the active graph


(Spectrum of the selected data).

Linked to the
measurement method Linked to the peak pick table of the
of the selected data. selected data.

Fig. A-47 Printout example of report file "Spc Point Pick.rpt" A

1604 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES A-35


10 Index

Index

1605 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES IX-1


Index

Symbols
λ recalibration → See "wavelength recalibration".
.

λb → See "background measurement wavelength".


.

Numerics
100 %T (0 Abs) correction ............................................................................................................................... 1-2

A
Abs Ratio (Absorbance ratio) .............................................................................................................. 12-4, 16-38
Abs. Coefficient ................................................................................................................................... 3-19, 12-16
Accumulation time (Data accum. time) ...............................................................................6-3, 14-3, 14-9, 17-11
Activity value (Activ.) ............................................................................................................................... 8-2, 8-15
Area Calculation .......................................................................................................................................... 13-21
ASC ............................................................................................................................................................... 18-9
Auto Print ................................................................................................................................................ 6-6, 10-3
Auto print (of the validation result) ............................................................................................................... 16-13
Auto Scal (Auto Scale) ................................................................................. 6-14, 8-13, 9-13, 10-12, 11-25, 13-6
Auto Validation .................................................................................................................................... 16-6, 16-49
AUTO ZERO ............................................................................................................................................. 1-2, 1-4
Auto-file Function ............................................................................................................................................. 6-9

B
background correction (BG Corr.) ........................................................................................................... 8-4, 12-5
background measurement wavelength (λb) ............................................................................................ 8-4, 12-5
Baseline correction (Base Corr) ........................................................................ 1-2, 5-4, 6-7, 7-3, 8-5, 11-5, 12-7
Baseline Flatness ........................................................................................................................................ 16-53
Baseline Stability ......................................................................................................................................... 16-56
BCA Method ............................................................................................................................12-3, 12-14, 12-15
Beep .............................................................................................................................................................. 14-3
BG Corr. → See "Background correction".
Biuret Method ..........................................................................................................................12-3, 12-14, 12-15

C
Calibration Curve Display .............................................................................................................................. 7-14
Calibration Curve Equation → See "Equation".
Calibration Curve modification (Change / Add / Delete / Chg Ord) ....................................................... 7-13, 7-15
CBB Method ............................................................................................................................12-3, 12-14, 12-15
Cell blank corr. .........................................................................................................................18-7, 18-13, 18-14
Change sample each λ .................................................................................................................................... 5-7
character input .......................................................................................................................................... 3-5, 7-8
Chg.User (Change User) → See "user selection".
Clock set ........................................................................................................................................................ 14-3
COM Port → See "Port".
Concentration input ............................................................................................................................. 7-10, 11-11
Concentration table ........................................................................................................................................ 7-13
control codes (of printer / external command) .................................................................................... 3-15, 17-12
correlation coefficient ............................................................................................................................ 3-19, 7-15
CPS-240 ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-3
CSV Conv (CSV Conversion) ............................................................................................................... 2-13, 2-15
Curve data (in print format selection) .................................................................................................... 8-22, 9-21
Cycle (interval) ..........................................................................................................................6-5, 8-6, 9-5, 10-5

D
Data accum. time → See "Accumulation time".

IX-2 UV-1800 SERIES 1606 OF 4699


Index

Data Disp (Data Display, List Display) ....................................... 4-8, 5-12, 7-18, 8-17, 9-16, 11-19, 12-12, 12-21
Data Print ..................................................................................................................................................... 13-31
Data Proc (Data Processing) ....................................................................................................... 6-10, 10-8, 13-1
Decimal display ..................................................................................................................................... 14-2, 14-5
Derivative Operations (incl. Smoothing) ...................................................................................................... 13-12
Derivative Quantitation .................................................................................................................................. 7-22
Discriminator ............................................................................................................................................. 9-2, 9-4
Disp off time (LCD Automatically turning off time) ................................................................................ 14-3, 14-9
Display mode .......................................................................................................................................... 6-6, 11-4
DNA quantitation .......................................................................................................................... 12-2, 12-4, 12-6
Draw curve → See "Print Waveform".
Drive cell No. ................................................................................................................................................. 18-6
Driver → See "Virtual COM port driver".
Dwell Time .......................................................................................................................................... 18-8, 18-11

E
Electromagnetic valve .................................................................................................................................... 18-8
Equation (of calibration curve) ............................................................................................................ 7-15, 12-20
ESC/P ................................................................................................................................................... 3-15, 14-8
External Commands .................................................................................................................................... 17-12

F
File Copy / Delete .......................................................................................................................................... 2-13
File extensions ............................................................................................................................... 3-3, 3-16, 3-20
File Load .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
File Management (File Mng) ................................................................................................................... 2-3, 2-11
File Save .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
File Selection / Canceling of File Selection .................................................................................................... 2-14
function key ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

G
GOTO WL ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-4

H
hard copy (screen copy) ................................................................................................................................ 3-15
Header .......................................................................................................................... 2-9, 2-13, 3-7, 3-10, 3-12
Hold-file-name function .................................................................................................................................... 3-4

I
Input Num .................................................................................................... 6-14, 8-13, 9-13, 10-12, 11-25, 13-6
Instrument baseline correction ....................................................................................................................... 15-3
Instrument Validation ..................................................................................................................................... 16-1
Interval → See "cycle".

K
Key-in ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-11
K-factor Method ........................................................................................................................................ 4-6, 7-6

L
lag time ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2, 8-7
Lamp life ........................................................................................................................................................ 15-2
Lamp usage time ........................................................................................................................................... 15-4
LCD automatically turning off time → See "Disp. off time".

1607 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES IX-3


Index

LCD contrast → See "contrast".


Light source ..........................................................................................................................6-7, 10-4, 14-2, 14-6
Light source switching wavelength ................................................................................................................ 14-6
Load Curv (Load Curve) .................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Load Data ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-9
Load Parm (Load Parameter) .......................................................................................................................... 3-9
Log out ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-5, 2-4
Login ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Lowry Method ..........................................................................................................................12-2, 12-14, 12-15

M
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................. 15-1
Manu. Sip ....................................................................................................................................................... 18-9
Measurement input ........................................................................................................................................ 7-11
mixed sample ........................................................................................................................................ 11-2, 11-4
MMC-1600 ..................................................................................................................................................... 18-3
MPU (screen copy printer) .................................................................................................................... 3-15, 14-8
Multi-cell .....................................................................................................................................16-14, 18-3, 18-4
Multi-cell sequential measurement input ....................................................................................................... 7-12
Multi-point calibration curve ............................................................................................................................. 7-7

N
No. of Components ............................................................................................................................... 11-2, 11-4
No. of Meas. ......................................................................................................................................... 7-3, 12-17
No. of rinses ........................................................................................................................................ 18-9, 18-11
No. of scans ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
No. of Std ................................................................................................................................................ 7-7, 11-4
Noise Level .................................................................................................................................................. 16-49
Number of storable files ................................................................................................................................... 3-2

O
One-wavelength method .................................................................................................................................. 7-1
Overlay ................................................................................................................................................... 6-6, 11-4

P
password .........................................................................................................................................1-5, 1-6, 15-9
Password change ............................................................................................................................. 15-10, 15-13
PC Ctrl .........................................................................................................................................2-4, 15-10, 17-1
PCL ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-15, 14-8
Peak Detection ............................................................................................................................................ 13-17
Photometric Accuracy .................................................................................................................................. 16-21
Photometric Repeatability ............................................................................................................................ 16-27
Point Pick ..................................................................................................................................................... 13-26
Port (COM Port) ............................................................................................................................................. 17-2
Print init. Satus ............................................................................................................................................. 16-14
Print numeric data for every measurement .................................................................................................... 3-15
Print waveform (draw curve) .............................................3-15, 6-16, 6-17, 8-14, 8-19, 9-14, 9-18, 10-13, 10-14
Print waveform data ....................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Printer (Printer Setting) ......................................................................................................................... 14-3, 14-7
Prnt Data (Print using function keys) ............................................................................................................. 3-15
Protein quantitation ................................................................................................. 12-2, 12-3, 12-4, 12-6, 12-16
Protocol ........................................................................................................................................................ 17-12
Pump speed ........................................................................................................................................ 18-8, 18-11
pure sample .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2, 11-4
Purge time ..................................................................................................................................................... 18-9
Purge volume ............................................................................................................................................... 18-11

IX-4 UV-1800 SERIES 1608 OF 4699


Index

R
rate interval ............................................................................................................................................... 9-2, 9-6
rate time .................................................................................................................................................... 8-2, 8-7
Reading with Cursor .................................................................................... 6-12, 8-11, 9-11, 10-10, 11-23, 13-4
Reagent blank corr. ................................................................................................................. 18-7, 18-12, 18-14
Rec. range ...................................................................................................................... 6-3, 8-5, 9-3, 10-3, 11-3
Resolution .................................................................................................................................................... 16-38
Resolution D2 ............................................................................................................................................... 16-60
Restore ........................................................................................................ 6-14, 8-13, 9-13, 10-12, 11-25, 13-6

S
S/R exchange ................................................................................................................................................ 14-2
Sample No. (Smpl No.) ........................................................................................................................... 4-4, 7-16
Sample recovery .......................................................................................................................................... 18-11
Sav Curve (Save Curve) .................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Sav Param (Save Parameter) .......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Save Data ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
Scan pitch ............................................................................................................................................... 6-4, 11-3
Scan range ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3, 11-3
Scan speed ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3, 11-4
screen copy → See "hard copy".
screen copy printer → See "MPU".
Security .......................................................................................................................................................... 15-6
Semi-Auto validation ........................................................................................................................... 16-3, 16-21
Sequential ............................................................................................................................................... 6-6, 11-4
Single point calibration curve ........................................................................................................................... 7-7
Sip volume ................................................................................................................................................... 18-11
Sipper ......................................................................................................................... 1-2, 5-8, 18-3, 18-8, 18-10
Sipping time ................................................................................................................................................... 18-8
smoothing → See "Derivative Operations".
Standard Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 14-4
Standard type ................................................................................................................................................ 11-4
Start program ........................................................................................................................................ 14-2, 14-4
Stored parameter files ................................................................................................................................... 14-4
Stray Light .................................................................................................................................................... 16-33

T
Table data (in print format selection) .................................................................................................... 8-21, 9-20
Three-wavelength Quantitation ............................................................................................................. 7-20, 7-21
Time scale ....................................................................................................................................... 8-5, 9-3, 10-3
Two-wavelength Quantitation ........................................................................................................................ 7-20

U
Undo .............................................................................................................................................................. 13-3
Unit (Concentration Unit) ..................................................................................................7-8, 12-2, 12-16, 12-18
USB Memory ................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
user ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-5, 15-6
user selection (Chg user) ................................................................................................................................. 1-6
Utilities Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
UV Method (UV Absorption Method) .................................................................................................. 12-3, 12-16
UVprobe ................................................................................................................................. 1-8, 3-16, 17-6, A-1

1609 OF 4699 UV-1800 SERIES IX-5


Index

V
Validity (of validation products) .................................................................................................................... 16-17
Valley ........................................................................................................................................................... 13-17
Virtual COM port driver (UV-1800 device driver) ........................................................................................... 17-2

W
wavelength recalibration (λ recalibration) ...................................................................................................... 15-4
WL Accuracy (Wavelength Accuracy) ......................................................................................................... 16-43
WL Accuracy D2 (Wavelength Accuracy D2) ............................................................................................... 16-63
WL Repeatability D2 (Wavelength Repeatability D2) ................................................................................... 16-67

Z
Zero intercept ................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Zoom ............................................................................................................ 6-13, 8-12, 9-12, 10-11, 11-24, 13-5

IX-6 UV-1800 SERIES 1610 OF 4699

Вам также может понравиться